GA18 2081 1_3276_Description_and_Programmers_Guide 1 3276 Description And Programmers Guide
User Manual: Pdf GA18-2081-1_3276_Description_and_Programmers_Guide
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 353
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
GAI 8-2081-1
File No _S360/S370/S3/4300/81 00-09
Systems
-- -
--- -- --------' --
GAI8-208I-1
File No. 8360/8370/83/4300/8100-09
IBM 3270
Information Display System
Systems
3276 Control Unit
Display Station
Description and
Programmer's Guide
-=-=
-=
=:
-
--.-.
- - - ---
-C-
-~--
~---
----~-~-.-
Warning: This equipmen~ generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual,
may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Qass A computing device pursuant to Subpart J
of Part 1S of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection
against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in
which case, the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever
measures may be required to correct the interference.
Second Edition (May 1983)
This major revision obsoletes GAI8-2081'(). Changes or additions to the text and
illustrations are indicated by a vertical line to the left of the change.
Changes are made periodically to the information herein t before using this publication
in connection with the operation of IBM systems, consult the latestlBM System/370
BibliogrQphy, GC20'()OOI, for the editions that are applicable and current.
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply that
IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any
reference to an IBM program product in this publication is not intended to state or
imply that only IBM's program product may be used. Any functionally equivalent
program may be used instead.
Publications are not stocked at the address given below. Requests for mM publications
should be made to your IBM representative or to the mM branch office serving your'
locality.
A form for readers' comments is provided at the back of this ~ublication. If the form
has been removed, comments may be addressed to mM Corporation. Department
812J t 1133 Westchester Avenue, White Plains, New York. 10604. U.S.A. IBM may use
or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it believes appropriate
without incurring any obligation to you.
CS>
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1981.1983
Preface
This publication provides management, progranuners, and
system analysts with detailed reference material relating to
the IBM 3270 Information Display System 3276
Control Unit Display Station.
Reference material is arranged in the following appendixes:
Appendix A. Indicators and Controls
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
Organization of This Publication
Appendix C. Status Indicator Codes
Appendix D. APL/Text Feature
This manual is organized into the following 9hapters:
Appendix E. Katakana Feature
Chapter 1, 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams.
Appendix F. Encrypt/Decrypt Feature
Chapter 2, Terminals. This chapter, divided into two
main sections, provides general information about displays
and printers. The "Display" section presents detailed
infonnation about display fields, keyboards, selector·light·
pen operations, the security keylock, and the magnetic
card reading device. The ''Printer'' section discusses printer
capabilities and control, including formatting, orders,
buffered operation, SNA character string, and copy func·
tions. (See also IBM 3230 Printer Product Description,
GA24·3759, IBM 3262 Printer Component Description,
GA24-3741,IBM 3268 Printer Component Description,
GA27·3268, IBM 3178 Display Station Description,
GAI8·2127, IBM3270 Information Display System:
Color and Programmed Symbols, GA33-3056, IBM 3287
Printer Component Description, GA27-3135, and
IBM 3289 Line Printer Component Description,
GA27-3176.)
I
Chapter 3, Remote Operations-BSC, treats the 3276 Models
1,2,3, and 4.
Chapter 4, 3276 SNA/SDLC Communication, describes SNA
and SDLC protocols for the 3276. It also presents SNA
reference data applicable to the machine.
Chapter 5, Screen Design, introduces important 3270
concepts. Shows an example of what a 3270 di~play
message might look like, what coding elements are required to write this message in your program, and how
tenninal operator input might be handled.
Chapter 6, Screen Management, suggests macro defmitions
and programming routines that might be written to encode
and decode messages to and from the display.
I Appendix G. Record Formatted Maintenance Statistics
(RECBMS) Formats
Related Publications
Information concerning the Multiuse Communications Loop,
used to attach 3270 devices to 8100 Information Systems,
is contained in:
• IBM 8100 Information System: Communications, Loop,
and Display/Printer Attachment Description, GA27-2883
• IBM Multiuse Communications Loop Planning Guide,
GA23·0033
• IBM Multiuse Communications Loop Installation Guide,
GA23·0039
The two Multiuse Communications Loop publications refer·
red to above and the following IBM 4300 Processor
publications provide information concerning attachment of
the 3276 to the 4331 Processor via the 4331 loop adapter:
• IBM 4300 Processors Summary and Input/Outpu"t & Data
Communications Configurator, GA33-1523
• IBM 4331 Processor Functional Characteristics and
Processor Complex Configurator, GA33-1526
Publications describing the printers and displays attaching
to the 3276, the 3270 data stream, the use of color, and
programming information, are listed in the publication IBM
3270 Information Display System, Library User's Guide,
GA23·0058.
iii
Contents
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams .••.•••
Introduction .•••....••••.•.••••...•••••
Interface Codes . . . . . • . • • • . • • . . . . . • . . • • . ..
Device Addressing .. . : • • • • • . . • . . • . . • • . • • ','
Data Stream. . . . . . • . . • • • • . . . . . . • . . . . . • •.
Commands . . • • . • • • • • • • . . . . . . • • . . • • • • .•
Write Commands • . . . • • • • . . . . . . • . • . • • . . .•
Write Command ..••.•••..•....•..•...•
Erase/Write Command .•••••..•••....••...
Erase/Write Alternate Command. . . . • • • . . . • • •.
Write, Erase/Write, and Erase/Write Alternate
Commands (LU Type 3) .•••.•...••..••.•••
Read Commands • • . • • . • • . • . . . . . . . . • • • . . .
Read ButTer Command .•••..•....••..•.•.
Read Modified Command ••..•....•.••..••.
Read Modified All Command . . . . . . . • . • • . . . • •
Inbound Transmissions •..••••....•.•.•...•
Read States • • . • . . • • . • . • • . . . . . • • . • • . . •
Host Acknowledgments • • • • . . . . . . . . . . • • • ••
Processing of Read Commands . . . . . . . . . • . . . .•
Control Commands. • • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . ••
Copy Command .............••...•..••
Erase All Unprotected Command .....•...•.••
Orders . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • • . . • .•
Start Field (SF) Order . • . . . . . . . . • . . . • • . • . .
Set Buffer Address (SBA) Order ......•..•...•
Insert Cursor (lC) Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • .•
Program Tab (PT) Order ......•..•...•..•.•
Repeat to Address (RA) Order . . . • . . . . . . • • . .•
Erase Unprotected to Address (EUA) Order ...•.•.
1-15
1-17
1-17
1-18
1-22
1-22
1-22
1-24
1-25
1-27
1-27
1-30
1-30
1-31
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-33
1-33
Chapter 2. Temlinals . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
Displays ....•........•..•.•..•....•..•
Display Images . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . • • . • .
Display Fields. . . . • . . . . . .' . . • • . . . . . . . . . .•
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . •
Field Attributes . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Field Attribute Character . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . ••
Base Color Mode . . • . . . • . . . . • . • . . . • . . • . •
Keyboard Operations .••••.•...•..•...•...•
Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . • . . . • . . .
Keyboards. . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . • . • • .
Key Functions .. • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . .•
Automatic Sldp . . . . . . • • . . . . . • . . . . • • • • • .
Character~rlented Keys .••........•..•••.
Field~rlented Keys . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .•
Erase EOF (Erase to End of Field) Key • . . . . . . • • .
ERASE INPUT Key ...••...........•..•.
INS (Insert) Mode Key (3178,3276,3278, or 3279) ..
Delete Key (3178,3276,3278, or 3279) ..•.•....
RESET Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . • • . . . •
DUP (Duplicate) Key . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . .
FM (Field Mark) Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Attention Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYS (System) REQ Key ......•..•.•...•••.
DEV CNCL (Device Cancel) Key. . . . . • . . . . . • . •
(SHIFT Key) - 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279 • . . . . . . •
(LOCK Key) - 3178,3276,3278, or 3279 ...•.•..
(NUM Key) - 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279 •....... '
(NUM LOCK Key) - 3178,3276,3278, or 3279 •... ,
(Alpba Key) - 3178,3276,3278, or 3279. • • . . . . . .
CURSR SEL (Cursor Select) Key ....•••.•....
2-1
2-1
2-1
24
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
I
I-I
I-I
1-3
1-3
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-12
1-12
ATTN (Attention) Key • • • • • • . . • • • • • • • • • • • 2-15
CURSR (Cursor) BLINK Key. • • • . . • • • • • • • . • • 2-15
ALT CURSR (Alternate Cursor) Key • • • • . • • • • • • 2-15
TEST Key. . . . . • . . • • • • • • • • • . • • • . • • . • • 2-15
(Click Key) . • • . • . . . . • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• •• 2-16
(Print Key) •. . . . ~ . . • • • • . • • • • • • • • . • • •• 2-16
IDENT Key . . . . . . . • • • • • . • • . • • • • • . • • •• 2-16
Dead Keys, Canadian-French Keyboards ••••••.••• 2-17
Numeric Lock Feature Operation •.•••••..••••• 2-17
Keyboard Disabled (Do Not Enter Condition) ••••••• 2-18
Selector-Ljght-Pen Operations .••••••.••••••.•• 2-20
Selector-Light-Pen Field Format . • • • • • . • • • • • • •. 2-20
Designator Characters •.••••.•••••.•••••••• 2-21
Security Keylock • • . • • . • . . • • '. • • • • • • • • • • • .• 2-23
Magnetic Slot Reader .•.•...••••.•••••••••• 2-24
10-Cbaracter Set •.••..••.•••••••••••••.. 2-25
Magnetic-Stripe Format . . . • • . • . . . . • • • • • • . •• 2-26
Operational Differences because of Screen Format •••. 2-26
Error Conditions . • • . . . i. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-30
MSR Validity Test . • . . • • • • . • • • • • • • • • . • • •• 2-30
MSR Operator Indicators and Alarm • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2-31
Printers .....•......•••.•...•••••..• '. • 2-32
Print Line Formatting •...••••••.••••••. '•.• 2-32
Printer Orders. . . . . . . . • • • • • • . . • • • . • • • . •• 2-34
New Line (NL) and End of Message (EM)
(All Printers) . . . . . . • . . • . • . . • • . • . . . • . .• 2-34
Forms Feed (FFJ(All Printers) •••••.•.•.•..• 2-34
Carriage Return (CR)
(All Printers) •.•.. . . . • • • . • . • • . • • • . • • • • 2-34
Buffered Printer Operations ..•...••••.••.••• 2-35
Page Length Control Operations • . • . • . • . • . • • • •• 2-35
SNA Characters String
(All Printers) • . . . . . . . . . . • • . . • . . • . . ~ . . . . 2-36
SCS Control Codes. . . . . • • . • • • • • • • • • . • • •• 2-36
Program Attention (pA) and
Cancel Print Switcbes .. . . . . . . • • • • . . . • • . . . 241
Print Format Control ....••....•••...••.•. 241
Local Copy Function .....•..•.•...•..•••• 242
3276 Default Matrix . . . . . . . . . • • • . • • • . . • . • 242
3276 Local Copy Operation •...•..••.•••... 243
Host-Initiated Local Copy Using SNA/SDLC . . • . • • . 245
Local Copy Performed without SNA Protocol • • • • • • 247
Mono/Dual Case Control .•...••••..•..•.•• 248
Format Control during Shared Printer Operations . • •• 248
Error Conditions • . . . . . . . • • . . • . . . • • • • . . . • 2-50
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSC . . • . . . . . . . . ; ••
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . •
Code Structures ..•......••••..••..•.••.
Channel Program Concepts . . . . • • . • • . • • . • • • • •
Text Blocking ........•.•....•..•••.•.••
Related Publications . . . • . . . . . . • . • • . . • . . • • •
Multipoint (Nonswitched Line) Data Link Control ••••.
3276 Modes of Operation ...•.•••.••••.••••.
Control Mode. • . . . . • . • • . • • . • • • • • • • • • • •
Text Mode ........•.•.. ~ • . • . • • • • . . .•
Transparent Monitor Mode . . • • . • . . . • • .'. . • ••
Redundancy Checking . . • • • . • . . • • . . . . . • . . • •
Data-Link Control Characters. . . • • . . . • • • . • • • . .
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3
34
34
Pad .•••.•••••••••••.•••••••••••••• 3-5
SYN (Synchronous Idle) •.....••••.••...•• 3-5
DLE (Data Link Escape) .•...••.•..••••... 3-5
v
ACK 0 (Even Acknowledge) •....••...•.••.•
ACK 1 (Odd Acknowledge) • • • . • • • . . . . . • • • . .
NAK (Negative Acknowledgment) . . . . • . . . . • . ••
ENQ (Enquiry) ..........••....•••.....
WACK (Wait before Transmit) . . • • • . . • • • • • . . .
RVI (Reverse Interrupt) •.••.•..•.••.••••••
STX (Start of Text) .•..•..••..•.....••••
SOH (Start of Heading) . . . • . . . . • . . . . . • • . ••
ETB (End of Transmission Block) ....•••..••.•
ETX (End of Text). . • . • . . • • • . • . . . • • • . . ••
EOT (End of Transmission) • • • . • • • • . . • • • • . • .
ITB (End of Intermediate Transmission Block). • • • . •
ESC (Escape) .•...••••..•••...•••...••
TTD (Temporary Text Delay) . • • • . . . • • . . • • • •
Operational Sequences (Nonswitched Line).. • • . . • • • • .
Remote Chaining of 3276 Commands • . • • . • • • • • . •
General and Specific Poll Sequences . . . • . • • • • • • .•
Selection Addressing Sequence • • • . . . • • . • . • • • •.
Write-Type and Control-Type Command Sequences. . • .
Read-Type Command Sequences ••...••.••••..•
Status and Sense (S/S) Bytes . • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • •
Error-Recovery Procedures . • • . . . . . . . • • . • . • • • •
Supplementary Procedures • . . . . • • . . • . . . . • • ••
NAK to a Text Block ...•.••.••...•...•••.
EOT to a Text Block. • . . . . • . • • . . . • • . . . • • . .
Errors Detected during a Specific or
General Poll Sequence . . • • • . • . • . . • . • • . • • . ••
RVI to Selection Addressing Sequence ••••...••••
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-15
3-15
3-19
3-22
3-22
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-29
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications. • • . • . . • • 4-1
Transmission Formats ........••.•.•••.•.•••
Session Components . . . . . . . • . • . • . • • . . . • • • • •
SNA Sessions . . • . . • . . . • • • . • • . . • • . • • • • . • •
SSCP-PU Session • . . . . . . . . • • . . • . . • • . . • • . .
SSCP-Secondary LU Session ••..•..•••...••..
LU·LU Session . . . • . . • • . . • • . . • • • . • . • • • • •
Initiating an LU·LU Session. . • • . . • • . • • . • • . • •
3276 Attachmentto a 3790 •.••••.•••••.•..
Terminating an LU-LU Session . . • • . . • . . . • • • . •
TranS11lission Header . . . . . '.' . . • . . • • • • . • • . • •
EFI=1 ••....•.......••..•••••..••••
EFlcO ........•..•••....•.••..•••.•
SNA Commands . . . . . . . . . . • . • • • • . • • . • • . • •
Commands Supported . . . . . • . • • • . • . . . • • . • • .
Command Description • . . • • • . • • . . . • • . • • • • • .
Activate Physical Unit (ACTPU) . • • • • . . . • • • . • •
Deactivate Physical Unit (DACTPU) • • • • • • • • . • • .
Activate Logical Unit (ACTLU) •• . . . • . . • • . • . •
Deactivate Logical Unit (DACTLU) • . • . . • . • . . . .
Bind •......•...••.••••.•.•..••••.••
Unbind •....•.....••.•.••.•.••..•••
Clear ••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••.•
Start Data Traffic (SDT) •.••••••.•.•••.••••
Cancel . . . . . . • . . . • • . . • • . • • .'. . • • • • • • •
Chase •...•.......•..•••..•••.•••.•
Bid .....•......••..•..•.••••••••.•
Signal •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
LU Status (LUSTAT) .. . • . . • . . . • . • • • • • . • .
Ready to Receive (RTR) •...•••.•...••••.•
REQMS ......••...•••.••• '••••••••••
RECFMS •••••.•••••••••••••••••••••
Shutdown . . • . . . . • . . • • . • • • • . • • • . • • • • •
Shutdown Complete . . • • . . • • • . . . • . • • • . • . •
FM Data. . . . . • . . • • . . . • • • . • • • . • • • • . • •
Pacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • • . . • • • . • • •
LU Type 1 ....•.•......•••.••....••.
4·1
4·2
4·2
4·2
4·3
4·3
4·3
4·5
4·5
4-6
4-7
4·7
4·7
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-9
4·13
4·13
4·13
4·13
4·14
4·14
4·15
4·15
4·15
4-15
4·16
4·16
4·16
4·16
4·19
4·19
LU Types 2 and 3 .....••.••••••.•••••••
SNA Responses. • . . . . • • • . • • • . . • • • . • • • • • •
Summary of SNA Commands. . . . . . • • . • . • • . • • •
Sample SNA COlDDland Sequences . • • • • • • . • • • • • •
Session Processing States •..•••...••...•••••
Data Traffic (Reset/Active) State •....•••••••••
Contention (CONT) State • • • • . . • • . • • • • • . • • • •
Send (SEND) State . . . • • . . • . • . • • • • . . • • • . •.•
Receive (RCV) State . . • • . . . • • . . . • • • . • • • • • •
ERPI State . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • • • • • • • • .
Bracket States ..••...••.••••..•••.•••••
Between Bracket (BETB) State •••.••••.••••••
Pending Begin Bracket (pEND. BB) State • • • . . • • • •
In Bracket (lNB) State. • • • • . • • • . • • • • . • • • • •
3276 Bracket State Errors ..••••••••.••••.••
RU Lengths ••.•.•••••••••••••••••••••••
Outbound to the 3276 . . . . . • • . . . • • . . . . • • . • •
Inbound from the 3276 ....••..•••.•••..•••
Segmenting Description • . . . • . . . • • • . . • • • . • • . .
Segmenting Outbound .........•..••.•••••.
. Segmenting Inbound . • . . • • . . . • • . • • • • . • • • . •
The 3276 Errors ..•. . . . . . . . • • . • • • . . • • • . • •
Data Link . . . • • • . • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
LU-LU Session Error Reporting .••.••..•••...•
3276 Session Interaction ....•.•..••••..•••••
Setting the Screen Size ...••••.•••••••••••••
Operati9n in SSCP-SLU Session ...••••..•••••••
SSCP-SLU Contention Operation ••••••••.•••••
Nonerror Operation . • • • • • . • • . . . • • • • • . • • .'
Error Operation .•........••..•••.•••.•
Outbound Message Handling • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Inbound Message Handling • . . • • • • . . • • • • • • • • •
System Logon (3178, 3276; 3278 or 3279 Attached
to 3276) • . • • . . . . • . . . . • . . . • • • . . . • • • . .
System Logoff (3178, 3276; 3278 or 3279 Attached
to 3276) . . . • • . . • . • • . . . • • . . • • • • . • • • • •
SNA Printer Control Sessions . . . • • . . • • • . • . • • • • .
Remote Operations· SDLC . . . . . . . . • • • . . • • • • . •
SDLC Transmission Frames • . . • . . • . • • • • . . . • • .
Response Modes .•.•••...••..•••••.••••
Control Field . . • . . . • . . . . • . • • • . . . • • • . • •
Supervisory Commands • • • . • . • . . . • • • • . . • • .
Nonsequenced Commands and Responses. . • . • • • • •
Terminal Identification and Addressing • • • . . . • . . . •
TerminallD . . . . . . • • • . . • • . . • . . . . • • . • • •
SDLC Station Address • . . • . . . • • . . • • • • • • • . •
Information (I) Frame . • . • . . • • . • • • • . • • • • • •
Sequence Error Recovery Procedures .•• • • . • • . • • •
Abort Function. . . • • • . . . . • . . . . • • • • . • • • •
Timeout Controls •..••...•••.•••••••...•
SNA Reference Data (3276) •...••.•••..••••••
Bind Default .•...••....•.....•••.•.•••
Bind Check . • • • . . . . • • . . . . • • . . • • • • . . • • •
SNA Sense Codes. • . . . . . • . . . . . • • • . • . • • . . •
Logical Unit Status (LUSTAT) ...•.••...•••.•.
Error·Recovery Procedures .•.•..••.••••••••.
Clapter S. Screen Design •••••.•••••••••••••••
Introduction ....•...•.•..•..•••••.•..••
Field Concept. . . • . . . . . . • . . . • • • . • • • • . • • • •
What Attn'butes May Be Assigned to a Field .• • • • • .•
Protection . . . • . • . . . • • . . • • • • • . . . • • • . •.
Color ...•...•....••.•..•..••.•..•.•
Character Content . . . . . . . . . • • . . • . • . . • • . •
Visibility and Detectability .•.•••.••••.•••••
Transmission ....•....•....•••...••.••.
4·20
4-20
4·21
4·23
4-29
4-29
4·29
4·29
4·30
4·31
4-31
4-32
4·32
4·32
4·32
4-33
4-33
4-33
4·34
4·34
4·35
4·35
4·35
4-35
4-36
4·38
4·38
4·38
4·38
4·38
4·39
4·39
440
440
441
442
442
442
443
443
4-44
447
447
447
447
447
447
448
449
449
4·50
4-51
4·55
4-58
S·1
5·1
5·1
5·2
5·2
5·2
5-3
54
54
Example of Field Deimition • . . • . . . . . • . . • . . . . .
Planning the Panel . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • .
Using the Panel Layout Sheet. • . . . • . . • . . • • . • .
An Example of Laying Out a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Orders to the Panel Layout Sheets . . . . . . . .
Coding the Panel . • . . . . . • • . . . . . • . . . . • . . . • •
Using the Repeat to Address Order .••..•.•••.•..
Using the Write Control Character (WCC) . . • . . • . • . . •
An Example of a Sequence of Panels . . . . . . . . • • . • .
Analyzing Input Data . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . •
The Operator's Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attention Identifier (AID) • • . • . . . . . • • • • . • . • .
Input Data . . . . • • • . . . . • • . . • • . . • • • . • • • •
SBA Codes • . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • • • • .
Program Attention (PA) Keys . • . • • . . . • • • • . • . .
Program Function (PF) Keys • • . • . . • • • • . . . . . . •
Selector Pen and Cursor Select Input and Output .. . . . •
Selector Field Format . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . • • . . . . .
Designator Characters . . . • • • . . . . • . . . . . . . . • .
The Relationship of One Data Stream to Another • . • . . .
Modifying Existing Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .•
Using Erase Unprotected to Address (EUA) . . . . . . • . •
Using Erase All Unprotected (EAU) Command. . . • . . . .
Repetitive Output . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . ••. ! '
Using the Program Tab (PT) •••••.••••••••••••
Chaptei 6. Screen Management . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • .
Decoding and Generating Data Streams . . . . . . . • . . . .
Decoding Read Modified Input Data Stream . . . • • . •.
Nonselector Pen or Noncursor Select Data Streams •. .
Immediate Selector Pen or Cursor Select Data Stream. .
Mixed Read Modified Input Data Streams . . . . . . . •
BuDding Output Data Streams . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . .
Static Data Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • •
Semidynamic Output Streams . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . .
Dynamic Output Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Large Screen Size. . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .
5-5 .
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-12
5-18
5-26
5-28
5-30
5-35
5-35
5-36
5-36
5-36
5-37
5-37
5-38
5-38
5-39
540
541
544
545
547
547
6-1
6-2
6-2
64
6-7
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-13
6-14
6-15
Appendix C. Status Indicator Code • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • C-I
Appendix D. APL/Text Feature • • . . • . • • . . • • . • • • •
APL/Text and Text Printer Data Streams • • • • • • • • • .•
3276 APL/Text. . . . . . • • • • . . . • • • • • • • • • • . . •
3278-1, -2, -3, and 4 or 3279-2B and -3B APL/Text ••••
APL Keyboards. • • . . . • • • . . . . • . • • • . • • • . • • •
87- and 88-Key Typewriter/APL Keyboards . . . • • • • •
88-Key Katakana Typewriter/APL Keyboard ••.•••••
APL Keyboard World Trade Considerations . . . . • • • .
87-Key Typewriter/Text Keyboard ••..•••••••.•
3230-2,3268-2, and 3287-1 and -2 with APL/Text ••• ••
3262-13,3289-1 and -2, and 5210 with Text Print •••••
BSC Copy Command . . . . . . . • . • . . • • • • • . . . . •
Local Copy ••••.... " . . . • . . . . • • . • . • . . • • •
I
D-I
D-2
D-2
D-9
D-9
D-9
D-10
D-10
D-11
0.12
D-12
D-12
D-13
Appendix E. Katabna Feature .••••.••••.•..•••
Interface Codes . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • • • • . . . • • • . .
Katakana Keyboards Shift Operations
(3178,3276,3278, and 3279) • . . . • . • • . . . . • • • • •
Katakana Shift Keys - 3278 and 3279 . • • • • • • . . . ••
E-I
B-1
Appendix F. Encrypt/Decrypt Feature. . • . • . • • • . • ••
Encrypt/Decrypt Products . . . • . . . • • • • . . . • • • • •
mM Programmed Cryptographic Facility
Prognun Product . . • . • • • . . . . . • • • . • • • • • . ••
ACF/VTAM Encrypt/Decrypt Feat~ .••••..••••
3276 Encrypt/Decrypt Feature .•..•.••••..••••
EstabUsiung Cryptographic Sessions • • . • • • • • • • . . • •
F-I
F-1
Appendix G. Request Formatted Maintenance
Statistics (RECFMS) Formats . . •
REQMS Request Type 1 • Link Test Statistics .
REQMS Request Type 2 • Summary Counters •
REQMS Request Type 3 - Communication
Adapter Data Error Counts • . . . . . . • • . . •
REQMS Request Type 5 - 3276 Machine Level
Information . . . . . . • . . . . • • . • • . • • • •
B-1
B-1
F-1
F-1
F-1
F-2
• . • • • • • 0.1
. . • • • • . 0.1
• . . • • •. 0.1
• • • • . . • 0.1
. • • . . . • 0-2
Appendix A. Indicators and Controls . . . • ... . . . . . • • • A-I
Abbreviations
. . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • • • . . • . • • H-1
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes . . . . . . . B-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . • • • . . . . • • • • X-I
vii
Page of GA18-2081-O
As Updated 1 Feb 1982
By TNL GN18-2144
Figures
1-1.
1· 2.
1-3.
14.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
1-9.
1-10.
1-11.
1-12.
1-13.
1-14.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
24.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
2-12.
2-13.
2-14.
2-15.
3-1.
3-2.
Host Control Unit and Device Combinations •.....
United States EBCDIC I/O Interface Codes for
3276 Unit and Attached Display Stations and
Terminal Printers . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
United States ASCII I/O Interface Codes for
3276 Unit and Attached Display Stations and
Terminal Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Character I/O Codes .. '. . . . . . . • • . . . .
Data Flow between Data Processing System
and the 3276 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ••
Command Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . ••
Write Control Character (WCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
LU Type 2 Screen Size Bind Format . . . . . . . . . . •
LU Type 3 Buffer Size Bind Format . . . . . • . . . . .
Attention ID (AID) ConfIgUrations ....•.••.•.
Read State Transitions. . . . . . . . . . • . . . • • . •.
Copy Control Character (CCC) . . . . • . . . • . . . . •
Buffer Transfers for 3276 Models 1 through
4 Copy Command Operation . . . . . . . • . . . . . . •
Buffer Control Orders and Order Codes . . • . . . . . ,
Buffer Location and Display Screen Character
Position Relationships . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . .
Buffer Addressing Layouts for 480-,960-,1920,
2560-, and 3440- Character Terminals . . • . . . . . . .
Example of Formatted Display . . . . . . • • . . . . . .
Field Attribute Character Bit Assignment . . . . . . .•
Colors Derived from Field Attributes . . . . . • . . . •
Selector Light Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Sample Display Screen for Selector-light-Pen
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • .
Magnetic Slot Reader (3276, 3278, and
3279 Attachments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . • •
Attachment of Magnetic Reading Devices to
3276, 3278, and 3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
10-Character Set Used with Magnetic Slot Reader ...
Magnetic-Stripe Format (MSR Using
lo-Character Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • .
Operation of the Display with an Unformatted
Screen (MSR Using 10-Character Set) . . • • . • . . . •
Operation of the Display with a Formatted Screen
(Using 10-character Set), Example 1 . . . . . . . . . .
Operation of the Display with a Formatted Screen
(Using 10-character Set), Example 2
. . . . . .•
Relationship between Buffer Data and Printed Data .•
4-6.
4-7.
1-2
14
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-10
1-13
1-16
1-19
1-24
1-28
1-29
1-31
2-1
2-2
24
2-6
2-7
2-20
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-33
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
3-9.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
44.
4-5.
Establishing a Session with a 3276 . . • . . . • . . . . .
Device Addressing for SNA Terminals . . . . . . . . • •
SNA Commands Supported by the 3276 ..•. ... ,
Bind Command Session Parameters . . . . . . . . , ..
Summary of SNA Commands Received • • • • • • . . .
34.
3-5.
4-9.
4-10.
4-11.
4-12.
4-13.
4-14.
4-15.
4-16.
4-17.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3. 54.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
5-12.
5-13.
5-14.
5-15.
5-16.
5-17.
5-18.
5-19.
2-24
Remote Control Unit and Device Addressing •.•... 3-11
General Poll and Specific Poll, Sequence/Response
Diagram • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3-12
'3276 CU Message Response to Polling or
Read Modified Command . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .• 3-14
Selection Addressing, Sequence/Response Diagram .. 3-16
Write-Type and Control-Type Commands,
Sequence/Response Diagram . . • . . • • • • • • . • . • 3-18
Read-Type Commands, Sequence/Response Diagram. 3-20
Remote Status and Sense Byte Definitions - BSC •.. 3-23
Remote Error Status and Sense Responses - BSC. . . . 3-24
Remote 3276 BSC Status and Sense Conditions .••. 3-26
3-3.
4-8.
44
4-6
4-8
4-10
4-21
5-20.
5-21.
5-22.
5-23.
5-24.
5-25.
5-26.
5-27.
5-28.
5-29.
5-30.
5-31.
5-32.
5-33.
5-34.
5-35.
5-36.
5-37.
5-38.
Summary of SNA Commands Sent. . . . . . . . . . . .
Bracket/Chain - LU Type 2 Initiated
(without Contention) .. . . . . . . . . , . . . • . . , .
Bracket/Chain - Host Initiated
(without Contention) . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . • . .
Bracket/Chain - Host/SLU Contention . . . . . . . . .
Signal from Host • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shutdown/Shutdown Complete . . . . • . • . . . . . ,
CANCEL, SLU Type 2 Sending ..•..• , ....• ,
RTR - LU Type lor LU Type 3 Send . . . . . . . . . .
State Diagram for Session Ownership of Device . . . .
Logical Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Disconnection Support by 3276 . . . . • .
Summary Table of LUSTATs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Four Fields and Attribute Bytes • . . . . .
Results of Keyboard and Field Combinations . . . . .
Example of Attribute Specification . . • . . • . . . . .
Bl9ck-Diagramming a Sequence of Panels . . . . . • . •
Sign-On Panel as Written Out on Layout Sheet.
Panel Layout, Including Attnoute and
Cursor Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
Laying Out Field Attnoutes . . . . . . • . . . . . . . •
Text Items on Panel Layout Sheet . . . . . . • • . . . .
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completed Order and Information,
No SFAP Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffer Control Orders and Order Codes . • . • . . . ..
Sign-On Procedure Panel with Buffer Addresses . . . .
Attribute Combinations in Hexadecimal . . . . . . . .
Assembler Language Statements for Sign-On Panel ..
An Example of the RA Order. . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
wee Hexadecimal Codes . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . .
Panel 1 of an Accounts Receivable Application •••.
Panel 2, Showing the Results of a Search on
a Customer Name . . • . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . •
Panel 3, Showing the Customer's Open Invoices . . . •
Panel 4, Showing Use of the Calculator . • • . . . . . .
Panel 5, Showing Selection of Invoices after
Using the Calculater . . . . . . . • . . . . . , . . . . . •
Panel 6, Showing New Balance after Posting . . . . . .
Sign-On Panel with Operator's Input. . . . . . . . . . .
Input Data Sequence. . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defmition of Field for Selector Pen Operation . . . . .
Sample Panel for Selector Pen or Cursor Select
Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying an Existing Panel, Basic Panel . . . . . . . .
Existing Panel with Error Message . . . . . • . • . . . •
Panel Layout Changes for Error Message
(Keyed to Text) . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • • • . .
Error Message Panel with Serial Number
Field Erased. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . ..
Example of EUA Use . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . •
Sign-On Panel with Three Erased Fields . . . . . . . . •
Erasing Multiple Fields with EUA . . . . . . . . . . ..
Example of Data Entry Panel. . . . • . . . . . . . . . •
Data Entry Panel with Entered Data. . . . . . . . . . •
Employee Data Panel . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
Panel Defmed with Program Tab . . . . . . • . • . . . .
6-1. . Relationship of Screen Management to
Telecommunications Management and
Application Program . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
6-2. Table of Requirements • . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . • .
6-3. Example of Selector Pen Panel • . • . . . . . . • . • . .
64. Sample Mapping Table. . • • . . . • . . . • • • . . • . .
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-28
4-37
441
448
4-56
5-2
5-3
,5-5
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-16
5-17
5-20
5-21
5-26
5-27
5-29
5-31
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-34'
5-35
5-35
5-38
5-39
542
542
543
544
545
546
546
548
548
549
So-50
6-1
6-6
6-8
6-9
ix
A-I.
A-2.
3276 Operator Panel •.••.•••..••..••.•. A-I
3276 Operator Drawer Panel ..••••....••.•. A-I
D-I. Diagram of APL/Text Devices ..••..••••.•.•
D-2. APL/Text Feature, I-Byte I/O Interface Codes
(3230/3268/3276/3278/3279/3287) •...•....•
D-3. APL/Text Feature, 2-Byte I/O Interface Codes
(3230/3268/3276/3278/3279/3287) •••••••••.
1>4. National Use Differences I/O Interface Code
(3178/3230/3268/3276/3278/3279/3287) • • • • • ••
D-5. Katakana/APL I-Byte I/O Interface Codes
(3230/3268/3276/3278/3279/3287) ••.•••••.•
x
0-6.
D-I
D-7.
1>-3
D-8.
D-9.
D-IO.
D4
E-1.
D-S
D-6
Katakana/APL 2-Byte I/O Interface Codes
(3230/3268/3276/3278/3279/3287) •..•.••.••
Text Print I/O Interface Codes
(3262/3289) ••.....•••.•...•.•.•.•••
87-Key Typewriter/APL Keyboard ...'..... .•
88-Key Katakana Typewriter/APL Keyboard •...•
87-Key Typewriter/Text Keyboard ••..••..••.
6
D-7
D-8
D-9
D-IO
D-11
Japanese Katakana EBCDIC I/O Interface Code
for 3276 Units with 3178, 3230, 3262, 3268,
3278,3279,3287 (with 3276 Attachment
Feature), and 3289 Tenninals Attached. . • . • • • .. E-2
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
Introduction
The IBM 3276 Control Unit Display Station is one of the basic units of the 3270 Information Display System Family. Theo3276 offers the user a wide selection of components
and configurations. Also available are a variety of features which improve perfonnance,
provide additional operational capability, and pennit expansion of the display system.
(The features are described in the publication IBM 3270 Information Display System:
Configurator, GA27-2849.)
All models of the 3276 can be selected to form 3270 system configurations attachable to
I System/360, System/370, 303X Processor, 308X Processor, System/3, 4300 Processor,
8100 Information System, and 3790 Communication System configurations as host
(See An Introduction to the IBM 3270 Information Display System,
GA27-2739, for possible system combinations.)
I systems.
The 3276 is a table-top CRT display station and control unit used for displaying
alphameric data up to a maximum of 3440 characters, and for entering data into, and
retrieving data from, a host system. The 3276 can be ordered to control up to seven
display stations and printers. The 3276 includes one self-contained display which allows
a maximum 3276 cluster size of eight tenninals.
The base 3276 provides one additional port for attachment of either display stations or
printers. Up to three additional teoninal adapters can be ordered. Each adapter has
two ports which can attach display stations or printers in any combination. A keyboard
is needed on every 3276.
The display station provides image display of data transmitted from the host system.
A display station with an attached keyboard enables the user to enter, modify, or
delete data on the display and to cause the revised data to be returned to the host
system for storage or additional processing.
The 3276 can display up to 3440 characters per screen as follows:
• Models 1 and 11 display 960 characters.
• Models 2 and 12 display 1920 characters.
• Models 3 and 13 display 2560 characters.
• Models 4 and 14 display 3440 characters.
When operating in 3277-compatible format, the 3276 Modell will display 480 characters
(40 characters per line), and Models 2, 3, and 4 will display 1920 characters (80
characters per line).
For EBCDIC and ASCII, the 3276 has a 94-character set (Plus space and null).
The 3276 can be attached remotely to a host system (see Figure 1-1). Remote attachment employs cornmon carrier (or equivalent customer) facilities ofunlirnited length to
communicate between the host and the 3276. (The 3276 cannot be attached locally to a
host system.) All models of the 3276 can also communicate with a 3704/3705 Communications Controller or a Communications Adapter feature installed in the 4331 without
need for communication facilities or a modern (direct connection).
a.apter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1-1
3178 Display
Station
308X
~
3278 Display
Station
Systam/3
3279 Color
Display Station
System/360
3230 Printer
3276
System/370
and303X
3262 Printer
3268 Printer
3790
3287 Printer
4300
3289 Line
Printer
8100
5210 Printer
Figure 1·1. Host Control Unit and Device Combinationa
The 3276 Models 1,2,3, and 4 attach via modems and operate via BSC line protocol
at 1200, 2000, 2400,4800, and 7200 bps. When the models are directly connected to a
3704/3705 Communications Controller, communication speed is limited to 1200 bps.
Models 11, 12, 13, and 14 attach via modems and operate via SOLC line protocol at
1200, 2000, 2400, 4800, 7200, and 9600 bps. When the models are directly connected to
the 3704/3705 Communications Controller, communication speed is limited to 1200 bps.
Note: The 3276 Models 1, 2, 3, and 4 with the SDLC/BSC Switch/eature installed can
also operate via SDLC protocol at the same communication line speeds as the Models 11,
12,13, and 14.
Models 11, 12, 13, and 14 communicate with the 8100 Infoonation System or the 4300
System via modems and an SOLC data link, a directly attached loop, or a data-link·
attached loop. Models 1,2,3, and 4 (with the SDLC/BSC switch set to SDLC) can
communicate with the 8100 system or the 4300 System via modems and an SOLe data
link.
The printer provides a printed copy of data displayed at a display station or transmitted
from the host system. (In this d'ocument, the 3230,3262,3268,3287,3289, and
5210 Printers are referred to as "teonina! printers.")
1·2
~I
The 3276 Models 1,2,3, and 4 process the host-initiated BSC Copy command. The
host-initiated Copy command is used to transfer buffer data from one device to another
device via the 3276 to which both devices are attached. After accepting a Copy
command addressed to the "to" device, the 3276 initiates the data transfer from the
"from" device. Upon transfer of the data to the 3276, the 3276 processes the data and
transfers it to the "to" device.
In addition to processing the host-initiated Copy command, the 3276 (all models) also
provides an operator-initiated local copy function, which pennits direct data transfer
from a display station to a printer attached to the same 3276. The local copy function
is initiated when the display station operator presses the print key on the display
station keyboard. The printer selection is detennined by a print-control matrix (called
a printer default matrix) in the 3276. The printer default matrix is determined by the
physical attaclunent of the printers to the 3276 at power-on time. In this matrix, each
display station is associated with the printer that has the next higher tenninal address.
Printer assignment can be changed by use of the IDENT key on the 3178, 3276, 3278, or
3279 keyboard.
If the 3276 Models 11, 12, 13, and 14, or the 3276 Models 1,2,3, and 4 are equipped
with the BSC/SDLC Switch feature and the switch is in the SDLC position, the hostinitiated copy function is executed when the host issues a write-type command with the
WCC print bit set to 1. Printer selection and servicing of the local copy request proceed in much the same way as in the operator-initiated local copy function.
Interface Codes
Data, commands, and orders transmitted between the control unit and the host system
are in the fonn of interface codes. Two different codes are used in the United States:
extended binary-coded decimal interchange code (EBCDIC) and American National
Standard Code for Infonnation Interchange (ASCII). The EBCDIC codes are also used
in the World Trade countries (ASCII is available only in the U.S.); refer to IBM 3270
Information System: ChIlracterSet Reference, GA27-2837, for details.
Figure 1-2 shows the United States EBCDIC interface codes for several control unit/
device combinations. Figure 1-3 shows the United States ASCII codes. Figure 14 shows
the control character codes. Refer to Appendix E for the Katak,ana codes.
Device Addressing
The port addresses on the 3276 control unit are 00-07 (ports 0-7) in non-SNA and
02-09 (ports 0-7) in SNA.
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1-3
01
00
Hex 1 00 01
Bits
4567
~
0000
0 NUL
0001
1
SBA
0010
2
0011
3
0100
4
0101
5
0110
0
1
10 11
2
3
10 11
00 01
5
6
8
&
-
00
01
4
I SP
7
9
~
11
10
10 11
A
B
00 01
10 11 ~ 2,3
C
0
E
F
{
}
\
0
a
j
-
A
J
EUA
b
k
s
B
K
S
2
IC
c
I
t
C
L
T
3
d
m
u
0
M
U
4
e
n
v
E
N
V
6
6
f
0
w
F
0
W
6
0111
7
9
P
x
G
P
X
7
1000
8
h
q
Y
H
Q
y
8
1001
9
i
r
z
I
R
Z
9
1010
A
1011
B
1100
C
FF DUP MF RA
1101
0
CR
1110
E
1111
F
I
PT NL
GE
SA
I
EM SFE
,
I
I
I
:
$
,
#
<
•
%
@
SF
(
)
-
,
FM
+
;
>
=
7
"
¢
sue
I
.,
~
1
I
EO
Notes:
1. Character code 8S8lgnments other than thOStllhown within all outlined artNl$ of thl, chart al'fJ
undefined. If an undefined character code i, programmed, the character that will be di,played or
printed i, a hyphen (-),. hex code 60 will be I'fJturned on a subsequent l'fJad operation. For control
units with Configuration Support C Installed, undefined control codes from X'OO'to X3F' cause
a negative f81POfI8B (SNA) or an Op Chk (SSC). IBM l'fJ8eTVtJ8 the right to change at any time
the character displayed or printed and the 110 Interlace codel'fJturned for an undefined character
code.
2. CR, NL, EM, and FF control characters al'fJ displayed and printed as blank characters. The DUP
and FM control characters are displayed al -;and -;I'fJ8pectively, and are displayed and printed 88
• and ,. when operating in mono-case mode.
3. Bits 0 and 1 are 8S8lgned for the following characters: AID, attribute, write control (WCC), copy
control (CCC), CU and device addffl$$, buffer addffl$$, sense, and status. Bits 0 and 1 al'fJ B$$lgned
10 that each character can be represented by a graphic character within the ,olld outlined areas
of the chart See Figure 1-4.
Chapter 3. For the SCS control code, 8880ciated with
4. For BSC data-link control characters,
the SNA Character String feature on terminal printers, see Chapter 2.
5. When operating in mono-case mode, thelowerc889 alphabetic characters are displayed or printed
B8 uppercase characters.
,ee
Figure 1-2. United States EBCDIC I/O Interface Codes for 3276 Unit and Attached
Display Stations and Terminal Printers
1-4
Bits
0,1
Hex 0
Bits
Hex 1 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 f4- 7,6,6
4321
~
0000
0 NUL
0001
1
0010
2
0011
3
0100
4
0101
6
0110
6
Bits
2
3
4
6
6
0
@
P
.
7
SP
P
SBA I
1
A
Q
a
q
EUA "
2
B
R
b
r
3
C'
S
c
s
4
0
T
d
t
%
6
E
U
e
u
&
6
F
V
f
v
7
G
W
9
w
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
1001
9
PT EM
)
9
I
Y
i
V
1010
A
NL
•
:
J
Z
j
z
1011
B
+
;
K
[
k
{
1100
C
FF DUP
,
<
L
\
I
I
I
1101
0
CR
-
=
M
]
m
,.
}
n
--
0111
1000
0
1
IC
RA '$'
,
7
1110
E
1111
F
#
SF
FM
I
>
N
'1
0
-
f4- Hex 0
0
Notes:
1. Character code B88ignmentB other than those shown within all outlined areas of this chart are
undefined. If an undefined character code Is programmed, the character that will be displayed
or printed Is a hyphen (.),. code 20 will be returned on a subsequent read operet/on.
IBM reserves the right to change at any time the character displayed or printed and the lID
interfaclTcodB returned for an undefined character code.
2. CR, NL, EM, and FF control characters are displayed and printed as blank characters.
The OUP and FM control characters are displayed as ..and;respectively, and are displayad and
printed as • and ,. when operating in mono-case mode.
3. AID, attribute, write control (WCC), copy control (CCC), CU and devlcs addre88, buffer addf8$$,
senre, and status characters are lJS8igned as specified in Figure 14 so that each character can be
represented by a graphic character within the solid outlined portion of this chart.
4. For BSC date-link control characters, leB Chapter 3.
6. When operating in mono-case mode,. the lowercase alphabetic characters are displayed or
printed BI uppercBl8 characters.
Figure 1-3. United States ASCn I/O Interface Codes for 3276 Unit and Attached
Display Stations and Terminal Printers
Clapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data StJeams
1-5
81ts2·7
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
01
1010
01
01
01
01
1011
1100
1101
1110
01
1111
ASCII
SP
40
C1
C2
20
41
42
43
G
H
I
00 1011
00 1100
00 1101
00 1110
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
EBCDIC
A
8
C
0
E
F
00 1010 {
00 1111
Graphic
4
[
<
(
+
t
I
48
4C
40
4E
4F
-
J
01
02
03
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
J
]
S
*
)
;
t
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
J
&
K
t
C3
-,
"
50
D4
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
-
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
28
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
81ts2·7
10
10
10
,10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Graphic
.
I
S
T
U
V
W
X
y
Z
: (EBCDIC)
,
%
>
'1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
#
@
,
:::
"
EBCDIC
ASCII
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
5E
Note: The characters above are used as attribute, AID, write control (WCC), copy control (CCC), CU and device addreS8, and buffer addreS8.
They are a/so used B$ status and sense, except by the 3274 and 3276 when operating in BSe. When any of these characters is transmitted
to the program, the CU assigns the appropriate EBCDIC code. If tranlmiaion is in ASCII, the CU translates the EBCDIC code to ASCII
code prior to transmiaion.
To use this table to determine the hex code transmitted for an addreS8 or control character, first determine the values of bits 2-7.
Select this bit configuration from the "Bits 2·7" column. The hex code that will be transmitted (either in EBCDIC or in ASCII) is to
the right of the bit configuration.
Use this table also to determine equivalent EBCDIC and ASCII hex codes and their associated graphic characters.
Graphic characters for the United States I/O interface codes are shown. Graphic characters might differ for particular World Trade I/O
interface codes. Refer to IBM 3270 Information Disp/ay System: Character Set Reference, GA27·2837, for p086ible graphic differences
when these codes are used.
Figure 14. Control Character I/O Codes
1-6
Data Stream
The 3276 data stream consists of user-provided data, commands, and orders which are
transmitted between the control unit and the host system (Figure 1-5). Control information, which governs the movement of the data stream, is also transmitted. The
control units can differ as to the type of commands and/or transmission protocols
employed.
Commands are issued to initiate such operations as the total or partial writing, reading,
and erasing of data in a selected device buffer. Control commands initiate control unit
and/ or teoninal operations not involved with data transfer (except for status information). Orders can be included in write data streams, either alone or intermixed with
display or print data.
Two types of orders are available - buffer control orders and printer format orders.
Buffer control orders are interpreted and executed as they are received by the
control unit. They are used to pOSition, defme, modify, assign attributes on a field
and character basis, and to format data being written to a display character buffer; to
erase selected unprotected data in the buffer; and to reposition the cursor. Printer
format orders are initially stored in the printer character buffer as data and are interpreted and executed by the printer logic when encountered in the print operation.
The balance of this chapter describes the 3270 data stream. In-depth defmition and
discussion of the 3270 data stream is provided in the publication IBM 3270 Information
Display System, 3270 Data Stremn Programmer's Reference, GA23-00s9.
The 3276 can operate under SNA protocol using SDLC line disCipline. In the SNA/SDLC
environment, attached 3178s, 3278s, or 3279s function as LU type 2. The data stream RU
for a write-type command, for example, consists of the command code, buffer orders, and
display data.
Data Proceaing System
I Application b"y.tem
I Program
Channel
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3178 Display,
3278 Display (except Model 6),
3279 Display, 3230 Printer,
3282 Printer. 3288 Printer.
3287 Printer, 3289 Line Printer, or
6210 Printer
~m
Remote
Executes
Channel
~
Commands ~
TCU
-
3278 Control Unit
Display Station
1,.4-
~--~
Executes 3270
..
Commands (received t7.:22'222ZZ:~.;J
In write data)
I'
...
Modem
11,.1)
~
-IZZZZ:"~-r
-~
-----1.1'.------1
.
Buffor
Stores
Data
Buffer
Stores
Date
'
FJsure 1-5. Data Flow between Data Processina System and the 3276
Oaapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1-7
The terminal printers attached to a 3276 can also function in BSC or SNA/SDLC
protocol. When operating in SNA/SDLC protocol, the terminal printers function
as LU type 3. When SCS is installed, the printer functions as an LU type 1. The
terminal printers can also operate as local copy devices; that is, data may be sent
to a printer(s) from a display station attached to the same 3276, which functions
in either BSC or SNA/SDLC discipline.
Commands
Three basic types of commands are used by the 3276:
1. Write commands, which are used to transfer data and orders from main s~orage to
the 3276.
2. Read conunands, which transfer 3276 buffer data, keyboard key data, and, for
remote configurations, status infonnation to main storage.
3. Control commands, which cause certain printer or display station operations.
Figure 1-6 lists the commands and associated codes that can be executed.by the 3276.
3276
Command
EBCDIC
Hex
Copy I
Erase All Unprotected
EraselWrlte
EraselWrite Alternate
Read Buffer
Read Modified
2
Read Modified AU
Write
F7
6F
F5
7E
F2
F6
6E
F1
ASCII
Hex
37
3F
36
3D
32
36
3E
31
Graphic
7
?
5
:=
2
6
:
1
I Applicable to 3276·1 through -4 only.
2 Applicable to 3276·11 through ·14 only.
Figure
1~.
Command Codes
When a remotely attached 3276 is in operation, the rate at which data is transferred
between the data processing system's main storage and the control unit depends on the
type of transmission control unit and on the modems and communication facilities used.
The 3276 accepts data from, and provides it to, the transmission control unit/communi.
cation facility at the byte rate established by the transmission control unit/communication
facility.
All command operations that direct movement of data to and from the 3276 result in
transfer of data between the control unit and a device buffer. When commands are not
being perfonned, the control unit and the'device buffer interact asynchronously, and
the last image displayed by a previous command is continuously regenerated at a visible
rate.
1-8
Write Commands
Two write-type conunands, Write and Erase/Write, are used to load, fonnat, and selectively erase device buffer data. These conunands can also initiate certain device
operations such as starting the printer, resetting the keyboard, and sounding the
audible alann. Write and erase/write operations are identical except that Erase/Write
causes complete erasure of the device buffer before the write operation is started.
Thus, Erase/Write is used to load the buffer with completely new data, whereas Write
can be used to modify existing buffer data. Because of this, the 3276 initiates a
device-to-control unit buffer transfer before Write command operations, but not before
Erase/Write command operations.
A third write-type command, Erase/Write Alternate, performs the erase/write function
for the display stations and the terminal printers. It is also used to switch the display
or printer into large screen or expanded print capacity mode.
The Erase/Write Alternate command is valid when sent to the 3276.
Write Command
The bytes received by the 3276 for Write command operation consist of a command code,
a write control character (WeC), and any orders and/or new buffer data needed to
modify the existing buffer contents. Remotely attached 3276s also receive appropriate
data link control framing. The sequence of bytes is as follows:
xxx
XXX
Any Write
Command
WCC
-"'"
Data Link Framing Characters
} (Remote Only).
- See Figure 1-6.
- See following text and Figure 1-7.
Orders and/or
Buffer Data
~
XXX
-
Data Link Framing Characters (Remote Only)
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1-9
The minimum data stream following a Write command is a I-byte WCC. This is ensured
because the byte count field of the write channel control word (CCW) must be set to a
minhnum of 1 in' BSC operations, or else the command code is not sent. The minimum
Write command data stream to a remote 3276 consists of framing characters (e.g., in
BSC, STX, ESC, and ETX) and the command code. To be meaningful, a WCC byte
should follow the command code; if the BSC data link control character ETX follows
the command code, an all·zero default wec byte is generated by the control unit,
and command execution is ended nonnally. An order or display/print data byte that
immediately follows the command code is interpreted as a WCC by the control unit.
The WCC byte fonnat is as follows:
-
Reset
Bit
Printout
Format
o
2
3
Start
Print
4
KeySound board
Alarm Restore
5
6
Reset
MDT
Bits
1
-Determined by the configuration of bits 2 through 1. See Figure 1-4.
Figure 1·7 describes the function of each wce bit. When the wee specifies an operation
that does not apply to the selected device (for example, if the Sound Alarm bit is set
a,nd the selected device does not have the Audible Alarm feature), the specified opera·
tion is ignored. When the WCC byte is followed by order or display/print data bytes,
only the Reset MDT Bits function, if specified, is perfonned before the write operation;
any other WCC function is deferred until all data is written and all orders are perfonned.
Bit
0
1
2,3
Explanation
Determined by the contents of bits 1 through 1 as shown in Figure 1-4.
WCC reset bit.
Define the printout format, as follows:
00 - The NL, EM, and CR' orders in the data stream determine print line
length. Provides a 1320print position line when the orders are not present .
.. 01 - Specifies 40-character print line.
10 - Specifies 64-character print line .
.. 11 - Specifies 80-character print line.
Start Printer bit. When set to 1, initiates a printout operation at completion
of the write operation.
The Sound Alarm bit. When set to 1, sounds the audible alarm at the selected
device at the end of the operation if that device has an audible alarm.
The Keyboard Restore bit. When set to 1, restores operation of the keyboard
by resetting System Lock or Wait symbol on 3178, 3216, 3218, or 3279
displays. It also resets the AID byte at the termination of the I/O command.
Reset MDT bits. When set to 1, all MDT bits in the selected devices' existing
buffer data are reset before any data is written or orders are executed.
1Z
D
4
5
6
7
1
The CR order is applicable to the termina' printers only.
Ffsure 1-7. Write Control Character (WCC)
1-10
Orders and buffer data can follow the WCC character. (Orders are described later in
this chapter, following the "Commands" description.) Buffer data can be written into
any specified location of the buffer without erasing or modifying data in the other
buffer locations. Data characters are stored in successive buffer locations until an
order is encountered in the data stream which alters the buffer address, or until all
the data has been entered. During the write operation, the buffer address is advanced
one location as each character is stored.
The buffer location where data entry starts depends upon the following considerations:
1. The starting location may be specified by a Set Buffer Address order that follows
the WCC. (This order is described later in this chapter under "Orders.")
2. The starting location will be the buffer address containing the cursor if the Write
command is not chained or if it is chained from a Copy or Erase All Unprotected
command.
3. The starting location will be the current buffer address if the Write command is
chained from a Read or another Write command.
The formatting and placement of write data and the modification of existing buffer data
are described under "Orders."
Programming Notes:
1. If the commands are being chained, the Write or Erase/Write command with the
Start Print WCC bit set must be the last command in the chain. If not, remote
control units perform the print operation and abort the next command.
2. The Printout Format bits are honored only if the Start Print bit is set in the same
weco
3. In remote operations, if a Write command that includes data is chained from a previous Write command, a Set Buffer Address (SBA) order should immediately follow
the wee to defme the starting location at which data entry is to start; this permits
recovery in case of an error condition that requires retransmission of that data.
Programming Restriction: A Write command should not be chained from an Erase All
Unprotected command. If it is, the operation is undefmed.
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1-11
Erase/Write Command
Execution of the Erase/Write command perfonns two operations: an erase operation and
a write operation. The erase operation clears the entire device buffer to nulls, positions
the cursor to character location 0, and resets the buffer address to O.
Erase/Write then perfonns the write and WCC operations in the same manner as a Write
command. If no WCC is sent, the Erase/Write command wi)) not erase the buffer.
An Erase/Write command can also return a display or printer to the default screen size
or character print capacity (as described under "Erase/Write Alternate Command").
Erase/Write Alternate Command
The display stations and the terminal printers with a capacity of 960 characters can function
as 480-character devices; 1920-,2560-, and 3440-character displays and printers can function
as 1920-character devices.
For the 3276 BSC, a unique instruction is required from the application program to
enable a display or printer to function at greater than 480- or 1920-default-character
capacity. The Erase/Write Alternate command is used to switch a display station's
screen size or a terminal printer's print capacity to the alternate size indicated by the
display model number or specified for the printer as follows:
3276
3278
3279
3287 and
3289
5210
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
3178
3230 and
3282
3288
Model
Modal
Alternate
Default
Character Character
Capacity Capacity
-
2
13
1,11
1
-
1,2
G01,G02
480
960
C1,C2
2
13
2,12
2
2A,28
1,2
G01,G02
1920
1920
-
2
13
3,13
3
3A,38
1,2
G01,G02
1920
2660
-
2
13
4,14
4
-
1,2
G01,G02
1920
3440
Note:
For SDLe machines, the default and the alternate character capacity are
defined by the BIND parameter. Thus, the default and the alternate can
be exchanged.
The Erase/Write Alternate command also operates as an Erase/Write command. Once the
display or printer is placed in alternate mode, operation continues in alternate mode
until: the operator presses the CLEAR, SYS REQ (SNA only), or TEST key; or until
an Erase/Write command is received, the SNA session is unbound, power fails at the
control unit, display, or printer; or a system reset sequence occurs. Only these conditions return the display or printer to the default-value screen-size or character print
capacity. For the 3276 SNA, the Erase/Write Alternate and Erase/Write commands are
used to switch a display screen size, or a print capacity to alternate size, or vice
versa, according to Bind parameter defInition.
When in emulation mode, and with the display not in an LU-LU session, the operator
may set the display to its maximum size by pressing the CLEAR key_
1-12
A 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279 display operating as an LU type 2 requires the format shown
in Figure 1-8 as part of the bind operation.
If an Erase/Write Alternate command is received while bound, it is processed as a
normal Erase/Write command. No state change occurs within the display. Default
screen sizes are as follows:
3178
Model
Cl,C2
3278
Model
3279
Model
Default Screen Size Assumed with
Byte 24 =b'OOOOOOO'
1
2
3
4
2A,2B
3A,3B
480 (12 x 40)
1920 (24 x 80)
1920 (24 x 80)
1920 (24 x 80)
Byte
81t
20
0-7
21
22
23
24
Model
Con1llnt
1
2
3
4
5
X'01' X'01' X'01' X'01' X'01' -
1
1-5
5
X'28'
X'SO'
X'84'
1
2
3
4
5
X'01'
X'01'
X'01'
X'01'
X'01'
1
1-5
5
X'28'
X'SO'
X'84'
All
1-5
1
2-5
1-5
Reserved
b'OOOOOOO'
b'OOOOOO1'
b'OOOO010'
b'111 1110'
1-5
b'1111111'
Description
X'OC'
X'1B'
X'20'
X'2B'
X'1B'
0-7
Default number of columns
40
80
132
0-7
-
X'OC'
X'18'
X'20'
X'2B'
X'1B'
Alternate number of rows
1-12
1-24
1-32
1-43
1-27
Alternate number of columns
40
80
132
0-7
0-7
0
1-7
Default number of rows
1-12
1-24
1-32
1-43
1-27
Session screen size
reserved
Base default (12 x 40 or 24 x 80)
Base Model 1 default (12 x 40)
Base Model 2 default (24 x 80)
Extended default (size specified in bytes
20 and 21)
Extended alternate (size specified in bytes
22 and 23)
Note: Row values ourslde these ranges and column values other than those listed cause the Sind
to be rejected with X'0821'.
Figule 1-8. LU Type 2 Screen Size Bind Format
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1-13
Only a Modell display can be bound as b'OOOOOOl', a base LU type 2 with a 12 x 40
character screen. This coding of the Bind image is rejected with X'082 1' on Models 2,
3,4, and 5.
A Model 2, 3,4, and 5 display can be bound as b'OOOOOlO', a Base LU type 2 with a
24 x SO character screen. This Bind fonnat, if used for a Modell display, causes the
Bind to be rejected with X'OS2l'.
When operating with a screen size of 4S0 characters, sequential buffer addresses map
to the 12 x 40 screen fonnat in row major order. When operating in other screen sizes,
sequential buffer addresses map to the defmed screen fonnat in row major order
(Appendix B).
Byte 24 mllst be coded X'7E' or X'7F' to use displays in large-screen mode (2560 and
3440 characters) during the LU-LU session.
When bits 1 through 7 of byte 24 are coded X'7E', the screen size of the device is
defmed in bytes 20 and 21 of the Bind image, and bytes 22 and 23 are ignored. The
device operates with the defmed screen size during the entire session. An Erase/Write
Alternate command is accepted by the device but is interpreted as an Erase/Write
command. No state change occurs, and the screen size remains as defmed in bytes 20
and 21 of the Bind image. Valid codings of bytes 20 and 21 are as follows:
Byte
20
Byte
21
Hex
Row
Hex
Col
Modell
Model 2
Model 3
Model 4
~'OC'
~'IS'
~'20'
~'2B'
~12
~24
~32
~43
X'2S' X'50'
SO
40
X'50'
SO
X'50'
SO
X'50'
SO
If the Bind specifies an invalid number of columns, or if the number of rows is greater
than the maximum row specified (above) for each model, the Bind will be rejected.
Buffer wrap will occur at the end of the row specified in byte 20.
When bits 1 through 7 of byte 24 are coded b'Ollllll', a dynamic switch can be made
during the session between a default screen size and an alternate screen size. When byte
24 is coded in this way, bytes 20 through 23 defme the default and alternate screen
sizes.
Valid codings of these bytes are as follows:
Bytes
20 and
22
Byte
21 and
23
1-14
Modell
Model 2
Model 3
Hex
Row
~'OC'
~'lS'
~'20'
~'2B'
~12
~4
~2
~43
Hex
Col
X'2S' X'50'
40
SO
X'50'
SO
X'50'
SO
X'50'
SO
Model 4
!l
The Bind is rejected if an invalid number of columns is coded in the Bind image or if
the number of rows is greater than the maximum row value shown for each model
(above). When in alternate-size mode, the display will wrap at the end of the row
specified in byte 22 of the Bind image. When in default-size mode, the screen will wrap
at the end of the row specified in byte 20 of the Bind image.
Once the Bind has taken place, the display is cleared and set to the default screen size
and format. Request/Response Units (RUs) that contain SBA, RA, or EUA orders with
addresses out of the range of the default screen size are rejected with -RSP (1005)
(address out of range) response. Data will wrap at the default screen boundary whether
input by the operator or from the outbound data stream, and wrapping will occur at the
default screen boundary as dermed for all other 3270 operations (for example, Erase All
Unprotected, Read Buffer).
The Erase/Write Alternate command dynamically switches the display to the specified
alternate screen size. Note that, on a Model 2 display, the Erase/Write Alternate
command performs no meaningful fv.nction.
If bound to dynamically switch, the device assumes the characteristics of a display with
the alternate screen size, upon receipt of an Erase/Write Alternate command. RUs that
contain SBA, RA, or EUA orders that have addresses out of the range of the valid
alternate screen size are rejected with -RSP (1005) (address out of range).
Write, Erase/Write, and Erase/Write Alternate Commands (LV Type 3)
The terminal printers can operate as LU type 3 and extended LU type 3. Commands
and orders used by LU type 2 are applicable to LU type 3 and extended LU type 3
except for the read-type commands: Read Buffer, Read Modified, and Read
Modified All. Read-type commands are rejected with -RSP (l003) (invalid command
code.)
LU type 3 operations are directed by write-type commands. As specified in the Bind,
printers that function as base LU type 3 operate as 480- or 1,92O-character devices,
and printers that function as extended LU type 3 operate with alternate buffer sizes
of960, 1920,2560,3440, or 3564 characters, or the full physical buffer. The alternate
size is established by an Erase/Write Alternate command, and the default size is
established by an Erase/Write command. Loss of power at the printer or the control
unit or unbinding the session returns the printer to the default buffer size.
The WCC for LU type 3 and extended LU type 3 is shown in Figure 1-7. The function
of bits 2, 3 (printout Format), 5 (Sound Alarm), and 7 (Reset MDT bits) is the same
as for LU type 2. When bit 4 (Start Print) is set to 1, the printer buffer content is
printed after completion of the data transfer. Otherwise, printing does not occur after
completion of the data transfer.
Buffered printers that operate as LU type 3 employ the format shown in Figure 1-9
as part of the Bind operation.
Byte 24 establishes ~e buffer size for both base and extended LU type 3 operations.
The base LU type 3 operation supports a 480- or 1,92O-character buffer only, using
the Erase/Write command. To use larger printer buffer sizes, the Bind must specify
Extended LU type 3 operation.
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
I-IS
Byte
19
20
21
22
23
24
Bit
Content
0-7
0-7
Reserved
X'OC'
X'lS'
X'lB'
X'20'
X'2B'
Default number of rows
12
24
27
32
43
X'2S'
X'SO'
X'84'
Default number of columns
40
SO
132
X'OC'
X'lS'
X'1B'
X'20'
X'2B'
Alternate number of rows
12
24
27
32
43
X'SO'
X'84'
Alternate number of columns
SO
132
0-7
0-7
0-7
a
1-7
Description
Reserved
Session Buffer Size
b'OOOOOOO'
b'OOOOOOl'
b'OOOOO10'
b'll11110'
b'1111111'
Extended LU3 uses all available buffer space.
No size is specified.
Base LU3, 12 x 40
Base LU3, 24 x SO
Extended LU3 static buffer size is defined
in bytes 20, 21.
Extended LU, alternate sizes are indicated
in bytes 22, 23.
All other values are reserved and cause the Bind to be rejected with X'OS21'.
Figure 1-9. LV Type 3 Buffer Size Bind Format
The Erase/Write Alternate command is accepted in base LU type 3, but it is processed
I as an Erase/Write command. No state change occurs. All terminal printers can be
bound with b'OOOOOOI' or b'OOOOOIO'.
When bits I through 7 of byte 24 are coded b'OOOOOOO', the entire print buffer can be
used, regardless of size. Buffer wrap occurs at the end of the physical buffer. An
Erase/Write Alternate command is processed as a nonnal Erase/Write command. No state
change occurs.
When coded b'1111110', byte 24 indicates extended LU type 3 operation with the buffer
size coded in bytes 20 and 21. Buffer size switching is not allowed. Bytes 22 and 23
are ignored. When an Erase/Write Alternate command is encountered in the data stream,
it is interpreted as a Donnal Erase/Write command.
When byte 24 is coded b' 1111111 " bytes 22 and 23 are inspected' to detennine the
maximum alternate buffer size to be used during the session; for example, a Bind for
32 rows of 80 characters each pennits the use of programs written for 960-, 1920-,
and 2560- character buffer sizes. (Jfprograms written for 132-character columns are
used, byte 22 must be interpreted differently.) This assumes that programs do not
depend upon buffer address wrap during write operations.
1-16
If the printer cannot support the required buffer size, the Bind is rejected with a
-RSP (0821) response parameter error. A 3287 with a basic 2K buffer cannot, for
example, accept an LU3 Bind specifying a 2S60-character buffer. Valid Bind parameter
values for the 3276 are column counts of 40 or 80, and the product of the row and
column counts that are less than or equal to the physical buffer size minus 80. The
row/column product detennines the print buffer wrap point. Print control is managed
by the WCC and not by the Bind parameter values.
For the 3276, other val.ues coded into bytes 2()'23 may cause unpredictable results, but
the Bind will not be rejected.
Read Commands
Three read-type commands are executed by the 3276: Read Buffer, Read Modified, and
Read Modified All. Read Buffer causes the entire buffer contents of the addressed
terminal to be read into main storage. The operation initiated by Read Modified is
detennined by display station operator actions.
The infonnation read during execution of Read Modified or Read Modified All could·
consist of fields of data modified by keyboard operations, data entered by magnetic
reading devices, buffer addresses, or data of selector light-pen or CURSR SEL fields,
or the code of a Program Function or Program Access key.
In remote BSC configurations, reading is normally accomplished by a General or Specific
Poll sequence (described under "Remote Operations" in Chapter 3). In remote, the 3276
cannot generate attention interruption. Instead, the host program should issue poll
sequences periodically. Upon receipt of a poll sequence, the 3276 BSC control unit
initiates one of three operations:
1. If status and sense information is pending, this information is sent to the TCU.
2. If an operator action has occurred that requires reading by the program, and
status and sense information is not pending, a control-unit-generated Read Modified
command operation is performed.
3. If no operator action has occurred and status and sense infonnation is not pending,
the control unit sends End of Transmission (EOT) to the TCU, tenninating the
operation.
Programming Note: Unsolicited read commands are not recommended, because the information read by these commands may be incomplete.
During a read-buffer or read-modified operation, when BSC line disCipline is used, a
SUB character (3F in EBCDIC, lA in ASCII) is sent in place of any byte that has bad
parity. Also, a Data Check sense condition is recorded. Nonnal transmission of the
read data then continues until the usual ending point. At that time, the operation is
terminated with ENQ in place of ETX or ETB.
Read Buffer Command
~"
Execution of the Read Buffer command causes all data in the addressed device buffer,
from the buffer location at which reading starts through the last buffer location, to be
transferred to main storage. This command is provided primarily for diagnostic purposes. The transfer of data begins:
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1-17
1. From buffer address 0 if the Read Buffer command is unchained. Certain 3276
emulators a1s~ begin data transfer from buffer address 0 if the Read Buffer
command is chained from a Copy command.
2. From the current buffer address if the Read Buffer command is chained. Certain
3276 emulators only begin data transfer from the current buffer address if the
Read Buffer command is chained from a Write, Erase/Write, Read Modified, or
another Read Buffer command. Regardless of where the transfer of data begins,
data transfer from the buffer will tenninate when the last character location in
the buffer has been transferred, or before the last character location has been
transferred, when the last character of a text block has been transferred (described under "Remote Operations" in Chapters 3 and 4).
The transferred data stream begins with a 3-character read heading consisting of the
AID character followed by a 2-character cursor address. The contents of all buffer
locations are transferred, including nulls. Start Field (SF) orders are inserted by the
3276 to identify the beginning of each field.
The possible cursor address byte configurations are shown in Appendix B. The possible
Attention Identification (AID) byte configurations are shown in Figure 1-10. An AID
configuration other than 60 or E8 is set when the operator at the selected display
station has performed an operation that requires program intervention. These operations
are (1) pressing a Program Function or Program Access key, (2) reading a magnetic
stripe, or (3) detecting an attention field with the selector light pen or CURSR SEL
key. The attribute character is shown in Figure 2-4.
Read Modified Command
Read Modified initiates one of three operations, as determined by operator actions at
the display station: (1) Read Modified, (2) Short Read, or (3) Test or System Request
Read: Figure 1-10 lists the operator actions and the resulting Read Modified command
operation initiated by each action. Read Modified commands normally are not used for
remote configurations since polling initiates a control-unit-generated read-modified
operation if AID is generated and if status is not pending.
A major feature of Read Modified command operations is null suppression. The device
buffer is cleared to all nulls when the operator turns power on or presses the CLEAR
key, or when the erase portion of an Erase/Write command is executed at the selected
device. Also, selected portions of a buffer can be cleared to nulls by the Erase All
Unprotected command and certain orders. During Read Modified command operations,
null codes are not sent.
Read Modified Operation. During a Read Modified command, if an AID other than
selector-light-pen attention, the CURSR SEL key, a PA key, or the CLEAR key is
generated, all fields that have been modified by a keyboard, the selector light pen,
the CURSR SEL key, or the reading of a magnetic stripe are transferred to the program. All nulls are suppressed during data transfer and thus are not·included in the
read data stream. As a field is modified by the operator, the modified data tag (MDT)
bit is set in the attribute byte for that field. Then, when a read-modified operation is
performed, successive attribute bytes are examined for a set MDT bit. When the bit
is found, the data in the associated field is read (with nulls suppressed) before the
next attribute byte is examined.
The first 3 bytes of the read data stream are always the AID code (Figure 1-10) and
the 2-byte cursor address; these bytes are called the "read heading."
1-18
Hex
Character
(EBCDIC)
Hex
Character
(ASCII)
Graphic
Character
Read Modified
Command Operation
(Displav or Displav Station)
60
20
-
Rd Mod
(Unsolicited Read or
Read Modified from
Hosd
No A 10 generated
(Printer)
E8
59
Y
Rd Mod
ENTER key and &
(Selector-light-Pen Attention)
70
27
,
RdMod
PF 1 key
F1
31
1
Rd Mod
PF 2 key
F2
32
2
RdMod
PF 3 key
F3
33
3
Rd Mod
PF 4 key
F4
34
4
Rd Mod
AID
No AID generated
Resultant Transfer to CPU
If performing a remote
polling operation, no read
operation occurs; otherwise
field addresses and text in
the modified fields are
transferred.
I.
PF 5 key
F5
35
5
RdMod
PF 6 key
F6
36
6
RdMod
PF 7 key
F7
37
7
RdMod
PF 8 key
F8
38
8
RdMod
PF 9 key
F9
39
9
Rd Mod
PF 10 key
7A
:
Rd Mod
7B}see
3A
PF 11 key
23
#
Rd Mod
PF 12 key
7C Note.
40
@
Rd Mod
PF 13 key
C1
41
A
Rd Mod
PF 14 key
C2
42
B
Rd Mod
PF 15 key
C3
43
C
RdMod
PF 16 key
C4
44
0
Rd Mod
PF 17 key
C5
45
E
Rd Mod
PF 18 key
C6
46
F
Rd Mod
PF 19 key
C7
47
G
Rd Mod
PF 20 key
C8
48
H
Rd Mod
PF 21 key
C9
49
I
RdMod
PF 22 key
4A
5B
rJ
4B
2E
.
RdMod
PF 23 key.
PF 24 key
4C
3C
<
RdMod
Operator Identification
Card Reader
E6
57
W
RdMod
Magnetic Slot Reader
and Magnetic Hand Scanner
E7
58
X
RdMod
Selector-Light-Pen Attention
space null
7E
3D
=
Rd Mod
PA 1 key
6C
26
%
Short Rd
PA 2 (C"'CL) key
6E
3E
>
Short Rd
PA 3 key
6B
2C
,
Short Rd
CLEAR key
60
6F
-
Short Rd
TEST REO and SYS REO keys
FO
30
0
Tst Req Rd
AID code and cursor
address, followed bv an
). SBA order, attribute
address +1, and text for
each modified field. Nulls
are suppressed.
RdMod
AID code, cursor address,
and field addresses only;
no data.
AID code only.
A test request message.
AID transferred on Read
Buffer onlv.
Note: Graphic characters for the United States liD interlscs codes are shown. If a World Trade country 110 interfacs code is used. refer
to IBM 3270 Information Display System: Character Set Reference. GA21-2831. forpossible graphic character differences.
FipIe 1-10. Attention ID (AID) eonraguDtions
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1-19
Following the read heading is the alphameric data of each modified field. The data for
each field is preceded in the data stream by a Set Buffer Address (SBA) order code
followed by the 2-byte buffer address of the fIrSt character position in that field (the
attribute address + 1). Thus, the read data stream when data has been modified is as
follows:
AID
~Cursor
_
Address
l
Read Heading
SBA
_ Atb Adr +1_
First Modified Field
(nulls suppressed)
Alphameric
Data
,-.
SBA
_Atb Adr +1_
Second Modified Field
(nulls suppressed)
Alphameric
Data
If a space or null selector-light-pen-attention AID is generated, fields are not transferred to main storage during the read-modified operation. Instead, when a set MDT
bit is found (indicating selector-light-pen andlor keyboard activity), only the read
heading, the SBA order code, and the attribute address +1 are transferred.
Note that if fields are modified by the keyboard but completion of the modification is
signaled by a selector-light-pen-attention operation on other than ampersand characterdesignator fields, a resulting read-modified operation will read only the address of the
modified fields; not the modified data. A Read Modified command can be used to obtain
both the address of, and the data in, each field that has the MDT bit set to I.
The buffer location at which the search begins for attribute bytes that defme modified
fields is a function of command chaining. This location is:
1. Buffer address 0 if Read Modified command is unchained or is chained from a
Copy command.
2. The current address if the Read Modified command is chained from a Write, Erasel
Write, Read Modified, Read Modified All, or Read buffer command.
The search for modified-field attribute bytes ends when the last buffer location is
checked.
1-20
~
The transfer of read data is terminated as follows:
1. If the last modified field is wrapped from the last buffer location (for example, 479
or 1919) to the flIst location, the operation is terminated after all data in the field
is transferred (nulls are suppressed). The buffer address at the end of the operation
is the address of the next attribute byte in the buffer. For example, if a modified
field extends from address 1900 (the attribute byte) to address 79 (wrapped
field), the data from address 1901 through 79 is transferred (nulls are suppressed);
in this case, the read operation is terminated with the buffer address set to 80
(the attribute byte of the next field).
2. If the buffer does not contain a wrapped modified field, and if the channel byte
count has not reached zero (local operation only), the modified data stream is
terminated when the last modified field is transferred; at the end of the operation,
the buffer address is set to O.
If the buffer is formatted (contains fields) but none of the fields have been modified,
the read data stream consists of the 3-byte read heading only.
If the buffer is unformatted (contains no fields), the read data stream consists of the
3-byte read heading followed by all alphameric data in the buffer (nulls are suppressed), even when part or all of the data has not been modified. Since an unformatted
buffer contains no attribute bytes, no SBA codes with associated addresses or address
characters are included in the data stream, and the modification of data cannot be
determined. Data transfer starts at address 0, regardless of command chaining, and
continues to the end of the buffer. At the end of the operation, the buffer address
is set to O. This read operation can also be terminated by the channel byte .count
reaching zero before all data is read; in this case, the buffer address after termination is undefmed.
Short Read. The Read Modified command causes a short read operation if the CLEAR,
CNCL, or a PA key has been pressed at the selected device. During the Short Read
operation, only an AID byte is transferred to main storage. This AID byte identifies
the key that was pressed.
Test Request Read. This description applies only to units not using SNA protocol.
The Read Modified command causes a Test Request Read operation if the SYS REQ key
has been pressed at the selected device. The Test Request Read data stream sent to
main storage is as follows:
SOH
%
I
Test Request
Read Heading
STX
Input Da.!.....
~
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1-21
The Test Request Read heading is generated by the control unit. The remainder of the
data stream is the same as described previously for read-modified operations, excluding
the 3-byte read heading (AID and cursor address). If the buffer is unformatted, all
alphameric data in the buffer is included in the data stream (nulls are suppressed),
starting at address O. If the buffer is formatted, each attribute byte is examined for
a set MDT bit. Each time a set MDT bit is found, the alphameric data in the field
associated with that bit is sent to main storage (nulls are suppressed); if no MDT bits
are set, the read data stream consists of the Test Request Read heading only. The
buffer location at which the search for MDT bitS begins and the transfer of data ends
is the same as described for read-modified operations.
Test Request Read function usage is determined by the access method. Normally, the
operator would (1) clear the display, (2) enter test request data in a predefmed
format, and then (3) press the SYS REQ key.
Read Modified All Command
The Read Modified All command is used with the 3276 unit operating in SNA/SDLC
protocol. This command operates like a Read Modified command except that both
addresses and data from all modified fields are sent to the host, regardless of the
AID byte generated. The Read Modified All command is not generated by the control
unit in response to a poll sequence. It must be sent by the host.
1-22
Control Commands
Control commands initiate certain control unit and/or device operations not involved
with the transfer of data (other than status). Two control·type commands are executed
by the 3276: Copy and Erase All Unprotected. The applicable control units are identi·
fied within the description of each control command.
Copy Command
The Copy command is used to transfer buffer data from one device to another device
attached to the same control unit. The selected device is the "to" device, the one to
which buffer data will be transferred. The "from" device, the source of the buffer data
to be copied, is identified in the second of 2 bytes that follow the Copy command code;
the rust byte, called the copy control character (CCC), identifies the type of data to
be copied. The CCC can also, at the "to" device, start print operations, specify the
printout fonnat for those operations, and, when the device is a display station, sound
the audible alann.
The Copy data stream is as follows:
Bvte
..
.------
o
STX
ESC
Copy
2
See Figure 1-6.
Command Code
3
cee
See below and Figure 1-12.
4
"From" Device
Address
See Figure 1-13.
5
ETX
The CCC·byte fonnat is as follows:
o
1
Printout
Format
2
3
Start
Print
Sound
Alarm
4
5
Type of Data
to Be Copied
6
7
-Determined by the configuration of bits 2 through 7. See Figure 1-4.
Figure 1·12 describes the function of each CCC bit. A CCC and address byte must
always follow the command code; if they do not, the control unit aborts the command
and generates error status.
The 3276, when operating with SNA/SDLC protocol, does not support the Copy
command. A Copy function is provided, however, which is discussed under "Local
Copy Function" in Chapter 2.
,~
Clapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1·23
Bit
Explanation
0.1
Determined by the contents of bits 2 through 7 as shown in Figure 1-4.
2.3
Define the printout format as follows:
00 - The N L. EM. and CR I orders in the data stream determine print line
length. Provides a 132·print position line when the orders are not present.
a
=01 - Specifies a 40-character print line .
.. 10 - Specifies a 64-character print line .
.. 11 - Specifies an 8O-character print lin~.
4
The Start Print bit. When set to 1. initiates a printout operation at the "to"
device after buffer transfers are completed.
5
The Sound Alarm bit. When set to 1. sounds the audible alarm at the "to" device
after buffer transfers are completed if that device has an audible alarm.
6, 7
Define the type of data to be copie!;i as follows:
:: 00 - Only attribute characters are copied.
=01 - Attribute characters and unprotected alphameric fields (including nulls)
are copied. Nulls arc transferred for the alphameric characters not copied
from the protected fields.
:: 10 - All attribute characters and protected alphameric fields (including nulls)
are copied. Nulls are transferred for the alphameric characters not copied
from the unprotected fields .
.. 11 - The entire contents of the storage buffer (including nulls) are copied.
• The CR order is applicable to the terminal printers only.
Figure 1·12. Copy Control Character (CCC)
Copy command operations are similar to Write command operations. Mter the 3276, for
example, accepts the Copy data stream, it initiates the transfer of alI 1920 bytes from
the "from" device buffer to the 3276 buffer. Upon completion of this transfer, the 3276
inserts nulls in alI character locations that do not contain the type of data specified
by CCC bits 6 and 7. The updated control unit buffer contents are then transferred
to the selected ("to") device. At the completion of Copy command operations, the cursor
is in the same character location at the "to" device as it was at the "from" device at the
start of operations.
The "from" device buffer can be "locked" (made incapable of being copied) by writing a
protected/alphameric attribute byte (bit 2=1 and 3=0) in address 0 (with BSC only).
The Copy conunand can specify as the "from" device the same device that is selected
(the "to" device). This procedure provides a means of programming selective device
buffer "erase" operations as specified by CCC bits 6 and 7. In this case, the device
buffer contents are transferred to the control unit, nulls are inserted as detennined
by the CCC, and the resulting buffer contents are transferred back to the same device
buffer.
When the "from" and "to" devices are attached to a 3276 Modell, 2, 3, or 4, and when
the buffer size of the "from" device is smaller than, or equal in size to, the buffer size
of the "to" device, screen size switching occurs as listed in Figure "1-13. Invalid transfers are also indicated. The buffer of the "to" device is, in effect, cleared before the
copy is perfonned. The same rules apply for copy-operation transfers to printer
buffers.
1-24
To
3276/8·1
960
3276/8-1
480
3178/3276
/8-2/91920
3276/8-219
2560
3276/8-3
1920
3276/8-4
3440
3276/8-4
1920
3276/8·1
960
3276/8·1
0
A
V
0
480
3276
3278·2
3279
1920
3276
3278·2
3279
2560
3276/8-3
1920
3276/8-4
3440
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
V
0
V
0
0
0
A
•
Al
V
0
V
0
0
A
V
0
0
0
V
0
3276/8-4 3178
1920 1920
0
0
Legend:
0 Transfer allowed, no change in screen state required.
Transfer not allowed, Operation Check returned to host.
Transfer allowed, no change in screen state (appearance on "from" and "to" device may differ) .
A Transfer allowed, screen state changes to alternate size.
V Transfer allowed, screen state changes to default size.
-
•
I
The 3440 screen does not have a 2660 mode; therefore, the screen size is set to 3440.
Figure 1·13. Buffer Transfen for 3276 Models 1 through 4 Copy Command Operation
Programming Notes:
1. Copy should not be chained from a Write, Erase/Write Alternate, Erase/Write Unprotected, or Erase All Unprotected command, since it will copy the data as modified
by the Write or Erase command.
2. If the CCC Start Print bit is set and commands are being chained, Copy should
be the last command of the chain. If not, the control unit aborts the subsequent
command.
3. Copy can be executed from a smaller buffer size to a larger buffer size, but an
attempt to copy from a larger to a smaller buffer size will cause an Operation Check.
4. An Operation Check will occur if copying from an APL device in APL mode to a
device that does not have the APL feature installed.
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1·25
Erase All Unprotected Command
This command perfonns fIve functions at the addressed device:
1. Clears all unprotected buffer character locations to nulls.
2. Resets to 0 the MDT bit for each unprotected" fIeld.
I
3. Unlocks the keyboard when either the System Lock or the Wait symbol is displayed
on the 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279.
4. Resets the AID byte.
5. Repositions the cursor to the fIrst character location in the first unprotected field
of the buffer. If no unprotected fIelds exist, the cursor is positioned to buffer
location O.
Programming Restriction: Erase All Unprotected should not be chained to a Write,
Erase/Write, Erase/Write Alternate, Copy, or another Erase All Unprotected command.
If it is, the resulting operation is not defmed.
Orders
Orders can be included in Write, Erase/Write, or Erase/Write Alternate command data
streams, either alone or intermixed with display or print data. Two types of orders
are available: printout fonnat orders and buffer control orders. Printout fonnat orders
are initially stored in the buffer as data and are subsequently executed only during a
print operation.
The following paragraphs describe buffer control orders, which are executed as they
are received in the write data stream by the 3270; these orders are not stored in the
buffer. Six buffer control orders (see Figure 1-14) are provided to position, defme,
and fonnat data being written into the buffer, to erase selected unprotected data in
the buffer, and to reposition the cursor.
Notes:
1. Figure 2-4 shows attribute byte, and Figure 1-4 shows coding of this byte.
2. Figures 1-2 through 1-4 show coding of this byte.
3. Appendix B lists the 2-by te code for each possible address. To be a valid address:
a. If the default size is used in BSC mode, the 11UlXimum buffer addresses are:
3276-1.3278-1: 479
3178-C1, -C2; 3276-2, -3, -4; 3278-2, -3, -4; 3279-2, -3: 1919
b. If the altemate size is used in BSC mode, the 11UlXimum buffe.r addresses are
specified by the device model number:
Modell:
Model2:
Model3:
Model4:
959
1919
2559
3439
c. If the SNA/SDLC mode is used, the 11UlXimum default size and alternate size
are the display size minus 1. The display size is defined in the Bind parameter.
1-26
Start Field (SF) Order
This order notifies the control unit that the next byte in the write data stream is an
attribute character. The control unit then stores the next byte (the attribute
character) at the current buffer address. As the attribute character is stored, the
control unit sets a control bit at that address; this bit identifies the byte as an
attribute character during subsequent program or device operations with the buffer
data.
When received by control units and tenninals supporting the extended field attributes,
the SF order causes the default value (X'OO') for the Color, Extended Highlighting,
and Progranuned Symbols attribute types to 'be set in the extended field attribute
buffer.
Note: The byte immediately following the SF order in the data stream is always stored
as an attribute character, even when the byte is inten4ed as an order or an alphameric
data character.
During execution of a Read Buffer command, the control unit automatically inserts SF
order codes in the read data stream immediately before each attribute character. This
pennits identification of the attribute characters by the program and also pennits
correct storage of attribute characters in the buffer if the read data is used for subsequent write operations.
Byte 1
(Order Code)
Sequence
Byte 2
Byte 3
EBCDIC
(Hex)
ASCII
Start Field (SF)
10
10
Attribute
Character 1
Set Buffer Address (SBA)
11
11
1st Address
Byte 3
2nd Address
Byte 3
Insert Cursor (lC)
13
13
Program Tab (PT)
05
09
Repeat to Address (RA)
3C
14
1st Address
Byte 3
2nd Address
3
Byte
Erase Unprotected
to Address (EUA)
12
12
1st Address
Byte 3
2nd Address
Byte3
Order
Byte 4
(Hex)
Character to
Be Repeated 2
1 Figure 2-4 shows attribute byte, and Figura 14 shows coding of this byte.
1 Figures 1-2 through 14 show coding of this byte.
3 Appendix B lists the 2-byte code for each possible address. To be a valid address:
a. If the default size is used in BSC mode, the maximum buffer addresses are:
3276-1,3278-1: 479
317S-Cl. -C2;3276-2, -3. -4; 3278-2. -3. -4;3279-2. -3; 1919
b. If the alternate size is used in BSC mode, the maximum buffer addresses are specified by the device model number:
Model 1: 959
Model 2: 1919
Model 3: 2559
Model 4: 3439
c. If the SNA/SDLC mode is used, the maximum default size and alternate size are the display size minus 1.
The display size is defined in the Bind parameter.
Fipre 1-14. Buffer Control Orders and Order Codes.
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1-27
Set Buffer Address (SBA) Order
This 3-byte order specifies a new buffer address from which write operations are to
start or continue. Set Buffer Address orders can be used to write data into various
areas of the buffer. An SBA order can also precede another order in the data stream
to specify the starting address for aPT, RA, or EUA order; to specify the address
at which an attribute byte is to be stored by an SF order or modified by an MF
order; or to specify the address at which the cursor is to b~ repositioned by an Ie order.
If the SBA order specifies an invalid address, the write operation is tenninated at this
point.
When a Read Modified command is executed and an attribute character (initially sent
to the device by writing an SF order) is detected with the MDT bit set, the eu
inserts, in place of the attribute, an SBA code followed by the 2-byte buffer address
of the fust character in the modified field (attribute address +1). This pennits identification by the control unit of fields that are modified. When a Read Modified command
is executed in the 3276, this three-byte sequence is always sent in the same text block.
The 3276 does not split this sequence between two successive blocks.
Insert Cuisor (Ie) Order
This order repositions the cursor to the location specified by the current buffer
address. Execution of this order does not change the current buffer address. For
example, ifIC is issued when the current buffer address is 160 and the cursor is at
location 80, the cursor is moved from location 80 and inserted at location 160. The
current buffer address at the end of this operation would remain 160.
Program Tab (PT) Order
The PT order advances the current buffer address to the address of the first character
position of the next unprotected field. If the PT is issued when the current buffer
address is the location of an attribute byte of an unprotected field, the buffer address
advances to the next location of that field (one location). In addition, if the PT order
in the write data stream does not follow a control command, order, or order sequence
such as wce, IC, or RA (3-character sequence), nulls are inserted in the buffer from
the current buffer address to the end of the field, regardless of the value of bit 2
(protected/unprotected) of the attribute character for the field. Whenever a character
position is set to null by the PT order, the default value (X'OO') for the Color,
Extended Highlighting, and Programmed Symbols attribute types is set in the character
attribute buffer. When the PT order follows a control command, order, or order sequence, the buffer content is not modified for that field.
The PT order stops its search at the last location in the buffer. If an attribute
character for an unprotected field is not found by this point, the buffer address is
set to location o. (If the PT order fmds an attribute character for an unprotected
field in the last buffer location, the buffer address is also set to zero.)
To continue the search for an unprotected field, a second PT order must be issued
immediately following the fust one. Since the current buffer address was reset to 0
by the first PT order, the second PT order begins its search at buffer location o.
If the previous PT order was still inserting nulls in each character location when it
tenninated at the last buffer location, the new PT order will continue to insert nulls
from buffer location 0 to the end of the current field.
1-28
Repeat to Address (RA) Order
The RA order stores a specified alphameric or null character in all buffer locations,
starting at the current buffer address and ending at (but not including) the specified
stop address. This stop address and the character to be repeated are identified by
the 3 bytes inunediately following the RA order in the write data stream, as follows:
Bvte
o
RA Order
Stop
Address
-
-
See Appendix B
for address.
2
3
Character to Be Repeated
_ See Figures 1·2 through 14
for codes
The third character following the RA order is always interpreted as the character
that will be repeated. If an invalid stop address is specified, the write operation is
terminated at this point without storing the character, and error status is generated.
When Color, Extended Highlighting, or Programmed Symbols attributes are specified for
the character, the attribute values are entered into the character attribute buffer as
each repeated character is written in the data buffer.
When the stop address is lower than the current buffer address, the RA operation
wraps from the bottom row of the buffer to the top row. When the stop address equals
the current address, the specified character is stored in all buffer locations.
Attribute characters will be overwritten by the RA order if they occur before the RA
order stop address.
Programming Note: If the RA order specifies X'ID' to indicate a 2-byte character code
(for the Data Analysis/APL), only X'ID' will be repeated. See Figure D-2, Part 2.
Erase Unprotected to Address (EUA) Order
The EUA order inserts nulls in all unprotected buffer character locations, starting at
the current buffer address and ending at, but not including, the specified stop
address. This stop address is specified by 2 address bytes which immediately follow
the EUA order in the write data stream. If an invalid address is specified, the write
operation is terminated at this point and error status is generated. Whenever a character position is set to null by the PT order, the default value (X'OO') for the Color,
Extended Highlighting, and Programmed Symbols attribute types is set in the character
attribute buffer.
When the stop address is lower than the current buffer address, the EUA operation
wraps from the bottom row of the buffer to the top row. When the stop address equals
the current address, all unprotected character locations in the buffer are erased.
Attribute characters are not affected by the EUA order.
Chapter 1. 3276 Control Unit and Data Streams
1·29
Chapter 2. Tenninals
This chapter describes the function of the display stations (including keyboard operation,
selector light pen, and magnet stripe reade r) and printers that can be attached to the 3276
Control Unit Display Station.
Displays
Display Images
Display stations for the 3276 Control Unit Display Station are buffered displays. Data
displayed on the screen is stored in coded form in a display buffer; the buffer contains
as many locations as there are character positions on the screen. The data may be
loaded from the host system by the application program or from a keyboard attached to
the display station. Figure 2-1 illustrates the concept of a buffered display.
Curso r
E
~
o
•
U
~
I-:I:_v>ll.l..
Z
0
.c
U
I
..
5l
Figure 2·1. Buffer Location and Display Screen Character Position Relationships
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-1
I~
12 Rows
l ,12 Rows
,
"'1
40 Character Positions
0
40
80
120
160
200
240
280
320
360
400
440
39
79
119
159
199
239
279
319
359
399
439
479
480·Character
Display Format
(
J
80 Character Positions
79
0
80
160
240
320
400
480
560
640
720
800
880
159
960-Character Display Format
799
879
959
I~
•
,80 Character Positions
0
80
160
240
79
169
239
319
399
479
559
639
719
J
~2O
24 Rows
239
319
399
479
559
639
719
400
480
560
640
720
800
880
960
1040
1120
1200
1280
1360
1440
1520
1600
1680
1760
1840
(
799
1920-CharBcter Display Format
\
)
879
969
1039
1119
1199
1279
1369
1439
1519
1599
1679
1759
1839
1919
Note: See Appendix 8 for hexadecimal lIqu;"alent••
Figure 2-2 (part 1 of 2). Buffer Addressing Layouts for 480-, 960-, 1920-, 2560-, and 3440- Chaneter Terminals
2-2
I ..
.. I
80 Character Positions
79
159
239
319
399
479
559
639
0
80
160
240
320
400
480
32 Rows
2000
2080
2160
2240
2320
2400
2480
2159
2239
2319
2399
2479
2559
2560·Character Display Format
I ..
80 Character Positions
0
80
79
159
239
319
399
479
559
639
160
240
320
400
480
"'1
43 Rows
2720
2800
2880
3200
3280
3360
3440·Character Display Format
3359
3439
Figure 2-2 (Part 2 of 2). Buffer Addressing Layouts for 480-,960-,1920-,2560-, and 3440- Character Terminals
The display image contains a fIXed number of horizontal rows, with a fIXed number of
character positions in each row. The display station of the 3276 can support the following screen capacities:
Models 1 and 11
Models 2 and 12
Models 3 and 13
Models 4 and 14
960 1920 2560 3440 -
character display 12 rows of 80 characters
character display 24 rows of 80 characters
character display 32 rows of 80 characters
character display 43 rows of 80 characters
There is a fIXed relationship between each location in the display buffer and each
character pOSition on the display screen. Buffer addresses start from 0, for the
character position at the left of the top row, and proceed sequentiaIly along the rows
and down the screen to the character position at the right of the bottom row (for
example, an image with 960 character positions has buffer addresses from 0 to 959).
Figure 2-2 shows the addresses of the first and last character positions in each row,
depending upon the available screen capacity.
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-3
Each location in the buffer contains I byte of storage; codes loaded into the buffer
are 2-digit hexadecimal codes. Write commands are used to load the display buffer
locations with the code needed to display the required data on the display screen (see
Chapter I). Defined codes that are displayed as alphameric characters are shown in
Figures 1·2 and 1·3.
~
Display images may be fonnatted or unfonnatted:
• Fonnatted Display: A fonnatted display is one that has separate fields dermed by
the program. The rust character position in each 'field contains a control character
that defines the characteristics of the field. See "Field Attributes," later in this
chapter, for a description of the control character.
• Unfonnatted Display: An unfonnatted display is one that has no defined fields. An
operator may input data into any position on the screen; to access the data, the
program must issue a read command for the entire display buffer.
Display Fields
A fonnatted display contains display fields defined by the program. These fields
consist of blocks of character positions bounded by control characters. The control
character at the start of a field is set by the program to detennine the characteristics
of the field; this character contains the field attributes. (For details, see "Attributes,"
later in this chapter.) Fields containing character positions on more than one row
"wrap" from the last character position on one row to the first character position on
the next row. A field may wrap the screen; if the first character position on the
screen does not contain a control character, the last field on the screen wraps from
the last character position to the rust. (Some field· oriented operations ar~ tenninated
early if the field wraps the screen; this effect is noted in the descriptions of the
specific operations.)
Display fields simplify operations both for the operator and for the programmer.
Headings can be displayed to prompt the operator as to the data that should be
entered, and the program can identify fields that contain entered data without reading
the entire display buffer. When data is being entered into a fonnatted display, the
presence of a control character acts as a tab stop; pressing the tab key advances the
cursor from its current position to the first character position in the next unprotected
field. (An unprotected field is one that accepts data input from the keyboard.)
The example in Figure 2·3 illustrates the versatility of fonnatted displays. In this
example, the solid characters represent the displayed fonn of characters stored in the
buffer. The dotted squares represent the character positions corresponding to control
characters at the start of each field. The dotted characters represent fields of data
that are stored in the buffer, but that have been defined by the program as non·
displayable; that is, not to be displayed to the operator.
[lNAME :[J JOHN B DOE
o SALARY [J 1 2 5 ~~ :s
[]JOB TITLE :[lWRITER
[JPHONE .... :[1383-7628
Figure 2·3. Example of Formatted Display
I~
24
To define the start of a field, the program may issue a Write command transferring a
Set Buffer Address (SBA) order and a Start Field (SF) order to the display; the
specified buffer address is selected, and the control character.specified by. the SF
order is loaded into the addressed location. Only the start of a field is dermed;
starting a field ends the previous field at the character position prior to the new
control character.
Attributes
Display stations may be programmed with fomatted fields. The control character at the
start of each field contains the field attributes. Attributes contained in this character
apply to all the data contained in the field; for example, the attribute character for
the field containing PHONE # iii Figure 2-3 might defme the field as protected to
ensure that the operator does not enter data into that field, and the field containing
383-7628 might be defined as unprotected to allow the data to be changed.
Field Attributes
The field-attribute character occupies the fllSt character position of each display field
in a fomatted display; the corresponding character position on the display screen is
always blank. This 8-bit attoDute character is loaded by a Start Field order to (1)
derme the start of a field and (2) assign characteristics to the field. Bit positions in
the character are significant to the display; the value assigned to each bit or group
of bits controls whether a specific attribute is applied.
Field AttnDute Character
Figure 24 shows the significance of bits in the field-attribute character. Characteristics
set by the field-attribute character are:
• Protected/Unprotected: An operator cannot enter data into or modify the content
of a protected field. Input fields that require data from the operator must be unprotected.
• Alphameric/Numeric: In an unprotected input field, alphameric/numeric defines the
type of data that an operator can enter into the field. This attribute has special
meaning for protected fields, data entry keyboards, and the Numeric Lock feature.
• Nondisplay/Display/Intensified: Data contained in the field is either not displayed,
displayed at normal intensity, or displayed at high intensity. The 3279 does not
support two levels of intensity; if no extended attribute is defined, nonintensified
fields and intensified fields are displayed in different colors. (The actual colors
are determined by the position of the Base Color switch and the value of the Protected/Unprotected attribute.)
Programming Note: Refer to "Selector-Light-Pen Operations," later in this chapter,
for the use of intensified field attributes when formatting selector-light-pen-detectable fields.
• Detectable/Nondetectable: Displayed data in a detectable field can be detected by
the selector light pen. (The detectable field must contain a designator character
as described under ''Selector-Light-Pen Op~rations" in this chapter.)
Field attributes are protected against in'put from the keyboard; however, bit 7
(Modified Data Tag) is set to 1 when the operator enters data into the field dermed
by the attributes. Attribute characters are not protected against operation of the
CLEAR key; pressing the CLEAR key erases all locations in the display buffer.
Olapter 2. Terminals
2-5
Attribute character bit assignments are summarized as follows:
X
X
U/P
o
2
EBCDIC
I
AlN
3
I I I
DISPD
4
Reserved MDT
5
6
7
Field Description
Bit
0, 1
-
Value determined by contents of bits
2:'7. See Figure 1-8 for hexadecimal
values.
2
-
0 ... Unprotected
1 0: Protected
3
-
0 ... Alphameric
1 = Numeric (causes automatic upshift
of data entry keyboard)
Note: Bin 2 and 3 equal to "causes an
automatic skip. See tflxt
4,5
-
00" Display/not selector· light-pen
detectable.
01 0: Display/selector-lightopen detectable.
10 zz Intensified dispiay/selector-light-pendetectable.
11 = Nondlsplay, nonprint, nondetectable.
6
-
Reserved.
7
• Modified Data Tag (MDT); identifies
modified fields during Read Modified
command operations.
o .. Field has not been modified.
1 ... Field has been modified by the
operator. Can also be set by program in data stream.
Figure 24. Field Attribute Character Bit Assignment
Base Color Mode
The 3279 uses the field attributes for the additional purpose of controlling color.
Models 2A and 3A of the 3279 always decode the field attributes to assign a color to
each display field. If the operator sets the Base Color switch to base color (0000),
then the fields are colored in one of four colors - red, blue, green, or white·
depending upon the protect and intensify bits. If the operator sets the Base Color
switch to monochrome (00), all data is displayed in green except for intensified
fields; intensified data is displayed in white. The particular attributes examined are
the protect and intensify attributes. Figure 2-5 shows how the value of these attrib·
utes detennines the color of characters displayed in a field.
Note: The integrity of the unpro~ected/protected attribute is preserved,' the operator
can enter data only into an unprotected field.
Field Attribute
Attribute Bit
2 3 4 5
Unprotected, normal intensity
Unprotected, intensified
Protected, normal intensity
Protected, intensified
0
0
1
1
X
X
X
X
0
1
0
1
X
0
X
0
Base Color Switch
00
Green
White
Green
White
0000
Green
Red
Blue
White
Figure 2-S. Colors Derived from Field Attributes
Keyboard Operations
Keyboards, which may be attached to a display station, enable the operator to change,
edit, or create character displays except within fields defmed by attribute characters
as protected from keyboard operations by the program. As messages are being composed or modified by keyboard operations, the changes are inserted in the buffer and
then displayed. When the operator completes an operation and presses the ENTER or
an AID generating key, an I/O pending interruption occurs.
Cursor
A special symbol, called a cursor, is displayed on the display screen to indicate where
On 3178, 3276, 3278, and
3279 displays, the cursor may appear as an underscore, as a blinking underscore, or as
a rectangular or blinking rectangular symbol imposed over a character. The character
within the rectangular cursor remains visible. The operator may change the cursor
from an underscore to a rectangular symbol, or vice versa, by pressing the Alternate
Cursor (ALT CURSR) key. The same operator may cause either type cursor to blink
by using the Cursor Blink (CURSR BLINK) key. When the cursor is displayed under
one character in a line of characters (Figure 2-1), that character can be changed or
deleted by keyboard action. Also, if the cursor is displayed under (or within) a
position without a display character, a character can be entered in that position by
keyboard action.
I the next character entered from the keyboard will be stored.
One, and only one, cursor must always be in the display buffer. A cursor check
occurs when the display station circuitry detects no cursor or more than one cursor
in the buffer. When the display is turned on, the cursor is automatically generated
and displayed in the fust location on the screen. The cursor can be repositioned by
the keyboard operator and also by the program. The cursor is not affected by field
attributes or by the Security Keylock special feature; it is displayed even when
positioned in a nondisplayed/nonprint field and when the Security Keylock special
feature (if installed) is turned off.
Keyboards
Six types of keyboards are available: typewriter, data entry, data entry keypunch
layout, operator console, APL, and text keyboards. All keyboards have special symbol
keys and control keys for ~ntering data. The type of keyboard determines the
characters and symbols that can be transmitted from the system for the display image.
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-7
I Variations between keyboards include 75-key and 87-key versions for the 3178, 3276,
3278, and 3279. The 75-key keyboard provides all the basic operator keys. The 87-key
keyboard provides expanded operator-to-program message flexibility with 12
additional keys that may be defined to fit the requirements of the application program.
Refer to 3270 Information Display System: Character Set Reference, GA27-2837, for
key layouts and nomenclature.
Typewriter and APL 87-key and 88-key keyboards are available with extended function
for the 12 program function keys on the right-hand side of the keyboards.
Key Functions
Alphabetic characters on typewriter keyboards attached to 3276 displays can be entered
into the display buffer in either uppercase or lowercase code, depending upon the
position of the Shift key. However, only uppercase alphabetic codes can be entered
I from data entry keyboards. On 3178,3276,3278, and 3279 displays, alphabetic
characters in the buffer (uppercase or lowercase codes) are displayed as all uppercase
or uppercase and lowercase characters, as detennined by the setting of the Dual Casel
Mono Case switch. The shift keys on the Katakana keyboards operate differently from
the keys described here; refer to Appendix E for details.
Keyboard entry of an alphameric character into the display buffer occurs at the cursor
location, provided the cursor is located in an alphameric character location within an
unprotected data field. (An attempt to enter an alphameric character into a protected
data field or into an attribute character location is blocked.)
Successful keyboard entry of the alphameric character causes the cursor to advance
to the next character location within the unprotected data field.
Note: The following descriptions of key /unctions are applicable to all keyboards,
except where noted. In some cases, descriptions of key /unctions contain SNA protocol
terms, references to local copy operations, or Operator Information Area symbols. For
a detailed description of these topics, refer to "Local Copy Function" later in this
chapter, to "SNA/SDLC Communication" in Chapter 4, or to Figure A-3 in Appendix A.
Operator Information Area symbols in this chapter are designated as "Do Not Enter"
symbols in Appendix A.
.
The ALT key must be held to activate functions shown on the front of keys on the
I 3178-, 3276-, 3278-, and 3279- attached keyboards. These functions are SYS REQ,
CLEAR, ERASE INPUT, IDENT, TEST, DEV CNCL, PFI-PFI2, PAl, PA2, ALT
CURSR, and HOME. The ALT key is also used with the » (Right) and « (Left) key
to move the cursor two locations at a time instead of one. Using the ALT key with a
key that has no associated function produces no effect.
Automatic Skip
Upon entry of a character into the last character location of an unprotected data field,
the cursor is repositioned according to the attribute character describing the next field.
If the field attribute character defmes the next field as (1) alphameric and either
unprotected or protected, or (2) numeric and unprotected, the cursor skips the attribute character and is positioned to the flfSt character location in that field.
If the field attribute character defmes the field as numeric and protected, the cursor
automatically skips that field and is pOSitioned to the fust character location of the
next unprotected fiel~.
2-8
Character-Orientecl Keys
A cluster of four keys (located to the right of the main keyboard) moves the cursor
one location at a time into any character location. These are + (Up), • (Down),
~ (Right), and ~ (Left). A fifth key, the Backspace key, occupies its nonnal
position on the keyboard. It perfonns the same functions as the move-cursor-Ieft key.
The cursor may be moved into any character location, including unprotected and protected alphameric character and field attribute character locations, through the use of
l
~~~~oo~~~~~~~~~~.~
I
t
(Down), ~ (Right), and ~ (Left) keys move the cursor one location at
a time. When the ALT (Alternate) key is pressed and held, the » (Right) and
« (Left) keys will move the cursor two locations at a time.
These keys are all capable of causing the cursor to wrap. Horizontal wrap always
involves a vertical movement; the cursor repositions to the next or preceding row of
characters. Vertical wrap due to operatioo of the Up or Down keys involves no horizontal movement; the cursor stays in the same character column.
These keys all have typamatic operation at a repeat rate of approximately 10 operations
per second. (When a typamatic key is fully pressed, its function is repeated as long
as the key is held pressed.)
Field-Odenteci Keys
Any of four keys moves the cursor to the fust position in a field on a fonnatted
screen. All four key operations can cause the cursor to wrap from the end of the last
line on the display and to continue at the beginning of the top line. Operation of these
keys does not affect the MDT bit.
~ (Tab) Key: Moves the cursor to the first character location of the next unprotected data field. In a display with no unprotected fields, the cursor is repositioned
to character location o. The Tab key has typamatic capability at a repeat rate of
apprOximately 10 operations per second.
~ (Back-tab) Key: When the cursor is located in the field attribute character
position or the rust alphameric character location of an unprotected data field or in
any character location of a protected data field, this key moves the cursor to the
fust alphameric character location of the fmt preceding unprotected data field. When
the cursor is located in any alphameric character location of an unprotected data field
other than the first location, this key moves the cursor to the first alphameric character location of that field. In a display with no unprotected fields, the cursor is
repositioned to character location O. The Back-tab key on keyboards attached only to
3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 units has typamatic capability.
I
.J (New Line) Key: Moves the cursor to the first unprotected character location of
the next line. If the display has no unprotected data fields, the cursor is repOSitioned
to character location O. If the display contains no fields, the cursor is repositioned to
the fmt character position of the next line. The New Line key has typamatic capability
at a rate of approximately 10 operations per second.
(!J (Home) Key: Moves the cursor to the first unprotected character position on a
~279 display screen.
I 3178,3276,3278, or
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-9
Erase EOF (Erase to End of Field) Key
If the cursor is located in an alphameric character location in an unprotected data field,
this key clears the character location occupied by the cursor and all remaining character locations to the right in that field to nulls. The character attributes for all the
erased characters are set to X'OO'. The operation can wrap from the end of the last line
on the display to the end of the field. The cursor does not move as a result of operating this key, and the MDT bit is set to 1.
Operation of this key when the cursor is located in an attribute character location or
is within a protected data field causes an input-inhibit condition and disables the keyboard; no character l~ations are cleared, the cursor is not moved, and the MDT bit
is not set.
ERASE INPUT Key
This key clears all unprotected character locations to nulls, resets the MDT bit to 0
in unprotected fields, and repositions the cursor to the flISt unprotected character
location on the screen. The character attributes for all the erased characters are set
to X'OO'.
On 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 displays, the Alternate (ALT) key must be pressed and
I held first.
In a buffer with only protected data fields, no character locations are cleared and the
cursor is repositioned to character location O.
If the display contains no field, the entire buffer is cleared to nulls, all character
attributes are set to X'OO', and the cursor is repositioned to location O.
I 'i'
INS (Insert) Mode Key (3178,3276,3278, or 3279)
I The INS MODE key on 3178-, 3276-, 3278-, or 3279-attached keyboards places the keyboard in an insert mode of operation. The Insert symbol is displayed in the Operator
I Infonnation Area on the 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279 display screen.
If the cursor is located in an unprotected data field having a null character either in
the character location identified by the cursor or in any character location in the field
beyond the cursor, operation of an alphameric key causes that alphameric character to
be entered at the cursor and the MDT bit to be set to 1. The character fonnerly
ocCupying the cursor location and all remaining characters within the field (except
for null characters or characters to the right of null characters) will be shifted one
character location to the right. If the location identified by the cursor location at
the time of the insert operation is a null, no character shifting occurs.
After all null characters at or beyond the cursor loca~on in the field have been
overwritten, or if there were no null characters, operation of an alphameric key
causes the keyboard to become disabled. Field-attribute characters and extended field
attributes are not shifted as part of the insert operation. On displays that support
extended attributes, the character attributes are shifted with the characters. The
character attributes for inserted characters are set to X'OO', except where the application program allows attribute-selection and the operator has selected specific
attributes.
2-10
~
If more than one row of characters is contained within the field, a character occupying
the last character location in the row is shifted into the fust character location of the
next row.
Operation of an alphameric key while in insert mode when the cursor is located in a
field-attribute character location or is within a protected data field disables the
keyboard; no character locations are cleared, the cursor is not moved, and the MDT
bit is not set.
J On 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 displays, operation of the RESET key, ENTER key, or
any other key that causes host communication returns the keyboard to normal mode.
(Operation of the selector light pen or the CURSR SEL (Cursor Select) key also
returns the keyboard to normal mode.)
I'
Delete Key (3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279)
If the cursor is located in an alphameric character location in an unprotected field,
I operation of the Delete key (3118, 3276, 3278, or 3279) deletes the character from the
character location identified by the cursor and sets the MDT bit to 1 (if not previously
set). The cursor does not move. All remaining characters in the unprotected field, to
the right of the cursor and on the same row, shift one character location to the left.
If the display supports extended attributes, the character attributes for the deleted
character are deleted and the other character attributes are shifted left; the character
attributes of vacated character positions are set to X'OO'. Vacated character locations at
the end of the row are filled with nulls. If the unprotected field encompasses more
than one row, characters in rows other than the row identified by the cursor are not
affected.
Operation of this key when the cursor is located in a field attribute character location
or is within a protected data field disables the keyboard; no character locations ·are
cleared, the cursor is not moved, and the MDT bit is not set.
RESET Key
The RESET key is used to recover from an inhibited keyboard operation that has
resulted in a disabled keyboard. When a keyboard is disabled, no other keyboard
operations are honored. The RESET key will not reset a disabled keyboard when a
command is being executed for the device to which the keyboard is attached, or when
a parity error or cursor check is detected in the device buffer.
I On 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 displays, when a keyboard is disabled, symbols are displayed on the bottom row of the screen. Pressing RESET restores the keyboard or other
input devices, except for Printer Busy, Printer Very Busy, Printer Not Working, Time, or
Security Key input-inhibited conditions. Pressing RESET once resets multiple inputinhibited conditions.
When operating in BSC after an AID generating key is pressed, the ·RESET key will
be ignored during the period from poll to the end of a transmission to the host. Prior
to the poll, a RESET action will cancel both the AID code and I/O pending. After
transmission to the host is ended, RESET will reset the AID code.
RESET causes print ID mode to terminate. The cursor then reappears, and the old
printer ID is displayed in the indicator row.
Chapter 2. Tenninals
2-11
DUP (DupUcate) Key
Operation of this key causes a unique character code to be entered into the display
buffer, a Tab key operation to be performed, and the MDT bit to be set to 1. The
DUP key is provided on all keyboard types except operator console. The DUP
character provides a means of informing the application program that a "duplicate"
operation is indicated for the rest of the field in which it is located. The DUP character is transferred as a DUP code (Figures 1-2 and 1-3) when the data is read from
the display to the program. No duplicate operation is performed at the 3276. The DUP
character, when stored in a device buffer, is displayed as an asterisk (*) on 3178,3276,
3278, and 3279 displays using mono-case mode and is printed as an asterisk (*) on a
printer. On 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 displays using dual-case mode, DUP is displayed
as an asterisk with an overscore (i).
Pressing the DUP key does not affect the current status of extended attributes;
however, the PS selection has no effect on a DUP character.
Operation of this key when the cursor is located in a field-attribute character location
or is within a protected data field disables the keyboard; no character locations are
cleared, the cursor is not moved, and the MDT bit is not set.
FM (Field Mark) Key
Operation of this key causes a unique character code to be entered into the display
buffer and the MDT bit to be set to 1. The field mark character provides a means of
informing the application program of the end of a field in an unformatted buffer
or subfield in a formatted buffer. The field mark character is transferred as an FM
code when the data is read from the display to the program. The field mark character,
when stored in a device buffer, is displayed as a semicolon (;) on the 3178, 3276, 3278,
and 3279 displays using mono-case mode, and is printed as an asterisk (*) on a printer.
On the 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 displays using dual-case mode, FM is displayed as a
semicolon with an overscore (;). The Field Mark key is not provided on operator
console type keyboards.
Pressing the FM key does not affect the current status of extended attributes; however, the PS selection has no effect on an FM character.
Operating this key when the cursor is located in a field-attribute character location
or within a protected data field disables the keyboard; no character locations are
cleared, the cursor is not moved, and the MDT bit is not set.
Program Attention Keys
I
2-12
The program attention keys for the 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 displays are CLEAR,
ENTER, the Program Function (PF) keys, and the Program Access (PA) keys. The use of
a PA or PF key during a System Services Control Point (SSCP) session results in an
input-inhibited condition. Refer to "Keyboard Disabled (INPUT INHIBITED Indicator
Is On)." On 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 displays, the operation of the CLEAR key also
clears the display screen of all data to nulls (except the indicator row), sets all extended
attributes to X'OO', and positions the cursor at location 0,0 on the display.
~
Operation of the CLEAR key does not change shift status except that it will remove
the NUM symbol, if displayed. It does not perform a reset function. If an alternate
screen size has been selected, the CLEAR key will reset the screen to the default size.
When SNA/SDLC is used, the action of the CLEAR key depends upon the type of
session. In 3276 BSC, the CLEAR key AID code is sent to the host. When SNA/SDLC
is used, the CLEAR key AID code is sent to the host when CLEAR is pressed while
in the LU-LU session. While in test mode, the CLEAR key does not cause an AID to
be sent to the host.
Note: Not all pr()gram attention keys are available on each type of3276 keyboard.
SYS (System) REQ Key
When the 3276 operates in remote SNA/SDLC, the operator can use the SYS REQ key
for SSCP-SLU and PLU-SLU session switch procedures. SYS REQ also simultaneously
initiates keyboard reset and clear functions. SYS REQ performs these functions despite
the presence of input-inhibited conditions except (1) when inbound processing is
queued for the display station, in which case the Input Inhibited What symbol appears,
and (2) when Printer Busy, Printer Very Busy, or Printer Not Working is displayed,
which results in no response when SYS REQ is pressed. (Inbound processing queue is
the time from when an AID generating key is pressed until regeneration to the line
buffer transfer has been completed.)
In BSC operation, the SYS REQ key performs the test-request function. The automatic
reset function is not available. Refer to "Test Request Read"'under "Read Modified
Command" in Chapter 1.
The ALT key must be pressed and held while the SYS REQ key is pressed.
DEV CNCL (Device Cancel) Key
The operator may use DEV CNCL to cancel a current outstanding print request to a
terminal printer if input is inhibited because of a Printer Busy or Printer Very Busy condition. A request initiated by the Print key is de queued , and the keyboard is restored.
A host print request is dequeued, and a negative response is sent to the host. The
printer Busy symbol is replaced by the Time symbol.
DEV CNCL is also used to remove Device Not Functional conditions. Any coexisting
malfunction-while-printing symbol is also removed.
Following use of the Print key, the keyboard is restored. After a host-initiated print,
the Printer Not Working symbol is replaced by the Time symbol.
During other input-inhibited conditions, DEV CNCL causes no response, except that it
is queued or detected (with subsequent indication) during certain Time conditions in
other situations. Use of DEV CNCL in other situations results in no indication.
The ALT key must be pressed and held while the DEV CNCL key is pressed, to
cancel a request and restore the keyboard.
IfDEV CNCL is used during a print ID operation at the 3276, the 3276 remains in
print ID mode.
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-13'
I -fr
(SHIFT Key). 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279
Shift keys perform the upshift function. When the typewriter keyboard becomes ready
initially, only characters located on the bottom position of the key tops can be entered
from the keyboard. By pressinR and holding the Shift key. characters shown on the
top position of the key tops can be entered. On 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 displays, the
shift ''up'' state is indicated to the operator in the Operator Infonnation Area on the
display screen. Pressing the Shift key will reset the Lock key.
I
I(i)
(LOCK Key) .3178,3276,3278, or 3279
The Lock key fIXes upshift character selection. It is deactivated by pressing the Shift
I key. When the Shift key on a 3178,3276,3278, and 3279 typewriter keyboard is used,
the shift state is indicated to the operator in the Operator Infonnation Area on the
display screen.
I -fr
(NUM Key) • 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279
I The Numeric key on the equivalent 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 keyboards is used to perfonn the upshift function, equivalent to the Shift keys on the typewriter keyboards. The
"up" shift state is indicated to the operator in the Operator Infonnation Area on the
display screen.
I (i)
(NUM LOCK Key) • 3178,3276,3278, or 3279
I The Numeric Lock key on the 3178 data entry, and 3276, 3278,3279 data-entry/datat:ntry keypunch layout keyboards fIXes the upshifted character selection, but will not
disable the Numeric Lock feature. It is released by pressing the Numeric Lock key again.
The keyboard then reverts to shift or to programmed control shift. The shift "upu state
is indicated to the operator in the Operator Infonnation Area on the display screen
whenever the Numeric Lock key is pressed.
I {!.
(Alpha Key) • 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279
I When the data entry 3178, 3276, 3278, 3279 or data entry keypunch layout 3268,
3276,3278 keyboards have been programmed for non-alpha shift, characters shown on
the bottom of the key tops can be selected by holding the Alpha key and entering the
desired characters. When power is applied, the keyboard is in lowercase alpha mode.
CURSR SEL (Cursor Select) Key
I The CURSR SEL key on 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 keyboards allows the selector-lightpen-detection function to be perfonned from the keyboard. The CURSR SEL key may
be used on any field defmed as a selector-light-pen-detectable field (as described
under the heading "Selector-Light-Pen Operations"). However, a cursor-select field
does not require the space or null character padding constraints associated with the
selector-Iight-pen-detectable field and cursor-select can occur within the field on a
line different from that of the attribute that describes the field.
Cursor-select operations may be immediate or deferred (as defined for selector-light-pen
fields). The field used for a cursor-select operation may also be defmed in the following
fonnat:
2-14
~
• Basic attribute character as defmed for selector light pen.
• Designator character as defined for selector light pen.
• Data character(s) Optional
• Basic attribute character Next field.
This fonnat is not applicable when using the selector light pen. When defining a
cursor-select field, the attribute character may not be located in the last line of the
display with the designator character in the first line.
A1TN (Attention) Key
I The ATTN key on the 3178, 327~, 3278, and 3279 keyboards is operable in SNA/SDLC
in an SNA LU-LU session, with the following exceptions:
1. When inbound processing is queued for the display.
2. When in Shutdown condition.
3. When in Data Traffic Reset state.
4. When a second or successive ATTN that occurs prior to completion of processing
for the fU'St ATTN is ignored (with no indication).
Use of ATTN in any session except LU-LU causes' an Input Inhibit Minus Function.
The ATTN key is inoperative in BSC and will cause an Input Inhibit Minus Function
when pressed.
CURSR (Cursor) BLINK Key
I
Pressing the CURSR BLINK key causes the cursor (either the bar or the rectangular
cursor) to blink. Activating the key again causes the blinking to stop. This key
function is available on keyboards attached to the 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279.
ALT CURSR (Alternate Cursor) Key
Pressing the ALT CURSR key while holding the ALT key changes the cursor display.
The underlined type of cursor is changed to a rectangular cursor. Conversely, the
rectangular cursor is changed to the underlined type of cursor by activating the ALT
I CURSR key. This key function is available on keyboards attached to the 3178, 3276,
3278, or 3279.
TEST Key
I The TEST key on the 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279 keyboard is used to invoke test functions resident, in the 3276. Pressing the TEST key (while holding ALT key) clears and
resets the display screen, and the test mode indication turns on, despite any inputinhibited conditions, with the follOWing exceptions: If Printer Busy, Printer Very Busy,
or Printer Not Working is displayed, or if the security key is locked, use of TEST
results in no response. The control unit places the device to be tested in test mode,
and the operator identifies the test function desired. The operator tenninates test
mode by pressing the TEST key again.
OIapter 2. TermblalB
2-IS
When the 3276 uses SNA/SDLC, the control unit enters test ownership state. When
the 3276 operates in remote BSe mode, Intervention Required is generated if a
command is received for the display when in test mode. When test mode tenninates
normally, status with Device End is generated.
Gi!!J (Click Key)
I A clicking sound may be produced as keys are pressed on keyboards attached to 3178,
3276,3278, and 3279 displays. The clicking sound is controlled by operating conditions
such as input inhibit. For example, if the clicking sound is enabled and an input-inhibited
condition occurs, the key clock is then disabled, and vice versa. By pressing the
Click key, the operator can activate the clicking sound if it has been turned off or
prevent clicking if it has been activated.
00 (print Key)
The Print key is used to initiate a local copy (unction from a keyboard attached to a
I 3178,3276,3278, or 3279 display.
IDENTKey
The IDENT key is used to assign a printer or printer class, while perfonning a local
copy function. (The ALT key must be pressed to activate the IDENT key.) When the
IDENT key is pressed, the cursor disappears from the screen, and the Printer.
Assignment symbol appears with two underlined characters in the "nn" position. The
operator may then enter the ID in the "nn" pOsition. (Display stations with one of the
PS features always select the base character set for the printer ID; if a symbol set
is active when the IDENT key is pressed, it is suppressed and then made active again
at the end of the printer ID sequence.)
If the specified printer is not authorized (that is, the matrix does not permit the
display to copy' to the selected device or class of devices), the keyboard is locked
and the Input Inhibited Operator Unauthorized symbol is displayed. If the print ID is
not in the matrix, the keyboard is locked and the Input Inhibited What Number symbol
is displayed. The contents of the printer status field are displayed for the inputinhibited condition, the cursor appears, and the keyboard is locked. The operator
must reset and then retry the print ID sequence.
If the selected print class or printer is valid and authorized for this display, the
connection indicator will change to indicate the new connection, and print ID mode is
tenninated. The cursor reappears, and the keyboard remains unlocked.
When in print ID mode, the following rules apply:
1. Numeric information is displayed at the "nn" position in the indicator row. Each
character is then checked for validity.
2. The RESET key and other keys or functions that cause a reset operate normally
and cause print ID mode to be terminated. The cursor reappears, and the contents of the printer status field are displayed.
3. The ATTN and DEV CNCL keys, the security key, and unsolicited host read and
write operations operate normally in the 3276, except that the 3276 print ID mode
is terminated when the Start Print bit in the WCC of the host write command is
on. The cursor reappears, and the contents of the printer status field are displayed in the indicator row.
2-16
~
4. Other keys that function during a keyboard inlubit condition also function while
in print ID mode without causing tennination.
S. All other keys that are not honored during keyboard inhibit conditions cause the
Input Inhibit-What symbol to be displayed and tenninate print ID mode. In this
case, the cursor reappears and the contents of the printer status field are displayed in the indicator row.
Dead Keys, CalUldilln-French Keyboards
When pressed, the accent keys which show individual accents on the Canadian-French
keyboards appear on the display, but the cursor does not move. These accent keys
are referred to as dead keys. A subsequent character which receives the accent must
be keyed next. If the subsequent character is valid, a unique composite character is
fonned. Refer to the 3270 Character Set Reference manual, GA27-2837, for keyboard
layouts, I/O codes, and identification of valid accent characters.
Pressing an accent key places the keyboard in dead key mode until a valid second
key is pressed. When the second character of a dead key sequence is invalid, only
the Shift, DEV CNCL, ALT, Click, ALT CURSR keys, and the Dual Case/Mono Case
switch and security key are operational. Use of ATIN in this case causes the Input
Inhibited Minus symbol to appear. Use of any other key terminates the operation and
causes an Input Inhibited Accent Plus What symbol to appear on the screen.
The selector light pen and the magnetic slot reader (MSR) do not function while in a
dead key sequence. If used, they cause the dead key sequence to be aborted, and
the keyboard is inhibited, with the What symbol displayed.
All other nonkeyboard-related functions that occur during a dead key sequence are
perfonned nonnally. If perfonnance of the function causes the dead key sequence to
be aborted, the keyboard is inhibited and the What symbol is displayed after the
function has been perfonned.
In all of these conditions, the dead key sequence is aborted, and an accent only is
displayed at the cursor position. The operator must reset and rekey both the accent
and the valid character.
Numeric Lock Feature Operation
When the Numeric Lock feature is installed, the character (0-9), decimal sign, minus
sign (-), and DUP may be entered by the operator in a field identified in the fieldattribute byte as numeric and unprotected. MSR input is also accepted. Operating
any other key that can enter a displayable character causes an input-inhibited
I condition. In addition, the NUM symbol lights on the 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 displays. Operating the RESET key enables the keyboard (if disabled), and the NUM symbol
I (3178,3276,3278,3279) goes out. The nondisplay/nonprint attribute bits 4 and 5 and
MDT bit 7 operate normally.
I For 3178, Numeric Lock is a basic function.
The Numeric Lock feature can be overridden as follows:
1. On a data-entry keyboard, any character can be entered by pressing (and holding) the Numeric Shift key or the Alpha Key, depending upon the character to
be keyed, and then pressing the desired key(s).
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-17
2. On a typewriter keyboard, any uppercase character or symbol can be entered by
pressing (and holding) the Shift key and then pressing the desired key(s).
3. On an APL or a text keyboard, any non-APL or non-Text uppercase character
or symbol can be entered by pressing (and holding) the shift key and then
pressing the desired key(s); also, any APL or Text uppercase or ALT-Shift
character can be entered by placing the keyboard in APL mode or text mode
(pressing APL ON/OFF with ALT or TEST ON/OFF with ALT), pressing (and
holding) the Shift key or the ALT key (depending upon the character to be
keyed), and then pressing the desired key(s).
Note: If any devices with attribute-select or overlay keyboards are attached to a
control unit, numeric lock for those keyboards is set by an option taken during
customizing. The option taken applies to aU devices with attribute-select and overlay
keyboards; if numeric lock is set off, all these devices have numeric lock off.
Keyboard Disabled (Do Not Enter Condition)
When the Do Not Enter (X symbol) condition is indicated in the Operator Infonnation
Area, the keyboard and other input devices are disabled. In cases caused by operator
key action, the input-inhibited condition can be cleared by using the RESET key
unless one of the following Do Not Enter indications is present:
)( c-c{(.:
)(
O-Cl{(.:'~:(.:
)( {O
)(~
)(<>...
Do Not Enter is turned on by:
1. Operation of a Program Attention key.
2. A selector-1ight-pen attention that caused an I/O interruption or that resulted in
an operator error.
3. A magnetic slot reader (MSR) that caused an I/O interruption.
4. Turning the security key to the off position when the Security Keylock feature
is installed, when power is applied initially.
S. A system-initiated I/O op~ration addressed to that unit.
6. Operation of any alphameric key or of the DUP, FIELD MARK, ERASE EOF, or
DEL key, when the cursor is in a protected field.
7. Operation of any alphameric key not included in the numeric key grouping when
the cursor is in a numeric field, without simultaneously operating either the Alpha
or Numeric shift key on a data entry keyboard or the Shift key on a typewriter
keyboard, when the Numeric Lock feature is installed on a keyboard.
2-18
8. Copying of data in the refresh buffer to another tenninal.
9. The occurrence of a Machine Check, Program Check, or Communications Check.
10. The terminal's being in receive state under SNA protocol.
Do Not Enter is turned off by:
1.
I 2.
On 3178, 3276,3278, and 3279 displays: Receipt and execution of a WCC with the
Keyboard Restore bit on when the System Lock or Time symbol is displayed.
On 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 displays: Receipt and execution of an Erase All
Unprotected command when the System Lock or Time symbol is displayed.
3.
Turning of the security key to the on position (if the Do Not Enter indicator
was turned on because the security key was in the off position).
4.
Operation of the RESET (except as noted under "Reset Key"), TEST, or SYS
REQ key in BSe operation.
5.
Depression of the DEV C~CL key after receipt of a Printer Not Working symbol.
6.
Tennination of a Time condition.
An 1/0 operation that leaves the 3276 in a send state but does not unlock the keyboard
can be cleared by using the RESET key on the 3178-, 3276-, 3278-, or 3279- attached
keyboards. When the Do Not Enter condition, INPUT INHIBITED, exists on a 3276,
3278, or 3279 display, manual input to the unit from the keyboard or selector light pen
is inhibited, except for use of the Shift, ALT CURSR, CURSR BLINK, and Click keys.
Do Not Enter is cleared by a reset action from the control unit or the operator.
During a buffer transfer when the 3276 is executing a Copy command in BSC,
keystrokes are accepted for processing. The 3276 will queue at least two keystrokes
and will process the input, if the queue is not exceeded, after the poll sequence to
the keyboard is restored.
If the queue capacity is exceeded, all queued keystrokes are discarded, and the What
symbol is displayed. The What symbol is also indicated if input is attempted during
Time Symbol conditions or during Print Busy or Printer Not Working input-inhibited
conditions.
If the input-inhibited condition is caused by a Machine Check, only an operator reset
action can reset the device (if it can be reset). Only an operator reset action will reset
a device that shows a Communication or Program Check condition. The Communications
Check inhibit symbol does not reappear unless it is reencountered by pressing a host
communication key on the display keyboard.
~,
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-19
Selector-Light-Pen Operations
The selector light pen, shown in Figure 2-6, is a light-sensitive pen that can detect
the light emitted from characters displayed on the 3276, 3278, or 3279 displays_ With
the selector light pen, the operator can select from a list or table of displayed items
and can then cause those selections to be identified to the application program_
The selector light pen is operated by pressing the tip of the pen against the screen
on fields progranuned for selector-light-pen operations_
Figure 2-6. Selector Light Pcn
Selector-Light-Pen Field Format
A field that is to be used for selector-light-pen operations must be defined in the
following format :
2-20
SPD
(Selector Pen
Detectable)
Field
Data
Character
Preceding field (on the same line
as the SPD field).
3 Space
or Null
Characters
Three space or null characters
must precede the fieid-itttribute
character defining the SPD field
unless the attribute character is
the first character on the line.
.Field
Attribute
Character
The field-attribute character
defines the field as displayed
and selector-light-pen-detectable.
(An SPD field may be protected
or unprotected, alphameric or
numeric.)
Designator
Character
The designator character which
defines the type of operation
that will be performed by
detection on this field.
Displayed
Data
One or more displayed alphameric characters for sensing
by the selector light pen.
Three space or null characters
are required when a new field
follows on the same line as the
SPD field.
Field
Attribute
Character
Succeeding field (on the same
line as the SPD field).
Data
Character
The field-attribute character, the designator character, and displayed alphameric
characters must be on the same line. If the field extends beyond one line, only those
characters on the same line as the attribute character can be detected by the selectorlight-pen. A maximum of 12 detectable fields in the 3276 may precede the last detectable
field on any given line.
Designator Characters
Designator characters are used to defme two types of selector light pen fields: selection
fields and attention fields. Each type of field performs a different selector-light-pen
operation.
The selection field is defmed by a question mark (1) designator character. When the
selector light pen detects on a selection field, the MDT bit in the field-attribute
character for that field is set (1) in the display buffer. Also, the designator character
is automatically changed on the screen to a greater than (» sign to provide a visible
indication to the operator that the detection was successful. If a mistake was made and
the operator again detects on that same field, the> changes to a ? and the MDT bit
for that field is reset (0).
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-21
The attention field is defmed by a space or null designator character. A detection on
art attention field causes an I/O pending (attention) at the display. This I/O pending
indicates to the program that the selector-light-pen operation has been completed.
The program may then issue a Read Modified command to obtain the address of each
field that was selected or modified by the operator.
A second type of attention field for the 3276 is defined by an ampersand (&) designator character. A selector-light-pen detection on a field containing an ampersand
designator sets the MDT bit and causes an ENTER key I/O pending condition at the
3276. The display responds to a poll or Read Modified command, and both the address
and the data in each field that was modified by the operator are returned to the
application program:
Programming Notes:
1. The application programmer should be aware that both normal intensity and highintensity unprotected fields can be modified by the display station operator to
become selector-light-pen-detectable fields.
2.
Use of the Selector Light Pen feature without the ampersand (&) designator character is anticipated to be such that the program will correlate the address of
each SPD field with the data associated with it. Therefore, to minimize TP line
loading, channel loading, and buffer size requirements, only the addresses of
selector-light-pen-detected fields are required to be sent to the application program; the field data is not included.
3.
Users who wish to combine selector-light-pen-detect input with keyboard input
must use the keyboard or the ampersand designator character to generate the I/O
pending. Use of the selector light pen on a space or null designator field or on
an attention field to generate the I/O pending will result in transmission of only
the addresses of the fields in which the MDT bit was set.
Figure 2-7 shows a sample display with fields defmed for selector-light-pen operation.
In this sample, "FULL", "SOMG", and "4 TIMES" are all preceded by> deSignator
characters to indicate that they were selected by the operator. When the operator
detects on the word "EXIT", which has no displayed designator character, an I/O
pending occurs and the program obtains the addresses of the three selected fields.
2-22
~
Figure 2-7. Sample Display Screen for Selector-Light-Pen Operations
Security Keylock
The Security Keylock is a security·enhancement special feature that provides a key·
controlled lock for 3276 display. When the key is in the "off' position or is removed
from the display station, the message buffer is "locked," which prevents entry, modifi·
cation, and display of data. The display station is unavailable to programmed read or
write operations and to operator inputs such as keyboard entry, card reader entry,
and selector·light·pen operations.
Programmed attempts to access display stations that have the key turned off or removed
from the lock result in responses being returned to the CPU by the 3276 . 3276 res·
ponses are device· and operation·dependent. They are summarized in the following
table:
Device Attachment
Operation
Response
Specific Poll
IR Status and Sense
3276·1, ·2, ·3, -4 (Note 21
General Poll
Selection Addressing Sequence
EOT
RVI
3276·11, '12, ·13, ·14
Normal Flow Requests
IR (Negative Respon se 0802)
Notel:
t. Each operation in the Operation column applies to each corresponding unit in the Device
Attachment Column.
2. When the SDLCISSC Switch feature is installed and the switch is in the SDLC position,
the response 'rom the terminal with the key off to normal flow requests is IR
(neg resp OB02).
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-23
Magnetic Slot Reader
Figure 2·8. Magnetic Slot Reader (3276, 3278 , and 3279 Attachments)
Magnetic Slot Reader
or
3276 Control Un it
O"spl
I
·Y StafIon
Reads 10-character set
-
3278 or 3279
Color Display Station
3276 Control Unit
Display Station
Figure 2-9. Attachment of Magnetic Reading Devices to 3276 , 3278 , and 3279.
The magnetic slot reader (MSR) (see Figure 2-8), which is attached by cable to a 3276,
3278, or 3279 connected to a 3276 (see Figure 2-9), reads infonnation encoded on
magnetic-striped cards such as job tickets, operator ID badges, and both large and
small credit cards. The recorded infonnation is read from the stripe as the operator
passes the card through the slot of the reader. The data is written into the display
buffer at the location specified by the cursor, but is not displayed on the screen.
If the device supports the Structured Field and Attribute Processing option, the
Extended Attribute Buffer (EAB) is updated. After the infonnation is read, an I/ O
pending is generated at the display to infonn the program that the data can be
retrieved and transferred to main storage .
2-24
Bit Pattern
Character
I
Data
Contrm {
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(Special· See Note 1 )
55, or ASS
EOI (Note 21
Field Separator
(Unassigned)
ES (Note 3)
Direction of
Recording
20
2'
22
23
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
,
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
,
,
,
•
1/0 Interface Code (Note 4)
P
Hex
Code
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
8
C
0
E
F
EBCDIC
ASCII
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
Note:
t.
This character is reserved for operator identification only and must be located in the fint data character pO$ition.
2. MSR: SS (Start Sentinel); RSS (Revene Start Sentinel).
3. EOI (End of Inquiry) is treated Blan error by the MSR (3276,3278, and 3279 displays). The card Is rejected, and the MSR red
light is turned on.
4. MSR: ES (End Sentinel).
5. Programmers use only the four leBlt-significant bits of the I/O interface code.
Figure 2-10. IO-Character Set Used with Magnetic Slot Reader
With the 10-character set shown in Figure 2-10, the maximum number of characters
that can be read is:
• 40 characters at 3 bits per millimeter (75 bits per inch) and at 8.3 bits per
millimeter (210 bits per inch)
• 100 characters at 5 bits per millimeter (128 bits per inch)
Note: A minimum of seven chtuacters must be encoded between the Start Sentinel and
End Sentinel Characters.
The 10-character set may be used to log on and log off in SNA mode (LU-LU session
only; not SSCP-LU session) or in a non-SNA mode.
lO-Character Set
The 10-character set shown in Figure 2-10 comprises 10 numeric characters plus a
Field Separator and control characters. Each character is composed of a 4-bit pattern
plus an odd-parity bit. This bit pattern is recorded with the low-order bit recorded
first. A longitudinal redundancy check (LRC) character is placed at the end and is
protected by an odd-parity bit of its own.
Characters are recorded, low-order bit first, beginning at the left-hand side of the
magnetic stripe when the stripe is at the bottom of the card or badge as you face the
magnetic material. The characters are read in one direction only.
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-25
Magnetic-Strlpe Format
The fonnat used on the magnetic stripe is in the sequence shown in Figure 2-11.
When the SS character is read from the magnetic stripe, a field-attribute character is
entered automatically into the cursor-identified location of the buffer (provided the
cursor is at an unprotected character location). This attribute character defmes the
following data field as protected, alphameric, and nondisplay or nonprint. As the data
characters are read into the buffer, they are stored starting at the first character
location after the field-attribute character. As each data character is stored in the
buffer, the cursor advances one buffer location. The cursor advancement is all the
operator sees on the display screen when using the operator identification card reader.
When the operator uses the magnetic slot reader, the cursor does not move as the card
is passed through the slot, but is repositioned after the card has been read.
ss
MSR: Start Sentinel (SS) character (hex B).
Data
Characters
~:
:~
Characters
seen by
application
program
MSR: 7 to 100 data characters as shown in Figure 2-10.
ES
MSR: End Sentinel (ES) character (hex F).
LRC
An LRC character that may be used by the program for
comparison in a parity check.
RSS
MSR only: Reverse Start Sentinel (RSS) character (hex B).
Figure 2-11. Magnetic-8tripe Format (MSR Using IO-Character Set)
Operational Differences because of Screen Format
When the 10-character set of Figure 2-10 is being used with the magnetic slot reader
(MSR), differences exist in the content of the data stream sent to the application
program, depending upon whether the display screen is unfonnatted or fonnatted.
When an unfonnatted screen (that is, a screen without attribute characters of fields)
is being used, the operation of the display results in an inbound data stream as shown
in Figure 2-12.
The reader operation fonnats the screen by the automatic generation of the fieldattribute character at the cursor position by the reader.
A fonnatted screen has at least one field-attribute character dermed at initial presentation. This may be the only field-attribute character, as in the instruction sequence
ENTER ID; or one or more attributes may be required, as, for example, in the instruction sequence NAME, TITLE, ID CARD READER.
2-26
o
I
FieldAttribute
Character
Generated by
Reader
or
Reader Data
(Nondisplay)
or
ENTER 10
I
cu!sor I
-ENTER 10
(See Note)
o
I
I FieldAttribute
Character
Generated by
Reader
r
I
Reader Data
(Nondisplay)
J
T
Display screen before reader
data is entered.
Display screen after reader data is entered.
Note: The ENTER 10 is not displayed because it;s within
a nondisplay field, defined by the resder attribute charllct"r.
m.
Protected field-attribute character
Inbound Data Stream
AID
--
Cursor
Address
SBA
Start of Data
Address
Data
-
I
Set to indicate input from a magnetic-stripe reading device.
}
Address of the cursor upon completion
of the reader operation.
I
Set Buffer Address.
I
I
Address of the first data character
following the field-attribute character.
The reader data followed by any additional information present in the display
buffer. The additional information can be initiated by the application program
as ENTER 10 (as shown in the example) or entered by the operator before the
reader operation is started.
Note that with an unformatted screen the reader data is the first text in the data
stream sent to the application program.
Figure 2·12. Operation of the Display with an Unfonnattecl Screen (MSR Using ItKharacter Set)
Chapter 2. Tenninals
2-27
The operations of the 3276, 3278, and 3279 with the MSR are identical when formatted
screens are used.
Two fields (new data field and previous data field), with the MDT bits set, are sent to
the application program, because the displays treat all infonnation from the reader as
data until after the infonnation is written into the display buffer. Also, the MDT bit is
set in the reader-generated field-attribute character that was initiated when the data
was entered.
The following examples are included to help clarify operation of the reader with a
fonnatted screen.
Example 1:
If the MSR field is set up by the application program as an unprotected field and
contains instruction information, the inbound data stream is as shown in Figure 2-13.
~
ENTER 10
GENTERID0
I
FieldAttribute
Character
Generated by
Reader
I
...
FieldAttribute
OIaracter
Generated by
Application
Program
Display screen before reader
data is entered.
I
Reader Data
(Nondisplay)
Display screen after reader data is entered.
Inbound Data Stream
AID
~
Cursor
Address
-
I
Set to indicate input from a magnetic-stripe
}
Address of the cursor upon completion of the
reader operation.
rea~ing
SBA
Set Buffer Address.
Start of
Data Address
Address of the unprotected (U) field-attribute
character + 1.
Data
ENTER 10, in the example above.
device.
~
o:
S.BA
Set Buffer Address.
Start of
Data Address
Address of the protected field·attributt;' character +1. In this
case, the address of the first data character from the reader
following the protected field-attribute character.
Data
I
:: Unprotected field-attribute character
Protected field-attribute character
The reader data (and any data between the cursor and the
next field-attribute character).
Figure 2-13. Operation of the Display with a Formatted Screen (Using lO-character Set), Example 1
2-28
Example 2:
When the MSR field is set up by the application program as an unprotected field, with
the cursor directly following an unprotected field-attribute character, the inbound data
stream is as shown in Figure 2-14.
~E~
FieldAttribute
Character
FieldAttribute
Character
5]
ENTER 10
Icu!sor I
FieldAttribute
Character
Generated by
Reader
Generated by
Application
Program
Reader Data
(Nondisplay)
Display screen after reader data is entered.
Display screen before reader
data is entered_
~
0~
=Unprotected field-attribute character
[!] =Protected field·attribute character
Note: Rules for positioning modified data on formatted screens apply.
The position of reader data in the inbound data stream depends on
the field pOSition in the fonnat
Inbound Data Stream
Set to indicate input from magnetic-stripe reading device.
AID
~
Cursor
Address
-
Address of cursor upon completion of reader operation.
SBA
Set Buffer Address.
Start of
Data Address
Adress of the unprotected (U) field-attribute character +1. In the example
above, it will be the address of the P2 field-attribute ct.aracter.
SBA
Set Buffer Address.
Start of
Data Address
Address of the P field-attribute character +1. In this case, the address of the
first data charac&r from the reader following the P field-attribute character.
2
The reader data (and any data between the cursor and the next field-attribute
character).
Data
I
Figure 2·14. Operation of the Display with a Fonnatted Screen (Using U)-character Set), Example 2
Chapter 2. Tenninals
2-29
MSR data will not be written into the display buffer if any of the following error conditions exist when the magnetic stripe is read:
• The SS (MSR) character is not successfully connected to a field-attribute in the
display buffer.
• The cursor is located in a protected field.
• The cursor is located in a field-attribute character location.
• The display is busy performing another operation.
MSR Validity Test
The proper use of the MSR as an identification and data-entry device requires that the
application program perform certain validity tests. The following guidelines are recommended for proper operation:
1. No field should be accepted as reader input unless the reader AID code is set.
2. For preformatted displays, the application program must know the location of the
field defmed to receive the reader- data and the exact location of the entered data,
based upon the hardware operation that was previously defmed. The use of the
cursor address present in the inbound data stream, in combination with the AID
byte to ensure reader input, is an additional technique that can be used to ensure
the integrity of the data. For unformatted displays, the reader data is always
presented as the frrst data entry in the input record to the application program.
3. For preformatted displays, it is advisable to terminate the reader data field with
another attribute byte.
4. Upon completion of the reader operation, the application program should check for
the presence of the ES character. Absence of this character means the reader data
has not been transferred successfully. This condition can occur under the following
error conditions:
a. The detection of a parity error in any data character in the ES character.
b. An interruption of normal data flow from the reader.
c. The cursor has been moved to a field-attribute character location. This means
the field defmed for reader input is too small or the cursor was not initially
positioned at the beginning of a correct-length field.
5. Upon completion of the reader operation and a successful check for the ES character, the LRC character may be used for a parity check to ensure integrity of the
data.
Because of the makeup of the IO-character set codes (4 bits plus parity bit), only
the right-hand 4 bits are of concern. The application program should set up a
I-byte field initialized to X'OB'. This is the SS character, which is not included
in the inbound data stream but which is used to compute the LRC. As each
character is checked for validity, it is exclusively ORed into this field. This
2-30
operation should include the ES character and the LRC, resulting in the byte
containing zero. If the byte is nonzero, it means the result of the check on the
data characters, including ES, does not equal the LRC, and a parity error has
occurred.
6.
If the reader input field is to be reused, the application program must remove the
hardware-generated field-attribute character and reader input data. The location
of this character can be derived from the inbound data stream by using one less
than the start of the data address preceding the input data. Additionally, the
cursor is located one position beyond the end of the reader data field.
The card field may be reused if more than one card input is required or if the
original attempt was unsuccessful and the application program desires to retry the
operation.
7.
Text for all fields having the MDT bit set is transferred to main storage when the
reader data is retrieved in response to the reader-generated I/O pending.
8.
The cursor must be moved out of the reader-generated field before further keyboard activity is allowed.
9.
A test card, PN1742659, is delivered with each 3276/3278/3279 Magnetic Reader
Control feature. The test card data placed in the display buffer is as follows:
0123456789987654321001234567F4
Care should be taken that the card is not accidentally auto-entered. The display
should be placed in test mode to avoid auto-entering magnetic-stripe infonnation to
the host.
MSR Operator Indicators and Alarm
The magnetic MSR contains three operator indicators and a buzzer. The indicators are
color-coded green, yellow, and red. When all indicators are off, power has not been
applied to the MSR.
Green Indicator On: Indicates that the MSR is ready to read a magnetic stripe. This
indicator is turned on when:
1.
The 3276, 3278, or 3279 is turned on.
2.
The 3276, 3278, or 3279 Test/Normal switch is operated.
3.
The MSR data is placed in the 3276, 3278, or 3279 display buffer.
The green indicator is turned off when the yellow or the red indicator is turned on.
At this time, the Time symbol is displayed in the Operator Information Area of the
screen until turned off by the host.
Yellow Indicator On: Indicates that MSR data is being processed. This indicator is
turned on when the magnetic stripe has been read successfully by the MSR hardware.
Subsequent read operations are ignored while the yellow indicator is on.
Chapter 2. Tenninals
2-31
The yellow indicator is turned off when either the red or the green indicator is turned
on.
Red Indicator On: Indicates that the MSR data is rejected. The red indicator is turned
on during an MSR red operation when:
1. Invalid magnetic-stripe infonnation (for example, invalid character, LRC error,
parity error) is detected by the MSR hardware.
2. The keyboard is already locked. The operator should check the symbols in the
display's Operator Infonnation Area and take the appropriate action. (See
Appendix A.)
3. An unsuccessful read operation is detected. The keyboard is locked.
The red indicator is turned off when the yellow indicator is turned on.
The buzzer on the MSR gives a short tone (one quarter second) when the green
indicator turns on and a longer tone (one second) when the red indicator turns on.
Printers
Printers for the 3276 Control Unit Display Station provide a printed copy ofinfonnatiort
that is displayed at a display station or of infonnation written from the program.
Printed data appears in the same alphameric characters and symbols that appear on a
display, and printouts can be fonnatted. Cursor infonnation is ignored by the printer.
The 3230 Model 2, 3262 Model 13, 3268 Models 2 and 2C, 3287 Models 1,2, IC, and
I 2C, the 3289 Models 1 and 2, and 5210 Models GOI and G02 can be attached to the 3276.
Print Line Formatting
Printout operations are specified by a Write command or a Copy command (the 3276
Models 1,2,3, and 4, using BSC only), addressed to the printer. The print line
fonnat in which the data is to be printed from the buffer can be specified as part of
the command in one of three printer fonnats. These fonnats define the print line length:
40, 64, or 80 character positions per line. If a fonnat is not specified, the print line
length is 132 character positions on all teoninal printers. Print line length can be set
to values less than 132 character positions by the operator on all teoninal printers.
I
When the 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279 Print key is used to initiate a printout, or when the
3276 SNA host copy operation described under "Local Copy Functions" is executed, the
print line length will be the same as that of the source display. Print line length fonnats
are specified below.
Operation
Command
Addressed
Tenninal
Fonnat
Specification
Host Write (except SCS)
BSC Host Copy
SNA Host Copy
Print Key
Write
Copy
Write
NA
Printer
Printer
Display
NA
WCC bits 2 and 3
CCC bits 2 and 3
Same as display
Same as display
The relationship between the printer buffer and a printout is shown in Figure 2-15.
2-32
)
)
480-Chorocter Storage
f
0
1
2
3
~
"""
~
i
•S
T
,
H
S
Space
I 1",.a.
- -S"
F
FIGURE ILLUSTRATES A 132-CHARACTER LINE PRINTOUT FROM A 480-CHARACTER BUFFER IN A 3284 OR 3286 PRINTER.
CONTAIN A MAXIMUM OF 3 FULL LINES OF PRINTING PLUS UP TO 84 CHARACTERS ON A FOURTH LINE.
COULD CONTAIN A MAXIMUM OF 14 LINES OF PRINT PLUS 72 CHARACTERS ON A 15TH LINE.
~
i
THAN THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN A BUFFER AND AN ASSOCIATED PRINTOUT.
~
."
...~
J2
"&
:w
J3
35
I
l
--- -~~
i
~
!
"0
~
I
N
W
W
C
0
N
T
I
r
)
--
..:75
..:7'
r!
.. ,..
.t'
4: r9
Space
Space
E
N
D
END
THE PRINTOUT COULD
THE PRINTOUT FROM A 1920-CHARACTER BUFFER
THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ANYTHING OTHER
Printer Orders
Printer orders are transferred as part of the data stream from the application program.
They are stored in the buffer as data.
Programming Note: Devices without the Extended Character Set Adapter (ECSA) feature
support 182 characters in the base character set, while devices with the ECSA feature
support 191 characters in the base character set. If characters from the 191-character
set that are not supported by the 182-character set are directed to a device without
the ECSA feature, then that device may interpret certain of these unsupported characters as control codes.
New Line (NL) and End of Message (EM) (All Printers)
The NL order is executed only when encountered during an unfonnatted printout, that
is, a printout that does not have a line-length fonnat specified. When an NL order is
encountered in the buffer, the printer perfonns a new line function. If no NL order
is encountered before the printer reaches the end of a line (as detennined by the
maximum print position), the printer automatically perfonns a new line function and
continues printing. If an NL order is encountered at one character position past the
maximum print position, 3230 and 3287 printers will perform two new line functions;
the 3262,3268,3289, and 5210 printers will perform one new line function.
I
The NL order is not executed when located in a nondisplay/nonprint field; it is treated
as an alphameric character and printed as a space. In addition, the NL order is not
executed when encountered during fonnatted printout. Instead, it is printed by the
terminal printers attached to 3276s as a space character.
For buffered printer operation (described under "Buffer Printer Operation") the EM
order is executed only when encountered during an unformatted printout. The EM
order is not executed when located in a nondisplay/nonprint field; it is treated as
an alphameric character and printed as a space. In addition, the EM order is not
executed when encountered during a formatted printout. Instead, it is printed by the
terminal printers attached to 3276s as a space character.
Fonns Feed (FF) (All Printers)
Valid Forms Feed (FF) orders are executed by the terminal printers during either
formatted or unformatted printouts. (The FF order is described under "Page
Length Control.") When a valid FF order is encountered in the first print position
of a line, the print form indexes to a predetermined print line on the next form.
Carriage Return (CR) (All Printers)
When the Carriage Return (CR) order code is found in the data stream, the next print
position will be the leftmost character position on the current print line. CR orders
are not executed when they occur in nonprint fields and when the printout is fonnatted
(printer fonnat bits in the WCC indicate a line length). In both cases, the CR order
is printed as a space character.
2-34
Buffered Printer Operations
When a command specifying a printout is received from the system, the contents of the
addressed printer are transferred to the 3276 control unit buffer. If the WCC Start
Print bit is set to 1, the printout starts after the control-unit-to-printer-buffer
transfer is completed.
During a formatted print operation, data characters in the printer buffer are scanned
one line at a time before they are printed. A line feed is executed after each line is
printed. If a line contains one or more space characters only, a line feed is performed
to cause a blank line in the printout. When null characters, attribute characters, or
alphameric characters in nonprint field are encountered, they are treated as follows:
• If embedded in a print line, they are printed as spaces.
• If they constitute an entire line, they are ignored and the line feed is not performed; as a result, a blank line does not appear in the printout, and the data is
compressed vertically one line.
During an unformatted operation, printout of the buffer data begins at buffer location
oand continues until the last position of the buffer is printed or until a valid EM
character is encountered. Each print line is left-justified. At the end of each printout,
a fmalline feed is executed so that the printer is ready to start the next printout.
When the print-terminating EM order appears in the first print position of the print
line, a fmalline feed is not executed because the printer is already positioned at the
left margin for the next printout.
Page Length Control Operations
The ability to index forms vertically under program control to a predetermined print line
is provided by the Page Length Control function for the terminal printers, except the
3289 printer.
When a valid Forms Feed (FF) order is encountered in the buffer during a printout,
the form skips to a predetermined line. Printing begins on the predetermined line; the
fust print position, the buffer location containing the FF character, is printed as a
space character. Printing and skipping continue until the printout is terminated. The
printer is "busy" while printing and skipping.
There is no limit on the number of FF orders that can be included in the printer buffer
or on the frequency of their occurrence. However, for an FF order to be considered
valid and thus initiate skipping, FF characters must be placed in buffer locations
corresponding to the fust position of a print line in a field designated either print or
nonprint. This can be accomplished by placing the FF character (1) in the first
character after the wee in a write, erase/write, or erase/write alternate data stream
to the printer (2) after a valid NL or CR order.
When an FF character is placed in the fust character position of any print line (for
example, in character position 41 in a buffer with a printout format of 40 characters
per line specified, or in character position 133 in a buffer for an unformatted printout),
the form skips to line 1, position 2.
,r-"'\
An FF order in any other position (than the above) in the printer buffer is considered
invalid; the skip operation is not executed, and the FF character prints as a space
character on all terminal printers, except when the FF order is located in a non print
field.
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-35
During a print operation, if a valid FF order is encountered when the form is located
at the predetermined skip stop line (the first print line of each form) of a terminal
printer, the terminal printer will not skip a blank form.
Programming Note: Placing the FF order at the end of a print buffer is not recommended. When a valid FF order is placed at the end of a print buffer and is followed
by an EM order, the terminal printers will stop printing and skip to line
2 of the next form.
Before beginning Page Length Control operations, forms must be loaded in the printer
and aligned to the print line where skipping should stop and printing begin. If the
forms are not aligned properly while initially being loaded, all forms will be misaligned.
The two Selector switches must be set to the num~er corresponding to the total number
of print lines from one skip stop line to the next for each Page Length Control application. There can be up to 99 lines between successive skip stop lines. When uniform
length forms are used, the setting for the switches is computed by multiplying the
forms length in inches by the lines-per-inch setting, 6 or 8 lines per inch for all
terminal printers.
Programming Notes:
1. If an NL order and an FF order appear on the last line of a terminal printer's
printout, subsequent printing will begin on a new form.
2. The value of the Page Length switch (Selector switch on 3287) when power is
turned on or when the Form Feed switch is pressed, is interpreted as the
operator-selected MPL value. (For 3289, pressing the Form Feed switch does
not initialize the MPL value to the Selector switch value.)
SNA Character String (All Printers)
The SNA Character String (SCS) control codes provide printed page format control.
They also can set modes of operation, defme data to be used in a unique way, and
allow communication between a terminal operator and an application program.
The SCS data stream consists of a sequential string of control and data characters.
Note: To ensure format integrity, any change in print format control must be followed
by the appropriate synchronizing event (CR, NL, FF, etc.).
SCS Control Codes
SCS control codes are honored by the terminal printers when operating as LU
type 1 attached to the 3276. The terminal printers using SCS support can
perform a variety of page-editing functions. These are the SCS control codes and
their defmitions:
2-36
Code
EBCDIC (hex)
BS
BEL
CR
ENP
FF
HT
INP
IRS
LF
NL
SHF
SLD
SVF
TRN
VCS
VT
16
2F
OD
14
OC
05
24
1E
25
15
2BC1
2BC6
2BC2
35
04XX
OB
Nama
Back Space
Bell Function
Carriage Return
Enable Presentation
Forms Feed
Horizontal Tab
Inhibit Presentation
Interchange-Record Separator
Line Feed
New Line
Set Horizontal Fonnat
Set Line Density
Set Vertical Format
Transparent
Vertical Channel Select
Vertical Tab
Back Space (BS) - a format control that moves the print position horizontally one
position to the left. If the print position is at column 1, the function is inoperative.
Left margin settings are ignored.
Carriage Return (CR) - a format control that moves the print pOSition horizontally to
the left margin on the same line. If the print position is already at the left margin,
the function is inoperative.
Enable Presentation (ENP) - a. formatting control character used to enable the printing
of keyboard input data on the presentation space. This code performs no function on
the LU type 1 device, but it is accepted without error response and without affecting
format.
Form Feed (FF) - a format control that moves the print position to the top and left
margin of the next form. If the maximum presentation line (MPL) value has not been
set and there is no default value, the MPL defaults to 1, and the print position moves
to the left margin of the next line.
Horizontal Tab (BT) - a format control that moves the print position horizontally to
the next tab stop setting. Horizontal tab stop values are set by using the Set Horizontal
Format (SHF) function. If there are no horizontal tab stops set to the right of the
current print position, the horizontal tab function results in a space.
Programming Note: Horizontal tab placed after the MPP will cause a space in the first
print position on the next line.
Inhibit Presentation (INP) - a format control character used to inhibit the printing of
keyboard input data. This code performs no function on the LU type 1 device, but it
is accepted without error response and without affecting format.
Inter-Record Separator (IRS) - a separator character, normally used on the LU-SSCP
session. If received on an LU-LU session, the IRS defaults to a New Line (NL)
function.
I~
Chapter 2. Tenninals
2-37
Line Feed (LF) - a format control that moves the print position vertically down to the
next line.
New Line (New Line) - a format control that moves the print position to the left margin
and vertically down to the next line. NL is functionally equivalent to CR followed by
LF.
Set Horizontal Fonnat (SHF) - a data-defining control used to set the horizontal format
controls. These include left and right margins and horizontal tab stops. A I-byte
binary count follows the SHF code that indicates the number of bytes to the end of
the SHF string, including the count byte. The first 3 bytes following the count byte
define the maximum presentation position (MPP), the left margin (LM), and the right
margin (RM), respectively. Tab stop settings follow the right margin position. All
values are expressed as I-byte binary numbers.
The minimum SHF sequence is I-byte length, which sets the horizontal format controls
to their default conditions. The SHF sequence is:
(SHF)(cnt)(MPPXLMXRM)(TI)(T2)..• (Tn)
This value is used to define a line length less than, or equal to, the maximum print
position. The MPP default value is the maximum print position (132) or the value set
up by the printer operator.
Programming Note: If the MPP is set to a value greater than the physical page width,
data may be lost (for example, printing on the platen or print head jams at the right
margin).
LM specifies the column value of the leftmost print position. The LM also serves as
the fust horizontal tab stop. Valid LM values are less than, or equal to, the MPP.
The LM default values is 1.
RM is not used in printing operations.
Tl ... (Tn) are horizontal tab stop settings. The tab stops do not have to be in order.
Valid tab stop values are equal to or less than MPP.
Set Line Density (SLD) - specifies the distance to be moved for single-line vertical
spacing, as in LF or NL. This function changes values that were preViously set during
printer initialization or by pressing the Change LPI switch (6LPI/8LPI switch for
3289) on the operator panel. The SLD code (X'2BC6') is followed by a one-byte count
(CNT) and a one-byte line density parameter (LPI) as follows:
2BC6CNTLPI
CNT = the number of bytes following the SLD code (01 or 02), including the count
itself. If the value is not 01 or 02, an "invalid parameter" response is
generated. Printing terminates immediately.
LPI = the line density parameter that specifies the distance (measured in lines per inch)
to be moved for single-line vertical spacing (one inch equals 25.4 mm).
2-38
Acceptable values are:
2BC60218
2BC60212
2BC6020C
2BC60209
2BC60200
2BC601
= 3lpi
= 4lpi
= 6 lpi
= 8 lpi
= default to 6 lpi
= default to 6 lpi (3287, 3289), or to operator panel setting
of6 or 8lpi (3230,3262,3268,5210)
Programming Note: If the SLD is changed without a corresponding change in the MPL
I (and vice versa), printing may occur on the fonn fold, or the MPL may be defaulted.
Density values not implemented are rejected with a negative response of X'l 005'
parameter error.
Set Vertical Format (SVF) - sets vertical format controls, including the maximum presentation line (MPL), top margin (TM), bottom margin (BM), and vertical tab stops.
A I-byte count field follows the SVF character to indicate the nwnber of bytes,
including the count byte, in the SVF string.
The fust three values follOwing the count in an SVF string are the maximwn presentation line, the top margin, and the bottom margin, in that order. A zero for any of
these values results in the function asswning the default value. Vertical tab stop values
follow the bottom margin. All values are expressed as I-byte binary nwnbers.
Chapter 2. TermiDaIs
2-39
The SVF sequence is:
(SVFXcnt)(MPL)(TM)(RM)(Tl)(T2)... (Tn)
I
I
MPL defines the page depth. All values between 0 and 102 (3287),0 and 127 (3230/
3262/326"8/3289), and 0 and 255 (5210) are valid. A page depth defmed by the SVF
takes precede!lce over the device default value. The MPL default value for the 3287 is 1;
the MPL default value for the 3230, 3262, 3268, and 3289 is 1 or the contents of the
Selector switch. If the Selector switch is set to 00 and power is turned on, the MPL
defaults to 1; if the Selector switch is set to 00 and the Reset switch is pressed, the MPL
remains unchanged. For the 5210, the MPL defaults to 66.
"-
Programming Note: If the MPL is set to a value greater than the physical page length,
printing may occur on the form fold.
TM specifies the line value used as the top representation line on the page. The top
margin is also the frrst vertical tab stop. Valid TMs are equal to, or less than, MPL.
The default TM value is 1.
Programming Note: After the TM is initialized, the TM should not be changed, because
a TM change requires operator intervention to align the physical page. The printer
cannot detect physical line 1; therefore, it is assumed the operator has aligned physical
line 1 to the printer's logical line 1. If a printer must be used ~ an intermixed SCSI
non-SCS environment, th~ operator should always set the physical page line 1 at the
frrst line to be printed and should always set the TM to a value of 1.
TM may be changed on the 5210. When forms are initially loaded, they are aligned to
the form fold. The 5210 automatically indexes to the TM upon receipt of the first non25 control after having executed a form feed.
BM specifies the line value that, if exceeded, causes an automatic skip to a new page.
BM must be greater than, or equal to, TM, and less than, or equal to, the MPL. The
default BM value is the MPL value.
Transparent (TRN) - a data-defmition character, which provides for the transmission
of data in transparent mode. A I-byte binary value follows the TRN code which
specifies the number of bytes of transparent data to follow. The length does not include
the length byte. Transparent data is user-defmed and is not scanned for SCS control
codes. As each data byte is interpreted, the print mechanism moves one character position. Valid graphics are printed. Invalid graphics are printed as hyphens (-).
Vertical Channel Select (VCS) - a device control code that allows selection of one of
12 vertical channels to control vertical format. The frrst character of the code is the
select code, followed by a function value which selects the appropriate channel.
Vertical Tab (VT) - a format control that moves the print position vertically down to
the next vertical tab stop setting. Vertical tab stops are set by using the Set- Vertical
Format (SVF) function. If there are no vertical tab stops below the current print
position, the vertical tab function results in an LF function.
Grapbic Escape (GE) - a character selection code that immediately precedes a codepoint.
It is used to indicate that the character to be displayed or printed is to be selected
from the character set stoted in ROS 1. (The base character set for the machine is
stored in ROS 0.)
2-40
I
Note: The 5210 does not support GE and prints a hyphen in its place. The codepoint
interpreted as an SCS control or graphic.
~
Program Attention (PA) and Cancel Print Switches
The PAl/pA2 and Cancel Print switches are provided when SCS is installed on terminal
printers attached to the 3276. (SCS is a specify feature for the 3287, and a standard
feature for other terminal printers.) These switches allow the operator to communicate
with the host system in SCS mode, and are used with the Hold Print/Enable Print switch.
Operator- or host-initiated operations can be performed.
CANCEL PRINT. The Cancel Print switch causes the printer to terminate the current
print operation. Portions of a chain which have not been passed to the printer are
purged by the control unit.
Cancel pf:int is meaningful when the printer is printing SCS data or waiting for the
next data in a chaining operation. If the Cancel Print switch is pressed and the printer
is not processing SCS print data, an invalid switch operation is indicated at the printer.
The control unit is not made aware of this condition.
PAl/pA2. The PAl/PA2 switch causes an attention to be sent to the control unit. The
status indicator on the printer will indicate acceptance of the code, and printing is
resumed if it was in progress prior to the PA switch sequence. The two-digit code is
then cleared from the status indicator.
The operator may then initiate another PA switch selection if the previous selection is
overwritten. PA switch information is not stacked within the subsystem.
The control unit of an SCS printer transmits the PA switch codes to the PLU as FM
data, as follows (note that there is a blank between APAK and the PA switch code
digits):
PASwitch
Text String Transmitted
1
2
APAKOI
APAK02
If the printer is not in SCS mode (for example, performing a local copy operation),
an invalid switch operation is indicated, and no PA switch sequence can be initiated.
Print Format Control
The format of the printed data is determined by the following parameters:
Maximum Print Position-MPP
Maximum Page Length-MPL
lines per Inch-LPI
Single/Double-space
Mono/Dual Case
The terminal printers, except 3287, allow the operator to change the machine default values
of these parameters. They can be set by the host or controller in SCS and non-SCS print
modes. See the terminal printer's Component Description for details.
When the 3287 is operating in SCS mode, the operatore can change the machine default
of only Single/Double-space. The default values are MPP =132, MPL =1, LPI =6, and
Mono/Dual Case = Dual.
Chapter 2. Terminals
241
Local Copy Function
In addition to processing the BSC Copy command in remote configurations, the 3276
Models 1, 2, 3, and 4 provide a local copy function which allows direct data transfer
from a display station to a printer(s) attached to the same 3276. The local copy
function is directed by a print-control matrix. The print-control matrix for the 3276
is called the default matrix.
The local copy function can be operator- or host-initiated. For operator-initiated copy,
I the Print key on a keyboard attached to a 3178, 3276, 3278, or 3279 may be used by
the operator to initiate a local copy request. The local copy request is serviced by a
printer selected under control of the print control matrix.
In SNA models, host-initiated local copy requests are initiated by issuing a write-type
command with the WCC Print Bit set to 1; that is, systems using 3276 Models 11, 12,
13, and 14. Printer selection and servicing of the local copy request proceed in much
the same way as for operator-initiated local copy requests.
Do not attempt to copy graphics dependent on more than one character position for
their presentation. If the graphic data is not completely contained within one character
position, the printout will be inaccurate because of the differing block matrix sizes and
dot densities between display and printer. Also, attempting to copy to a printer not
featured for Programmed Symbol operation, or not containing a matching symbol set
(with the one in the display station), results in default to the I/O interface character
set installed in the printer.
3276 Default Matrix
At the time the control unit is powered on, a reset is issued to each attached terminal.
As each terminal responds pOSitively, it is posted in the default matrix. The matrix
identifies each terminal in ascending order, by port. For example:
Port
Terminal
Assignment
0
D
02
1
D
02
2
P
X
3
P
X
456
D
D
P
06 06 X
7
P
X
Note: X = not applicable
Displays (D) are assigned the fust printer (P) occurring at a higher port number. In
this example, display terminals at ports 0 and 1 will be assigned the printer on port 2.
Display terminals on ports 4 and 5 are assigned the printer on port 6.
If power is off at a terminal when the control unit is powered on, nothing is posted
in the matrix for that terminal. Therefore, the control unit assumes that the device at
that port is a display. Power off at ports 1,4, or 5 does not alter the defmition of
the matrix in this example. Power off at ports 2 and 3 (prints) results in display
terminals at ports 0 and 1 being assigned to the printer at port 6.
If a terminal is powered off after it has been posted in the matrix, the terminal is
considered "not ready." The matrix is not altered. Thus, if the printer at port 2 is
powered off after being posted in the print matrix, a not-ready condition would be
signaled if a local copy operation is attempted by the displays at ports 0 or 1. However, by switching power on the 3276 off and on again, printer 2 is removed from
the default matrix, which then appears:
242
'-
Port
Terminal
Assignment
~
0
D
03
1
D
03
2
X
X
3
P
X
4
D
06
5
D
06
6
P
7
P
X
X
If a terminal is initially powered off, and then powers on some time after the control
unit has been powered on, the control unit is notified, and the matrix is updated. For
example, if the printer attached to port 6 was not powered on, the default matrix
appears as:
Port
Terminal
Assignment
0
D
02
1
D
02
2
P
3
P
X
X
4
D
07
5
D
07
6
X
X
7
P
X
Applying power to a printer at port 6 at a later time will change the assignments for
displays 4 and 5 to printer 6, as in the previous examples.
As configured in the fust example, the printers attached to ports 3 and 7 will not be
used for local copy from display stations. They are available for uninterrupted use by
the host for direct print and BSC Copy command operations. The printers on ports 2
and 6 may also be used by the host for direct print and BSC Copy command operations.
In this case, such operations may have to wait or be interrupted by execution of local
copy requests.
In 3271-compatible operations, host and local copy print requests are handled on a
fust-in, first-out basis; however, when using SNA protocol, local copy requests may
be executed only when the host printer session is "between brackets."
Printer Selection. The IDENT key on the keyboard of the 3276, or on the keyboard of
I the attached 3178/3278/3279 display station, may be used to change the printer ID
assigned by the default matrix as described under "IDENT Key" in Chapter 2. For
example, by using the ALT key, and keying IDENT 03 at the display attached to port
1, the default matrix becomes:
Port
Terminal
Assignment
0
D
02
1
2
D
P
03
X
3
P
X
4
D
06
5
D
06
6
P
7
p
X
X
By switching 3276 power off and on again, the original default matrix is restored.
3276 Local Copy Operation
Operator-Initiated Copy. The operator may initiate a local copy operation by pressing
the Print key on the display keyboard. The 3276 will then attempt to execute the local
copy function on the printer with ID shown in the "connect" indicator in the Operator
Information Area.
The Print key is active in an SNA environment under the following conditions:
1. No session has been established (prior to receipt of ACTLU, or after receipt of
DACTLU).
2. Session owner is "Unowned."
3. The terminal is in Test mode, and the keyboard is unlocked.
Chapter 2. Tenninals
243
4. Session owner is the SSCP, and the keyboard is unlocked.
5. Session owner is the PLU, the keyboard is unlocked, and the SLU is not in
receive state.
-..-
The Print key is active in a BSC environment whenever the Time symbol is not displayed.
If the printer is busy doing local copy operations for other displays, the Input Inhibited Printer Busy (short term) symbol is displayed. In SNA, if the printer is busy
because it is "in" brackets with a host application, or in BSC during a host write-type
operation, the Printer Very Busy (long term) symbol is displayed. In either case, the
request is queued, and the keyboard is locked until the copy can be performed or the
operator cancels the print request. The RESET key has no effect while a print request
is on the queue; however, the operator can cancel the local copy request by pressing
the DEV CNCL key. This turns off the Input Inhibited symbol, unlocks the keyboard,
and dequeues the print request. The operator is then free to perform another task.
In BSC, an operator-initiated local copy operation to a printer is not executed if the
printer has status pending from a previous host-directed print operation. General or
Specific polling will clear the printer status and free the printer for local copy usage.
If the printer is not functional because of an intervention-required or permanent-error
co~dition, then the Input Inhibited Printer Not Working symbol is displayed and the
keyboard is locked. The operator must depress the DEV CNCL key to continue. This
action turns off the Input Inhibited symbol and unlocks the keyboard. The print
request is not queued. The operator may then choose an alternative action. When the
Printer Not Working symbol has been turned on as a result of an operator-initiated
copy request, this symbol, and an associated Printer Failure symbol, if displayed,
will be turned off by receipt of any outbound FM data request.
If the operator attempts to print again, and the selected printer is still not operational,
the Input Inhibited Printer Not Working symbol reappears. Some operator action, for
example, loading paper in the printer, may be required to clear a not-functional condition. If no connection indicator is displayed and the Print key is depressed, the
Input Inhibited Operator Unauthorized symbol is displayed and the keyboard is locked.
The symbol remains on until the operator presses the RESET key.
When a valid printer is selected, and the display-to-printer buffer transfer begins,
the display keyboard is locked and the Input Inhibited Time symbol is displayed. This
symbol remains on and the keyboard remains locked until the buffer transfer is completed successfully.
If the printer stops during a local copy operation (out of paper, paper jam, etc. a data check on the printer does not fall in this category), the Printer Failure symbol
replaces the Printer Printing symbol and the print is terminated. The keyboard locks
and the Printer Not Working symbol is also displayed, calling the operator's attention
to the failure. The Printer Failure symbol specifies the failing printer. In this state,
the DEV CNCL key will remove both symbols from the display.
Operator-Unauthorized Condition. If the display cannot perform the copy operation
because the most-available printer does not have a large enough buffer, the operator
will be alerted by an inhibit condition with the Operator Unauthorized symbol. This
r-'\
may occur, for example, when the operator attempts to copy to a 1920-character b u f f e r '
printer from a 3440-character display.
244
Host Interference with Operator Copy (SNA). Once the display operator has initiated
a local copy operation, any outbound FM data request will be rejected with a busy
indication, X'OS2D', during the time that the operator request is queued or the buffer
is being transferred, and an outbound PM data request is received for the display.
Once the buffer transfer has been completed the display is free to receive outbound
FM data requests. If a negative response has been sent because of this condition, an
LUSTATofX'OOOlDOOO' will be sent at the completion of the buffer transfer to notify
the host that the busy condition no longer exists. FM data may be written into the
display buffer as soon as the buffer transfer is complete.
If the host is in session with the printer, the local copy operation will not change the
selected size of the printer buffer as set by the host session.
Host-Initiated Local Copy Using SNA/SDLC
The host application program may initiate a local copy function in an SNA environment
by sending to the display station a write-type command with the Start Print bit in the
wee turned on. (The copy function under SNA ignores wee bits 2 and 3.) The control
unit perfonns the local copy function as required, using the print class or printer
assigned to the display and displayed in the Operator Infonnation Area. When a writetype command is sent to the display with the Start Print bit on, the display flIst
interprets the orders and data in the write data stream and updates the display buffer.
During this time, the Input Inhibited Time symbol is displayed. Once the buffer write
is completed, the control unit attempts to use the printer(s) it assigned to the display.
The Time symbol remains on while the copy operation takes place. Once the buffer
transfer is completed, the Printer Printing symbol replaces the Printer Assignment
symbol. The Printer Printing symbol always shows the specific terminal address of the
printer actually doing the print operation.
The keyboard remains locked, regardless of keyboard Restore, until the print operation is completed. When the print operation is completed, the keyboard unlocks
according to the keyboard Restore in the wee. The Time symbol is removed, and the
Assignment symbol replaces the Printer Printing symbol.
To perfonn the host-initiated local copy described above, the host program must send
a write-type command with the Start Print bit turned on in the wee as an RQD chain
EB chain. Otherwise, the synchronization may be lost or the
or an RQE, eD,
request rejected with response X'OS43, .
Printer Busy Condition. If, after performing the display buffer update operation, the
control unit fmds that the connected printer or all printers in the selected print class
are busy with other local copy operations, the print request will be queued.
If the 3276 LU repeats a previous host-initiated copy request, and is waiting for
availability of a printer, further print requests will not be queued but are rejected.
On displays attached to a 3276, the keyboard remains locked and the Input Inhibited
Time symbol is replaced by the Input Inhibited Printer Busy (short tenn) symbol.
The operator may cancel the request by operating the DEV eNCL key. This will
dequeue the print request and replace the Printer Busy symbol with the Time symbol.
A negative response X'OS07', printer busy, is sent to the host. This allows the host to
take an alternative action.
Chapter 2. Terminals
2-45
Similarly, on a 3276, if the selected printer or all printers in the selected class are
found to be "in" brackets with the PLU, the copy operation is refused. After the write
operation is complete, the control unit will respond negatively to the print request
with X'0807', printer busy.
Once a print request has been refused with "printer busy," the SLU sends an LUSTAT
of '0001 BOOO' to the PLU when a printer becomes available. (Only one LUSTAT is returned per SLU, regardless of the number of times the PLU may have requested a
local print operation.)
The PLU may choose not to wait for the LUSTAT but to continue with other display
work. Even thou81\ the SLU is taken out of the ERP.1 state by the PLU, it is still
bound to send in the LUSTAT at the fust opportunity when the printer becomes
available.
After sending the LUSTAT 'OOOIBOOO', if obligated, the 3276 holds the printer until:
• It is released because a valid FM data request is received which does not specify
start print.
• It is released because of a Clear request; the session is unbound.
• The copy is completed after the PLU sends a write type command with the Start
Print bit turned on in the WCC.
• ·The copy fails and a negative response is returned to the host because of one of
the following:
- A permanent error in the printer is detected during printing.
- The display operator turns off the security keylock.
- The display operator turns off display power.
- Ownership of the display is changed to other than the PLU.
- A permanent error in the display is detected.
- A temporary error in a printer or display is detected.
- Intervention Required condition in a printer was detected.
Printer Not Assigned Condition. If a printer is not assigned to the SLU at the time the
printer is selected, the control unit responds to the write-type command with negative
response (0801) "printer not assigned."
"Printer not assigned" will also be sent to the PLU when a copy request is made, and
the selected printer cannot perform the copy because of a feature mismatch between
the display device and the printer.
In all cases mentioned above, once the negative response has been sent to the host,
.
the 3276 enters the receive state.
246
~
'
,
-----
Printer Not Functional Condition. If the most-available printer is not functional at the
time the printer is selected, the Printer Not Working symbol replaces the Time symbol.
The Write command is responded to with negative response (083E) intervention required,
or negative response (082F) permanent printer error. The display LU goes into the
ERP.I state as dermed for printer busy. When intervention-required is returned,
recovery may require operator action, e.g., loading forms. When the interventionrequired condition has been cleared, the control unit will generate an LUSTAT
000 1BOOO to the PLU in session with the display. After receiving the LUSTAT, the
PLU may reinitiate the copy request by sending a Write command with the Start Print
bit in the WCC and with no data.
.
If the operator operates the DEV CNCL key while the Printer Not Working symbol is
being displayed, the Printer Not Working symbol is replaced by the Time symbol.
If the PLU transmits any FM data request to the display and the Printer Not Working
symbol has not been cleared, the FM data request will remove the Printer Not Working
symbol and an associated Printer Failure symbol, if displayed, and may take the SLU
out of the ERP.l state.
No LUSTAT is required when 082F (permanent error) is sent as a response to the Write
command.
If the printer malfunctions during the print operation, both the Printer Not Working
and the Printer Failure symbols are displayed. The print operation terminates, and
the Write command is responded to with negative response (082E) or negative response
(082F). The keyboard remains locked and the system waits for some recovery action
as defined above.
Note that any FM data requests from the PLU will clear a Printer Not Working symbol.
This requires careful planning by an installation in the use of host- and operatorinitiated printing.
Local Copy Performed without SNA Protocol
In a BSC environment, host-initiated local copy is initiated through use of the Copy
command (remote only). The description of operator indicators under "Host-Initiated
Local Copy Using SNA/SDLC" does not apply to the Copy command. Operator-initiated
copy in a non-SNA subsystem is the same as dermed under "Operator-Initiated Copy."
When a printer or class of printers is in shared mode, the contention between host
and local copy use of the printer is resolved according to the follOWing procedure:
1. If, during processing of an operator-initiated copy operation, the host sends a
selection addressing sequence to the printer, the control unit will respond with
an RVI and will set Intervention Required. When the local copy queue no longer
exists and the printer becomes available, Device End (DE) is sent in response to
a poll (remote) or as asynchronous sense/status (local) to signal that the printer
is then available.
2. To provide security in systems that operate in a non-SNA environment, the printer
buffer is cleared after successful operator-initiated local copy operations are
completed. A read-buffer or read-modified operation will not return the contents
of a printer buffer just used in a local copy operation by another display operator.
Chapter 2. Terminals
247
3. A host program may use several messages to load a buffer with data to be printed
or for temporary data storage. Once the program initiates loading of the buffer,
operator-initiated local copy operations cannot be performed until print operation
is completed, or until there is a permanent error. An operator-initiated print
request via the Print key during this period is queued, and the Device Very
Busy symbol is displayed. The host system should issue an Erase/Write command
with the Start Print bit "on" to release the printer for local print operations.
4.
The host application program can use the printer when there are no operatorinitiated local copy requests outstanding. If it is required that the host have sole
ownership of the printer for data integrity or performance considerations, the
printer should be designated as a system mode printer in the printer authorization
matrix.
s.
If a host transmission to the display is received while an operator-initiated copy
request is queued, the host transmission will be accepted and written to the
display. No change will be made to the status of the operator-initiated copy. If
the copy is queued and buffer transfer has not taken place, the new screen will
be copied. If buffer transfer has started before arrival of the host transmission
to the display, the transfer will be completed before writing to the display. In
this case the old screen will be copied.
6. Each time the local copy queue is completed, a Device End will be transmitted to
the CPU by the 3276, thereby signaling that the printer is available. The printer
buffer is set to the default size after each copy queue is completed.
Mono/Dual Case Control
When power is applied, the 3287 is activated to print mono-case; other terminal printers
are automatically activated to print the dual-case character set.
In dual-case operation, the alphabetic character codes sent by the host determine
whether uppercase or lowercase characters are printed, provided that the print belt
has the dual-case character set. In mono-case operation, the lowercase alphabetic
character codes print equivalent uppercase characters.
The Change Case switch can be pressed to change the print case on the terminal printers.
However, when operating with LUI printers in SNA, the data character codes and the
print belt character set determine whether mono- or dual-case characters are printed,
regardless of the Change Case switch setting.
In a BSC environment, when using the Copy command to transfer data from a display
to a printer, the setting of the Change Case switch on the "from" display determines
mono- or dual-case in the "to" printer. When the Copy command transfers data from a
display or a printer to a display, the Change Case switch on-the "to" display determines
whether mono- or dual-case is displayed.
Format Control during Shared Printer Operations
When shared printers respond to uncoordinated print requests, control of the horizontal
and vertical print position format is governed by the operating mode(s) and the format
selected.
248
---
In BSC printer operations, sharing occurs on a buffer load basis, between local copy
requests and host-initiated printer output, by means of write-type or Copy commands.
When using SNA protocol, local copy requests for display buffer data originating from
an LU2 session may share a printer with either LU3 or LUI host output. Sharing of
LU2 and LU3 devices is comparable to BSC operation.
In BSC, and in SNA LU2 printer operations when performing local copy, the entire
buffer content, including nulls, attribute, and buffer control characters of a "from"
display or a "from" printer (non-SNA only), can be transferred to a printer buffer.
During formatted print operations, the data is scanned a line at a time. If a line
contains one or more data characters (including Space, NL, EM, and CR) in a display/
print field, the line is printed and a line feed is performed. To produce a blank line,
at least one Space character must be present.
A valid FF character is executed regardless of the attribute of the field, except for
the 3289-1 and ·2. The 3289-1 and -2 do not execute or print any characters in a
nonprint field, including the FF character. If the FF character is invalid, it is not
executed and prints as a blank in a field that is not defmed as nondisplay/nonprint.
If a line contains only nulls, attribute characters, or alphameric characters (including
Space, NL, EM, FF, or CR) in a nonprint/nondisplay field, no line is printed and no
line feed is performed. A screen facsimile can only be obtained by inserting at least
one space character in the blank lines.
In BSC, and in SNA LU3 printer operations when directly printing from the host, the
identical procedure is followed as described above once data has been loaded in the
buffer and the print operation is started. Thus, when a print operation is completed,
a line feed will have been automatically performed after printing of the last line (blank
or not). Therefore, the next buffer load of data, regardless of the source, starts
printing on the next line, ignores the previous horizontal position, and is contiguous
with the previous output except for blank lines as provided in either or both buffer
data.
A valid FF control character in the data at either the beginning or end of a form (one
or more buffer loads) ensures synchrOnization of the forms with the data. Interleaving
of a local copy operation within a host output print operation using VFC will usually
cause local copy to be printed on part of a completed form or cause at least one form
to be misprinted. This may best be avoided by configuring the printer in system mode,
thus excluding its use for local copy.
In BSC unformatted print operations, the completed print operation terminates at a
new line position. Thus, the next print operation is also contiguous with the previous
output except for possible blank lines as specified in the data. (SNA LU type I devices
do not perform unformatted printouts.)
When operating as an SNA LU type I device, an automatic LF, NL, etc., is not sent
at the end of a bracket or a session. Therefore, the print position may be one position
to the right of the last printed character. The fust printed line resulting from a local
copy operation performed with an LU2 device is printed on the line that is currently
available. Overprinting may occur if the fust line is not specified as a blank line.
When the local copy operation is completed, the LUI session resumes with a new bracket
at the horizontal print established by the preceding LUI bracket.
Chapter 2. Terminals
249
E",or Conditions
Four error conditions may be encountered at the printers. In each of the following
cases, when an error is detected, the program is notified.
Not Ready. A printer is defined as not ready when it is out of paper, its cover is
open, or it is mechanically disabled (unable to advance to its proper position). For
IS seconds, the mechanism will automatically attempt to recover. If the recovery
attempt is successful, the printer will return to the ready condition. If the recovery
attempt is not successful after IS seconds, the print~r Will become not ready, as
indicated by Intervention Required (IR) status.
A 3262 displays an error code in the status indicator. The operator may ~e able to
clear the error condition and continue printing.
If a printer (not the 3289) is not ready at the start of a printout, or if it becomes not
ready during a printout operation, the print operation tenninates. Error status is sent
to the channel once when the condition occurs during a printout and, then, again each
time a printout is initiated.
Parity Error. If a parity error is detected on a character about to be printed, an error
graphic (prx IOT,L) (3287) is printed in place of the character with incorrect parity.
The buffer continues printing until all printable characters have been printed. The
printer prints a graphic X. The isolated X character (specify feature on the 3287)
serVes to indicate the detection of the parity error.
An x (an X overprinted with an 0) prints in place of an incorrect character on all
other terminal printers. An x also prints in the left margin of the next line.
Command-chaining. In local operations, if any command is chained to a command that
initiates a print operation, an error condition occurs: no printout is performed, the
command is aborted, and the system channel is notified of the error. In remote
operations, if command chaining is attempted, error status is sent to the system
channel but the printout is completed.
2-50
---"
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSC
Introduction
The 3276 Control Unit Display Station Models 1, 2, 3, and 4 use Binary Synchronous
Communication (BSC) mode of operation and can communicate with the program via an
IBM 2701,2703,3704,3705, or an equivalent Integrated Communications Adapter
(hereafter called TeV ) and appr9priate data sets as specified for the control unit.
The 3276 uses BSC procedures over duplex or half-duplex facilities (nonswitched or
privately owned); these communications use the Multipoint Data Link mode of operation
only .
.Code Structures
The 3276 can operate with one or two code structures: EBCDIC (Extended Binary-Coded
Decimal Interchange Code) or ASCII (American National Standard Code for Information
Interchange). The choice of code depends on the application. However, for system
compatibility, the same code must be chosen for all units on a particular communications
line.
Channel Program Concepts
In remote configurations, the TCU becomes the intermediary between the 3276 and the
channel program. As such, the TCU, not the 3276, executes channel commands and
initiates I/O interrupts. At the start of each I/O operation involving the TCU, the
Start I/O instruction addresses the TCU and a communications line attached to that
TCU; it does not address an individual remote control unit on that line. Subsequent
CCWs in the channel program initiate TCU operations; they specify TCU commands,
not 3276 commands.
Selection of control unit and all subsequent command operations are specified by
character sequences in TCU Write CCW data streams. Write CCW data to the TCU
communications line selected by Start I/O can contain (1) address bytes to select a
control unit on that line, (2) the code of a command (such as Erase/Write or Write)
to initiate a control unit operation, or (3) orders and/or display/print data for the
control unit buffer. In addition, this write'data will contain the appropriate data-link
control characters. Thus, all characters sent by the TCU to a 3276, with the exception
of SYN, pad, and BCC characters, originate from the data stream of a Write CCW
addressed to the TCU.
Programming Note: All Write commands should be set for CCW chaining to a Read
command when a response is expected. This prevents a loss of data received by the
TCU in response to Write command operations. An exception to this requirement is
when the Write command is used to issue EOT to the 3276.
Text Blocking
The 3276 performs inbound text blocking. Each block of data can contain a maximum
of 256 text characters. Of that total, each block contains the STX and ETB (or ETX)
data link control characters. Two address bytes (CU poll address and device address)
precede the read heading in the rust block only and are included in the 256 character
total. The last block of a message is terminated with ETX, which is also included in
the 256 character total.
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSe
3-1
Programming Note: If the automatic polling facility (Auto Poll) is used by the TCU,
the Auto Poll index byte will add 1 byte to the text block created by the 3276.
Block check characters (BCC) are transmitted as the last characters of a data stream.
(See "Redundancy Checking.") BCe is not counted as text because it follows the ETX
and ETB data link characters. Upon successful comparison of the received BCC with
the accumulated BCC, the program should respond with ACK to read the next block
of text; each subsequent block is preceded by STX to initiate BCC accumulation by
the Teu.
Text blocking does not disjoin the 3·byte SBA order sequence (SBA code and 2·byte
field address) generated during execution of a Read Modified command. Therefore, the
last characters of a block ending with an SBA sequence would be ... SBA, Address,
Address, ETB (or ETX).
Related Publications
Readers who are unfamiliar with the binary synchronous method of communications
should review the following publications, as applicable:
• General Information - Binary Synchronous Communications, GA27-3004
• IBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit Component Description, GA22-6864 (especially the
section that describes the Synchronous Data Adapter - Type II)
• IBM 2703 Transmission Control Component Description, A27-2703 (especially the
section on BSC capabilities)
• Introduction to the IBM 3704 and 3705 Communications Controller, GA27-30S1
Multipoint (Nonswitched Line) Data link Control
The 3276 can operate on a nonswitched communications line with multiple stations.
Time-sharing of the line is accomplished by interleaving transmissions between the
TCU and all units on the line. A 3276 operates multidropped on the same line with
other properly featured units.
The TCU is the control station of the multipoint, centralized network. All units
attached by couununications lines to the TCU are called tributary stations. The control
station is the focal point of the network and maintains, under program control, an
orderly flow of network traffic by initiating all data transfers. The control station is
either the transmitter or receiver of every communication.
3276 Modes of Operation
In the multipoint environment, the 3276 is always in one of three modes of operation:
control mode, text mode, transparent-monitor mode. The 3276 does not provide transparent-mode.
.
3-2
Control Mode
The 3276 enters control mode whenever it transmits or receives a valid EOT sequence.
While in control mode, the unselected 3270 CU monitors the communications line for the
following:
1. A valid selection or poll addressing sequence, by which the 3276 will become selected
for entry into text mode.
2. A DLE-STX sequence, placing the 3276 in transparent-monitor mode.
Text Mode
Once a 3276 is successfully selected, it enters text mode. In text mode, the 3276 is
either a master station or a slave station, as is the TCU. This status depends on the
operation being performed. The station that is transmitting a message is called the
MASTER STATION, whereas the station that is receiving and acknowledging the
message is called the SLAVE STATION.
The 3276 becomes the master station (and the TCU the slave station) once it sends
STX to the TCU while executing a Read command or a poll operation. As the master
station, it can (l) transmit text messages and (2) transmit ENQ to request a reply
or retransmission from the TCU. After transmission of the message is completed, the
3276 returns to control mode.
The 3276 becomes the slave station (and the TCU the master station) when executing
a write-type command. As a slave station, it responds appropriately to master-station
(TCU) transmissions.
Transparent Monitor Mode
The 3276 does not operate in transparent mode, but can operate on a communications
line with other types of terminals that can operate in transparent mode.
Transparent-monitor mode is provided with an EBCDIC 3276. It permits the transmission
of data in any of the 256 possible EBCDIC bit patterns between the TCU and another
unit on the same communications line with the 3276. This data may be independent of
the selected transmission code (EBCDIC). Examples of such format-independent data
are packed-decimal data, programs (both source and object), core images, and other
binary data. Thus, link control characters within this data will not inadvertently
initiate a 3276 operation.
When an EBCDIC 3276 decodes a DLE STX sequence while in control mode, it enters
transparent-monitor mode. While in this mode, the 3276 disregards all data configurations that may appear on the communications line except for (1) a transparent text
sync sequence (DLE SYN) or (2) a transparent text-terminating sequence (DLE ITB,
DLE ETX, DLE ETB, or DLE ENQ). The 3276 leaves transparent-monitor mode and
returns to control mode (1) if a transparent text sync sequence is not received
within any 3-second period or (2) if a transparent text-terminating sequence is
decoded.
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSC
3-3
Redundancy Checking
A redundancy check is performed on the following communications line data:
1. 3276 command-sequence characters (including the write data of a Write, Erase/Write,
or Erase/Write Alternate command).
2. Data transntitted to the TCU in response to a read-type command or to a polling
sequence.
A block check character (BCC) is accumulated for each block of data at both the TeU
and the 3276. If EBCDIC code is used, a 2-byte BCC is generated (cyclic redundancy
check accumulation); if ASCn code is used, a I-byte BCC is generated (longitudinal
redundancy check accumulation).
BCC accumulation is initiated by, but does not include, the first STX or SOH framing
character. All characters following this STX or SOH, up to and including the end-ofblock character (ETB or ETX), are part of the accumulation. Following the ETB or
ETX character, the transmitting unit transmits its BCC character(s). The receiving
unit then compares this character(s) with the BCC it has accumulated. If the redundancy accumulations are different, a transmission error has occurred.
When the 3276 is the receiving unit and detects a BCe error, it responds to the
transmission by sending NAK to the TCU. When the TCU is the receiving unit, it will
set Unit Check in the ending status for the TeU command being executed when the
BCC error was detected; also, it will set Data Check in the sense byte.
Note: BCC characters are removed /rom the data stream when received for comparison
by the TCU or by the 3276; they are not stored in main storage or in the 3276 buffer.
In both EBCDIC and ASCII, transmission formats (data link controls) are rigidly
screened so that communication is orderly and accurate. Improper transmissions are
ignored or rejected to avoid the acceptance of faulty messages. Received or transmitted
data blocks are counted odd-even-odd-even, etc., by both the transmitter and receiver
(by means of ACK O's and ACK 1's), and their counts must agree at each block-check
point.
Data-Link Control Characters
Two types of characters are transmitted between the TCU and the 3276: CU data-link
control characters and 3276 message data. Data-link coritrol characters are used for
such purposes as message framing, acknowledgment that received message data was
valid or invalid, and identification of the start- or end-of-text transmission. Data link
control characters are used (singly or in sequences) by the TCU (under program
control) and by the 3276 to establish and control all data link operations in an orderly
fashion. The 3276 message data consists of all address, command, order, and display/
print characters sent to the 3276 and of all buffer data, AID bytes, and status/sense
bytes read from the 3276. Data-link control characters are described individually in
the following paragraphs and are described with 3276 message data later in this section
(under "Operational Sequences").
34
~
The data-link control characters, with their EBCDIC or ASCII codes, are as follows:
Data-Link
Control Character
EBCDIC (hex)
ASCII (hex)
ACK 0 (two bytes)
ACK 1 (two bytes)
OLE
ENQ
EOT
ESC
ETB
ETX
ITB
NAK
RVI (two bytes)
SOH
STX
SYN
TTO
WACK
1070
1061
10
20
37
27
26
03
1F
3D
107C
01
02
32
0220
1068
1030
1031
10
05
04
1B
17
03
1F
15
103C
01
02
16
0205
1038
All control characters transmitted by the TCU (except pad and SYN) are issued by the
channel program as part of a TCU Write CCW data stream. All control characters
transmitted by the 3276 to the TCU are generated by the control unit; a Read command
to the TCU is used to store these characters (except pad and SYN) into main storage
for subsequent analysis by the access method.
Pad
Pad characters, leading and trailing, are generated by TCU or 3276 hardware to ensure
complete transmission or reception of the first and last significant character of each
transmission.
SYN (Synchronous Idle)
Two consecutive SYN characters are generated by TCU or 3276 hardware to establish
character synchronization. The TCU can also embed SYN characters in text for timefill to maintain synchronization; the 3276 discards these SYN characters (does not store
them in the buffer). Once this synchronization is lost, a Poll or a Selection sequence to a
3276 must be preceded by an EOT.
I
DLE (Data Link Escape)
DLE is always the first byte in the following 2-byte control characters: ACK 0, ACK 1,
WACK, and RVI. DLE is also used as the fust character in several 2-character
sequences that are used in transparent-monitor mode (described earlier in this chapter
under ''Transparent Monitor Mode").
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSe
3-5
ACK 0 (Even Acknowledge)
ACK 0 is a 2-byte character, as follows:
• EBCDIC: 1070 (hex)
• ASCD: 1030 (hex)
ACK 0 is transmitted by the 3276 after a successful selection addressing (not poll)
sequence to indicate to the TCU that the 3276 is rel:ldy to accept transmission. ACK 0
is also transmitted by the 3276 or by the TCU upon receipt and validation of an evennumbered (second, fourth, etc) text block. .
ACK 1 (Odd Acknowledge)
ACK 1 is a 2-byte character, as follows:
• EBCDIC: 1061 (hex)
• ASCD: 1031 (hex)
ACK 1 is transmitted by the 3276 or TCU upon receipt and validation of an oddnumbered (ftrst, third, etc.) text block.
NAK (Negative Acknowledgment)
NAK is transmitted by the 3276 in response to a TCU text transmission that (l)
terminates with ENQ, (2) has ENQ embedded in text, (3) has invalid BCC, (4) contains
a TID sequence (STX ENQ) , or (5) has ETX missing.
When NAK is received by the 3276 in response to a text transmission, the 3276 retransmits the last block of text.
Programming Note: The TCU should be programmed to respond with NAK to an ENQ
(that ends a text block) from the 3276; this NAK causes the 3276 to send EOT and
retain the status for error recovery.
ENQ (Enquiry)
The 3276 transmits ENQ (l) to request a reply from the TCU following a 3-second
timeout, (2) to request retransmission of the previous reply from the TCU, or (3)
as the last character of a text message in which a data check was detected by the
3276. (See Programming Note above.)
When the 3276 receives ENQ in response to a transmission, the last 3276 transmission
to the TCU is repeated. The 3276 responds with NAK when ENQ is received (1) as the
last character of a TCU-aborted text transmission, (2) embedded in text, or (3) as
part of a TTD sequence (STX ENQ).
To be addressed successfully, the 3276 must receive ENQ as the last character of a
polling or selection addressing sequence.
WACK (Wait before Transmit)
WACK is a 2-byte character, as follows:
• EBCDIC: 100B (hex)
• ASCD: 103B (hex)
WACK is generated by the 3276 (1) in response to a selection addressing (not poll)
sequence when a printer is busy, and (2) in response to a Write or Copy command
text transmission when the Start Printer bit is set in the WCC or eee. The 3276
responds with ENQ to a WACK from the TeU.
RVI (Revene Interrupt)
RVI is a 2-byte character, as follows:
• EBCDIC: 107C (hex)
• ASCll: 103C (hex)
RVI is generated by the 3276 in response to an attempted selection (not poll) by the
TCU when the 3276 has a status and sense message to be transmitted. Whenever the
3276 accepts RVI from the TCU, the CU responds with EOT and resets all pending
status and sense information. The 3276 accepts RVI in place of ACK 0 or ACK 1 and
then only when they would have been valid. If RVI is received at the 3276 in response
to RVI, a timeout occurs at the 3276 unit.
~
STX (Start of Text)
The 3276 receives STX as the fust character of a command or TID sequence. The
STX causes the 3276 to clear its Bee and start accumulating a new BCC (STX is not
included in the accumulation). Subsequent STX (and SOH) characters are included in
the BCe accumulation. STX is transmitted by the 3276 to the TCU as the first character
ofa read-data text block except in a status or test-request message; this STX causes
the TCU to start accumulating a new BCC (STX is not included in the accumulation).
The fust character in status and test-request messages is SOH, with STX following
two header characters. With a message of this type, the TCU starts BCC accumulation
upon receipt of the fust SOH; the subsequent STX character is included in the Bee
accumulation.
SOH (Start of Heading)
The 3276 generates SOH in a 3-character heading sequence that identifies the accompanying data as a status message (SOH, %, R, STX, - - - ) or as a test-request message
(SOH, %, I, STX, data - - - ). The TeU starts BeC accumulation upon receipt of SOH
(SOH is not included in the accumulation).
ETB (End of Transmission Block)
During a message transfer operation, ETB informs the receiving unit that Bee follows.
The 3276 treats ETB as though it were ETX by checking Bee and then generating the
appropriate response; the 3276 does not accept conventionally blocked outbound text.
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSe
3-7
ETX (End of Text)
DUring a message transfer operation, ETX informs the receiving unit that BCC follows.
The 3276 transmits ETX at the end of the last (or only) block of a text message.
Then, upon successful comparison of the received BCC with the accumulated BCC, the
program should respond with ACK to the 3276. If the BCC comparison is unsuccessful,
the TCU interrupts the program (Channel End, Device End, and Unit Check status,
with Data Check set in the sense byte); the program should respond with NAK to the
3276. Receipt of ETX by the 3276 initiates a BCC comparison, causes a line turnaround,
and causes generation of an appropriate response to the TCU.
EOT (End of Transmission)
EOT is transmitted by the 3276 (1) when the 3276 is a slave station and is unable to
perform an operation requested by the TCU; (2) when the 3276 is a master station, as
normal termination of a read operation; (3) when the 3276 has completed General Poll
operations with each attached device; (4) as an answer to RVI sent by the TCU. Line
synchronization is dropped, and the 3276 is returned to control mode. Note that the
program can also issue EOT to the 3276 in order to drop line synchronization and
return the 3276 to control mode. EOT does not reset status and sense in the 3276;
therefore, it should not be sent as a response to a status message.
FollOwing receipt of a valid selection addressing sequence, if an error occurs during
buffer transfer, the 3276 will provide a positive response to the selection sequence
and internally set DC and US status. EOT is sent in response to the following 3276
command or poll.
ITB (End of Intermediate Transmission Block)
The 3276 does not accept conventionally blocked text. However, to coexist on a BSC
multipoint line on which ITB may be used, the 3276 includes the ITB and associated
BCe in its own BCe accumulation but then removes them from the data stream so that
they are not stored in the buffer. The 3276 does not perform a BCe comparison at
that time, but continues the receive operations until ETB or ETX is decoded.
ESC (Escape)
ESC must precede the command code in each command-sequence data stream transmitted
to the 3276, as follows: STX, ESC, CMD, - - -. The 3276 does not generate ESC.
TID (Temporary Text Delay)
TTD is a 2-character sequence: STX ENQ. The 3276 responds to TTD by transmitting
NAK to the TCU. The 3276 does not generate TID. TID may also be used by the
master station to terminate an operation (that is, initiate a forward abort). The 3276
(slave station) will always respond with a NAK,' expecting the master station to transmit
EOT. In this case, the slave station interprets this sequence as a controlled forward
abort rather than an end of transmission.
Operational Sequences (Nonswitched Line)
The following paragraphs describe the various data and control sequences that can be
performed with the 3276 operating on a nonswitched line. These sequences are divided
into four categories:
3-8
,~
1. Specific and General Poll.
~
2. Selection addressing.
3. Write and control type commands.
4. Read-type commands.
The description of each category is associated with a Sequence/Response Diagram,
which shows (1) 3276 responses to program-generated transmissions by the TCU and
(2) nonnal program-handling of 3276 transmissions. These diagrams show the I/O
supervisor/access method as examining 3276 response to detennine which operation to
initiate next; however, for specific applications, additional usage of coJJlllUlitd chaining
in the channel programs may be desirable.
A selection addressing sequence selects a 3276 and an attached device for subsequent
command operations. Polling sequences are selection sequences used specifically to
obtain pending status at a device. Either a Specific Poll sequence requesting status
from a particular device or a General Poll sequence sent to all devices may be executed.
Remote Chaining of 3276 Commands
For remote operations, 3276 command codes are included in the data stream of a Write
CCW to the TCU. Remote chaining of 3276 commands is defmed as the transmission of
more than one command sequence to a 3276 follOwing a single selection addressing or
poll sequence. This chaining nonnally is accomplished with separate Write CCWs in the
channel program. For example, the channel program could (1) write a selection addressing sequence and read the response for evaluation by the 1/0 supervisor/access
method, (2) write a 3276 Write command and text block and read the 3276 response for
evaluation, and then (3) write a 3276 Write command followed by a second text block
and read the 3276 response for evaluation.
The program may chain 3276 commands following a selection addressing sequence,
provided that the BSC rules governing limited conversational mode are observed.
(Refer to Generallnfonnation - Binary Synchronous Communications, GA27-3004.)
The 3276 permits any valid command to be chained following a poll sequence; however,
Read Buffer or Read Modified should not be chained because the BSC rules for limited
conversational mode (a maximum of two consecutive data transfers without an intervening ACK) will be violated.
Any 3276 command (except Erase All Unprotected) may be chained from a Write, Erasel
Write, Erase/Write Alternate, or Copy command. However, if one of the commands has
started a print operation, the 3276 will abort the subsequent chained command (the
print is completed nonnally).
Ge"eral and Specific PoU Sequences
When a General or Specific Poll sequence is issued (Figure 3-2), one of three possible
results occurs:
1. If status and sense infonnation is pending with or without an AID present, a status
and sense message is generated.
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BS<;: . 3-9
2. If status and sense information is not pending and an AID is present, a Read
Modified command is executed.
3. If there is no status or sense information or no AID pending, an EOT response is
generated.
Figure 3-9 lists the conditions under which status and sense messages are transmitted.
Control unit and device address bytes transmitted for the General and Specific Poll
sequences are as follows:
1.
General Poll address byte sequence:
3276 CU Poll Address }
(See Figure 3-1.)
3276 CU Poll Address
7F (EBCDIC) or 22 (ASCII) } (Used in place of the two
7F (EBCDIC) or 22 (ASCII)
device-address bytes.)
2.
Specific Poll address byte sequence:
3276 CU Poll Address
3276 CU Poll Address
Device Address
Device Address
(See Figure 3-1.)
The selected 3276 remains selected at the completion of a poll operation so that the
program can issue a Write, Erase/Write, Erase/Write Alternate, Copy, or EAU command
without reselecting the 3276 and the device; command operations will be with (1) the
device that was selected by Specific Poll or (2) the device from which a response was
last received during the General Poll operation. Selection is dropped when the 3276
transmits EOT; the 3276 transmits EOT when it has no pending status or messages or
after it receives NAK from the TCU in response to a message that ends with ENQ.
fl
Specific Poll addresses the 3276 and one device to detennine if status and sense information or a manually entered message is awaiting transfer to the TCU. The pending
status and sense information or message is transferred automatically by the 3276 upon
receipt of the Specific Poll addressing sequence.
General Poll addresses the 3276 and examines each attached device in sequence (starting
at a random device address) to determine if a status and sense or a manually entered
message is awaiting transfer to the TCU. If a message is present, it is transferred to
the TCU. Each message is accompanied by the address of the device from which it
originated.
Upon completion of this transfer, an ACK response from the program causes the 3276
to continue the General Poll operation, either by transferring another block of a text
message or by examining other attached devices for pending messages. The program
could issue a command rather than ACK to the device from which the message was just
received, only after inbound blocks that end with ETX. The 3276 will ignore any
commands that are sent in response to a block of data that ends with ETB. Once the
3276 has examined all attached devices and has successfully transferred all pending
messages, it generates EOT and returns to control mode. If the program wishes to
tenninate the General Poll, an RVI may be issued to the 3276, forcing an EOT response.
A command issued rather than the ACK (after blocks that end with ETX) will also
terminate the General Poll.
3-10
~
r
.~
Column 1
Use this column for:
Device Selection.
• Specific Poll.
• General Poll. and
Fixed Return Addresses
Column 2
Use this column for:
• 3270 CU Selection Addresses
• Test Requests
•
•
CUor
Device
Number
0
1
2
3
·4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
EBCDIC
1/0
Char.
EBCDIC
Hex
(Note 3)
SP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
¢
<
(
+
lor I
&
J
K
L
M
27
28
29
30
31
0
P
07
08
09
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
P
;
-,orA
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
3B
5E
K
OS
)
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
J
01
02
03
0
.
44
I
&
50
N
$
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
(
05
R
I
20
41
42
43
+
N
25
CU
Number
<
L
M
a
EBCDIC
ASCII
Hex
SP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
(
D4
24
26
ASCII
1/0
Char.
a
R
]
.
$
)
;
A
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
I/O
Char.
EBCDIC
Hex
(Note3)
I
S
T
U
V
W
X
y
Z
I
I
"->
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
#
@
..
.. (Note1)
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
ASCII
1/0
Char.
ASCII
Hex
I
20
2F
S
T
U
V
W
X
y
Z
I
"->
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
#
@
....
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
Examples:
3276 Addressing
EBCDIC
General Poll CU5
CU
Address
Device
Address
Specific Poll Device 4 on
CU5
CU
Address
Device
Address
Select Device 4 on CU5
CU
Address
Device
Address
t
t
t
ASCII
C5
C5
45
45
7F
7F
22
22
C5
C5
45
45
t~
44
44
t
E5
E5
56
56
t~
44
44
Notes:
1. I/O charBCtef address (") i, u,ed BI the del/ice addl'8S8 to lPecify a General Poll operation.
2. Graphic CharBCtBr for the UnitBd States I/O intBrlace codes ara ,hown. Graphic charBCters for E8CDIC 4A, 5A, 58,
18, lC, and lF might differ for particular World Trade I/O interlace codes. Refer to IBM 3270 Information Display
System: Character Set Reference, GA21·2831, fOf pOlSible graphic differances when these codes are u,ed.
Figure 3·1. Remote Control Unit and Device Addressing
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSC
3·11
I/O Supervisor/
Access Method
>
TCU Read Data
(Generated by 3276 CU)
lCU Write Data
(From Channel Program)
CCW
Start I/O - _ - Write (CC) ~ (Leading Pad and SYN Chars·)
I EOT
I (Trailing Pad and SYN Chars*)
Write (~C)...,.. 3276 CU Address (Poll)
I 3276 CU Address (Poll)
I Device or Gen Poll Address
Device or Gen Poll Address
I ENQ
I
Control Unit
Generated
I
I
Read
See Figure 3-3
I
I
EOT
No
I
I
: Resanse
. . . . . .--+------~I...... (TCU
(lnterruPt: CE + DE + UC) - -.......1
Sense Bits: Timeout)
I
I(Operation Completed)
..........-~....;...---~--- (Interrupt: CE + DE + UE) - + - - - - - - '
--1
I
r
I
i
---.J3276CU
I
Response
1
IJ
I
1
I
I
I
IJ
Ir----;;:to
ETX~~C
I
I
I
SUB}
Text I
I
I
1
ENO
I
---....;.--------=---Unterrupt: CE + DE) _ _ _+-I.......1
r"1
Start I/O
L
-
-
...J
--
----+-- Write (CC)-------NAK 11-------,1
...,1
I
EOT
Read
(Interrupt: CE + DE;
- , - - -...- - - - - - - a l l o + UC if BCC error)
(TCU Sense Bit: Data Check)
Start I/O (BCC E~or)
I
I
I
Write (CC)
I
II
--+---- NAK m---~~------------'
Read
- W r i t e - - - : " ' - - - EOTI
~-_~I""_Write
(CC)_. .
IIm.I.[command Sequence]
I
~
(Write-or-ControlI
Read
I
Type)
.
...--_._-Write.(CC) - ...
' --ACK 1 or 0
I
-4...
I
Read
I
- - - " ' - W r i t e (CC)_"'_ _ RVI
L
III -_1-.,.---__
,---...
I~T
----I..'
IU
III
Read
Figure 3·2 (part 1 of 2). General Poll and Specific Poll, Sequence/Response Diagram
3-12
I
I
EM
III
Next text
block III
Continue
General Poll
Notes:
II The 3210 CU will fell to f6$/Jond to the addmssing or polling lequence, causing a TCU timeout, for any of the following masons:
•
•
The 3210 CU is "unavailable" (has pOMr off, is "offline'~ or i, not attached).
•
Any character In the polling I8qUBnCS I, inllalid.
•
The characters In the polling I8quencs are out of order.
•
The polling sequencs is Incomplete (Iell than '8IIen characters).
•
The 3216 CU addf'8S1 is incorrect in the write data ,tream.
•
The addf86l8d 3216 CU was left S8lected from the pTfWiou, tranlnJil$ion•
Therei, no 110 pending nor pending status. For General Poll, the CU sends EOT only after polling all dellices.
II The dellicel8$ponl8III a function of the.kind of dellice and Its status. TYP88 of t8$ponSIJI include: Text, Status, and T8It Requ88t
mlllllBfl8L (Refer to Figure 3-3.J
For General Poll, the 68a1Ch for a I'8$ponsestarts at lome random dellice addrtJIII and continue"equentlally (as long a, ACK, are
receilled In responl8 to text transmi8lions) until all dellic88 am gillen the opportunity to f6$/Jond.
. . Upon detection of an internal parity check or a cursor check, the 3216 CU (1) ,ubltitutfll the SUB character for the character In error,
(2) records Data Check'tatu', and (3) tran""its an ENQ in pIece of ETX (or ETB) and BCC at the end of the text block. The Geneml
Poll procea i, stopped.
II Mandatory program t8$ponl8 to a text block tenninated in ENQ.
II Tenninatall the operation. The natum of the error (parity or cursor check) d08S not warmnt a mtry. This response indicatfll that statu,
and I8nselnfonnation is stomd and that internal 3211 Id8llice polling Is'topped. The ,tatu, mtri8llal infonnatlon included in Figum 3-6,
Note 2, applies.
IJ ETB il u,ed to frame each block of a blocked text messa!J8, except the last block. ETX il u,ed to frame thelBlt block of a blocked text
m8$l8fJfl.
II BCC error ha been detected. The program i8lU88 NAK to caule the 3216 CU to repeat its lat tranlnJi8lion.
II R88ponse/llued by the program to tenninate the operation If the TCU ill unsuccessful in receilling a IIalld BCC following 'b" attempts
by the 3216 CU to transmit the m88lBg8. Th/$ responl8 don not CBUse the 3210 CU to mset its sense/statuslnfonnation. Therefore,
the same status m8#a!J8 will be transmitted if a Specific Poll is immediately i8lUed to thelBlTle deIIice.
1m Thill transmilSion must be a write or control-type command sequence (dBlCrlbed in Figure 3-6). A read-type command would violate
BSC standards on limited conllersational mode.
For Geneml Poll, this transmilSion stops the polling operation. The General Poll mUllt be reinitlated to ensure receipt of all pending
dellice m8llla!J88.
II Posltille acknowledgement The text block has been IUcceafully receilled by the TCU. The program i8lU88 ACK 1 in l8$ponse to the first
and all odd-numbered text blocklland il$u81 ACK 0 in responl8 to thelfJCond and all ellen-numbered text blocks.
II Nonnal tennination of a Specific Poll.
Nonna/ tenninatlon of a General Poll.
1&1 The second and alllluc8f1ding text blocks am framed as the first except they do not include the 3210 CUldellice addfflSl'Bquence.
lEI RVI to tenninate polling I8quence.
lID Tennination of polling sequence on receipt of RVI.
Legend:
(CC) ... Chain Command (CC) Flag in CCW is set to 1.
(Interrupt)
•
=>
TCU-generated interrupt (CE ... Channel End, DE ... Device End, UE ... Unit Exception, UC a Unit Check) .
Reversed numbers refer to notes.
·Only the critical framing characters (sync pattern and pad) are shown. All other framing characters are elso hardware-generated 8S required.
See SL Generallnfonnation - Binary Synchronoull Communication" GA21-3004, for a complete description.
FJ8UIe 3·2 (Part 2 of 2). General PoD and Specific PoD, Sequence/Response J>iasram
:~
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSe
3-13
Figure 3-3 shows the message formats. The Test Request, Read Modified, and Short
Read operations and the resulting data are described under "Read Modified Command"
in Chapter 1. Note that a device address is not provided in the heading of a Test
Request message. An address must be manually entered by the operator as part of
the text; this is because the operator may specify the address of another" device for
test operations with the program.
The status and sense bits are described later in this chapter under "Status and Sense
(SIS) Bytes."
(Note: This figure is referenced in Figures 4-2 and 4-6.)
Teu Write Data
Teu Read Data
(From Channel Program)
(Generated by 3276 CU)
(Poll Sequence)
Status
Test Request
Message-
Message
Read Modified or
Short Read Message
II
Read Partition
(Query)
I~----"l~..------..----------~~----------..~--~
SOH
SOH
%
R
%
STX
STX
Device Address
S/SO
ETX
BeC
}II
OLE
STX
3276 eu Poll Address) II
3276 eu Poll Address
Device Address
Device Address
/
3276 eu Poll Address
SIS 1
STX
II
. . . - - - Text
Text - - - I I . t
ETX or ETB
ETX or ETB
ace
OLE
ETX
Bee
acc
SUB
Text
ENQ
I.
(Interrupt)
I
(Interrupt)
1--
I
I
(NAKI
I
• Response to General Poll or Specific Poll only (not program-generated Read Modified command)
Notes:
II
IfJ
A status mB88llfJ8 tTl$ponse i, illued to a General or Specific Poll if (1) the 3276 CU has pending ,tatu, (General Poll ignoff1l Device Bu,y
and deVice "unavailable" and, if the 3276 continU8$ polling of next device), or (2) if error ,tatu, develop, during execution of the poll.
" Statu, and ,en,e bit BIIignments are described in Figure 3-1.
A T8$t Requ8$t Mell8f18 rB$pOnBe i, i6lued to a General or Specific Poll if a SYS REa key i, pressed at a 3278 or 3279 attached to a 3276.
II
This addl'8ll i, included only in the fint block of a blocked taxt m8$$age.
II
The text portion of thi' m8llB1J8 i. the f'BSult of either a Read Modified 'or Short Read operation by the 3270 Cu. Figure 3-51i,ts eech
operator action and the f88ulting read operation that will be perfotmed.
Legend:
(Interrupt) a TCU-generated interrupt.
Reversed numbers refer to notes.
II
Figure 3-3. 3276 CU Message Response to PoWnlor Read Modified Command
3-14
~,
Selection Addressing Sequence
The selection addressing sequence (Figure 3-4) specifies a 3276 and an attached device
in preparation for write-, control-, or read-type command sequences. It is simi1ar in
format to a Specific Poll sequence in that a CU address is sent, followed by a device
address, but different I/O characters and hex codes are used to represent the CU
address bytes.
Column 1 in Figure 3-11ists the characters and hex codes used to complete the
selection addressing sequence. Comparative examples showing CU and device address
codes for General Poll, Specific Poll, and selection addressing sequences appear at
the bottom of Figure 3:-1.
For the 3276, the selection addressing sequence performs a function similar to a local
Select command in that it causes a device-to-control unit buffer transfer. The 3276
provides a positive response to a selection sequence before transfer of a device buffer
to the 3276. If an error occurs during buffer transfer, following receipt of a valid
selection addressing sequence, a positive response to the selection sequence is provided
by the 3276, and DC and US status are internally set. EOT is sent in response to the
following 3276 command.
..
Write-Type and Control-Type Command Sequences
The program initiates a Write, Erase/Write, Erase/Write Alternate, Copy, or EAU operation (Figure 3-5) by fust writing a command and, except for'EAU, a data sequence to
the selected 3276 and, then, reading the response. All writ~-type commands and Copy
commands must be followed by a minimum of one data byte (the WCC or CCC byte).
If the program reads a positive response (ACK) from the 3276, it can terminate the
operation or continue with another command. The program can write blocks of text to
the 3276 by initiating, after receipt of each ACK, a Write command sequence for each
block to be written.
Write data is blocked to devices attached to a 3276 as follows: Each time the 3276
receives a selection addressing sequence, it begins to transfer the device buffer
contents to the control unit buffer. As the Write command data is received by the
control unit, updating occurs, and the result is asynchronously transferred to the
buffer of the addressed device. The device buffet contents not affected by the write
data stream remain unaltered in the device buffer. If the transmission of a block of
data to the control unit is successful (ACK reply), a device-to-control-unit buffer
transfer is begun. If the transmission of a block of write data to the control unit is
unsuccessful (e.g., NAK reply), the buffer contents previously stored in the control
unit buffer are immediately transferred to the device buffer before another Write
command is received. These contents include any previous text blocks that were
written successfully. Thus, the 3276 can receive retransmission of the block that was
unsuccessfully received.
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSC
3-15
1/0 Supervisorl
Access Method
TCU Read Data
(Generated by 3276 CU)
TCU Write Data
(From Channel Program)
CCW
Start I/o _ _-_writel(cc)
Write (CC)
'
+
:
~~~ing Pad and SVN Chars*)"",
(Trailing Pad and SVN Chars*) ~ Hardware
3276 CU Address
Generated
3276 CU Address
Device Address
Device Address
ENQ
No
WACK
IResponse RVI
m II
Read
ID
..
(Interrupt: CE.+ DE + UC)
(lCU Sense Bit: Timeout)
ACK 0
II
--W
I
(Interrupt: CE + DE)
I
Start I/O
1....._ _--1_ _
Write --~- EOT
iii
r"'1----+-------oi----Onterrupt: CE + DE)--........- - - - - - Start I/O
1
..._ _ _-+_ _ Write
----11---
EOT
iii
.I---.------_-_(lnterrupt: CE DE)-_--------Start I/O - _ - Write (CC)
+
+
Command Sequence
II
I :
Read
I
I
·Only the critical framing characters (sync pattern and pad) are shown. All other framing characters
are also hardware·generated as required. See SL General Information - Binary Synchronous
Communications, GA27·3004, for a complete description.
Ffsure 34 (put 1 of 2). Selection AdcJressins, Sequence/Respcmse Diagram
3-16
Notes:
D The 3276 CU will fail to respond to the addf8$$ing or polling sequence causing a TCU timeout, for any of the following reasons:
•
The 3276 CU is ''unavailable'' (has power off, is "offline'~ or is not attached).
•
Any character in the polling sequence is invalid.
•
The characters in the polling sequence are out of order.
•
The polling sequence's incomplete (Ie" than seven characters).
•
The 3276 CU addre18 is incorrect in the write data stream.
•
The addre"ed 3276 CU was left selected from the previous transmi18ion.
II The addf8$$ed deVice has pending status (excluding Device Busy or Device End).
II The addf818ed 3276 device is busy. No SIS infonnation is stored. An RVI response takes precedence over a WACK response.
II The addre" has b86n succe"fully received, no status is pending.
II Tennination of attempted addressing sequence:
Availability of valid stetus and sense infonnation cannot be ensured unle" a Specific Poll is issued to the responding device as the next
addre18ing sequence i"ued to this 3276 Cu.
m
Tennination of attempted addffl18ing sequence.
IJ Refer to Figure 3·6 or 3-6 for the desired command sequence.
Legend:
(CC):::: Chain Command (CC) Flag in CCW is set to 1.
(Interrupt) ;;: TCU.generated interrupt (CE:::: Channel End, DE
D Reversed numbers refer to notes.
= Device End, and UC = Unit Check)
Figure 34 (part 2 of 2). Selection Addressing, Sequence/Response Diagram
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSC
3-17
I/O Supervisor/
Access Method
(Selection or Poll
Seq or Previous
Command Opt
I
Start I/O -
TCU Read Data
(Generated by 3276 CUI
TCU Write Data
(From Channel Program I
CCW
I
I
I
I
. .-
Write (CC) -
I
I
I
I
I
STX.
ESC
Command Code
Text D
ETX
(seC) Control Unit
Generated
Read
.,._-----------+.
Unterrupt: CE + DE + UC) ~
I
(TCU Sense Bit: Timeout)
ACK 10rO
EDT
No
II
I Response
I 6
NAK
II
~_...I4------I-------+--(lnterrupt: CE + DEI---:--~I
II
WACK
•
•
Start I/O
,'------+-- Write---+----EOT II
, . . , - - - - - + - - - - - - - + - - U n t e r r u p t : CE
I
I
+ DE + UE)~-----
Start I/O
I
Write (CC) - - + - [SpecifiC Poll Sequencel
I
to Receive SIS Bytes
Read
J
- - - - - f - - - - - - - - + - - ( l n t a r r u p t : CE + DEI
ral
---4r-------~
Start I/O
1'-------+--- W r i t e - - - + - - - EOT
m
I
I
Start I/O
(Terminate) I
I
__- -_ _--Write--..
I---EOT m
I
BD
(Continue)
Write (CC) _[command Sequence]
I such as Write
:
Command Code and
i
next block of text
Read
I
(Continue)
I
~-----'--wrlte------!-I-_
I
TTO
STX
ENO
I
__
Co.....
nt.;....in...;,u8.;....)-+__
Start1L-(
I/O
Write
-ti'
I
I
I
Command Sequence
such as Write
Command Code and
next block of text
]
,
NAK
ID
Start I/O
(Terminate)
....---~+---Write--~---EOT
I
Figure 3-5 (Part 1 of 2). Write-Type and Control-Type Commands, Sequence/RespoD18 Diagram
3·18
,~
Notel:
DNo teXt i, tran""/tred on an EAU command tran""I86lon.
fJ Command tranll7lission was not ,uCC88Sfully receiVed becaul8 of invalid framing (STX milling). eau,. a timeout at TCU.
II The control unit i, unable to perform the operation indicated in the command tran""ission becauIB of a bu.y/unavailable/not ffJady
device.
II If a tranll7li"ion problem caul8. both a 3216 CU detected check condition end a Bec error, the BCC error taka precedence over all
other check condition., and a NAK i, tran""itted to the TCU.
iii BeC error or missing ETX h. been detected. The NAK te$pDn68 requats the program to repeat its lat tranll7liaion.
II Rtnponl8 iaued by the program to terminate the operation if the 3216 CU is un,uct:flllful in receiving a valid BCC following '1'7"
attempts by the program to tran,",it the me18alJll.
fJ If the Start Printer bit i. IBt in the WCC or CCc, a WACK te$pDnS8 indlcaffl, that the text tranll7li"ion was ,ucCflllfully received but
that the prinfflr is now busy and an additional chained command cannot be accepted.
If any of the condition, cited in NOfflll PffJvail, the EOT f'fIIponS8 taka precedence oll8r the WACK te$ponle.
IINormai termination of the operation by the program.
II Command 8JCBCution hili bBBn ,ucc8#fully comp/effld.
ID]Repeat the operation shown In thil figuffJ or in FiguffJ 3~ for the nflXt command .equence.
IIIExamP/e of a Temporary Text Delay (TTO) sequence.
EExamp/e of terminating an operation u,ing TTO (a forward abort sequence).
Legend:
(CC)
a
Chain Command (CC) Flag in CCW is set to 1.
(Interrupt) "" TCU-generated interruption (CE "" Channel End, DE
=Device End, UE "" Unit Exception, UC:::: Unit Check).
D"" Number in parentheses refers to note.
Figure 3-5 (Put 2 of 2). Write-Type and Control-Type Commands, Sequence/Response Diagram
Read-Type Command Sequences
Programming Note: Read Buffer is used primarily for diagnostic purposes, and Poll
(General and Specific) is normally used in place of Read Modified for remote read
operations.
The program initiates a read operation (Figure 3-6) by first writing a command sequence
to the selected 3276, and then reading the response. If the 3276 responds with text
followed by ETB, and if Bee comparison at the TCU is successful, the program should
write ACK to retrieve the next text block. This should continue until an error is
detected or until a text block is followed by ETX. After ETX is received, the program
should write ACK to the 3276 and then read the EOTreply. The three types of Read
Modified message responses are shown in Figure 3-3.
The 3276 will retransmit text up to 15 times when NAK or an incorrect ACK is received
or when ENQ is rec:eived in response to a conversational text reply to a Read command.
The 3276 supports limited-conversational-text mode. If the host transmits a text block
following receipt of a text transmission which ends in ETB, a timeout occurs at the 3276
unit and ENQ is sent to the host.
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSC
3-19
1/0 Supervisorl
Access Method
(Selection Sequence or
Previous Command Op)
I
Start I/O -
TCU Write Data
(From Channel Program)
CCW
TCU Read Data
(Generated by 3274)
I
I
. . . . Write (CC) - . ,_ . STX
I
Read
ESC
!
I
Command Code
ETX
(BCC) Hardware
• Generated
I
I ~o
I Response
I
I
...........- ............------~I.... (Interrupt:
I
CE + DE + UC)
(TCU Sense Bit: Timeout)
.......- -.............- - - - - - - - - - t - - ( l n t e r r u p t : CE + DE)
Start I/O
I..,----Io--Write
---9----
EOT
If command is
Rd Mod,
see Figure 3-3.
II
I
'
NAK
II
I
I
I
1
II
I
.-,----tl-------.......(lnterrupt: CE + DE + U E ) - ' - - - . - r- - - -
Start I/O
I
1..._ _............-_ Write (CC) - - . - - fSpecific Poll Sequencel
I
Lto Receive SIS Bytes
EI[
I
I
I
(Interrupt: CE + DE)
I
I
.J
STX
3274 Poll Adr
Device Adr
Text
I SUB} ETX or ETB II
I Text II
BCC
J
Read
I
r- _-1--,
I~
I
ENQ
~~I~I
L _____
I
~-_-~
Start I/O
1
...------- Writj (CC) -
.......- - - NAK
11---"----'1
Read
EOTII
(Interrupt: CE + DE;
also + UC if BCC error) •
(TCU Sense Bit: Data Check)
I
Start I/O
(BCC Error)
.
Write (CC)
I
I
I
Read
Write
Write (CC)
I
.1
1
NAK
I
I
I
. EOTII
ACK 1 orO
Read
Figure 3~ (Part 1 of 2). Read-Type Command, Sequence/Response Diagram
3-20
I
lID
I
II
,I
I
i
Next text
block IfJ
IIII
EOT
~
Notal:
a Command tranlffll16ion was not luccel6fully received b8caule of invalid framing (STX ml16ing). CaUl. timeout at TCU.
B The 3216 CU is unable to perform the operation indicated in the command tl'Bnltni16ion becaUSB of a busyNnavailable/not ready device
or a 3216 CU.detected check condition (receipt of an illegal command/order lequence, failure to decode a valid command, or en I/O
Interface "overrun"). The EOT response to a command tl'Bnlffli16ion indicates that statuI Information is stored in the 3216
To ensure retrieval of valid ltatul, a Specific Poll must be illued to the device-responding EOT BI the next addT8l$ing sequence iaued to
this 3216 CU.
cu.
IIIf a tranlffliaion problem causes both a 3216 CU.detected check condition and a Bce error, the BCC error takes precedence over all
other check condltionl, and a NAK is tranlfflittsd to the TCU.
B Response i16ued by the program to terminate the opel'Btion if the 3216 CU is unsuccessful in receiving a valid BCC following '~"
attempts by the program to tranltnit the me$88f18.
mThil addT8l$ sequence il included only In the fint block of a blocked text m8l$8gB.
mETB is used to frame each block of a blocked text messafl8, except for the last block. ETX is used to frame thelBlt block of a blocked
text m8S$8f18.
II Upon detection of an internel parity check, the 3216 CU automatically substitutes the SUB character for the chaf8Cterin error.
If a parity or cunor check Is detected, ENO " transmitted In place of ETX (or ETB) and BCC at the end of the text block and
appropriate statuI and lenSB information illtored. This is also uSBd by the 3216 if, after tranlfflitting the fint block, the transmi16ion
cannot be completed due to power being off at the terminal.
II Mandatory program response to a text block.terminated in ENQ
IDRBlPonse to terminate the operation. The nature of the error (parity or cunor check) d08l not warrant a retry. This response indicates
that appropriate srattls and senSB information II stored. Ths statuI retrisval information included in Note
applies.
II
III BCC error h81 beIIn detected. The program i16utlS NAK to CaulS the 3216 CU to repeat its IlISt transmission.
III Positive acknowiedf/8lTlent The text block h81 beIIn succllllfully f'8C8ived by the TCU. The program i16ued ACK 1 in response to the fint
and all odd-numbered text blocks and i16ued ACK 0 in ftlS/Jonse to the second and a/lsven-numbered text blocks. Thil response to a text
block terminated in ETX turns on the device SYSTEM A VA/LABLE indicator.
II The second and a/l succeeding text blockl are frsmed the fint except that thsy do not includIJ the 3216 CU/devics addf81S sequence.
IB1 Normal termination of the operation fo/lowing tranlffli"ion of thelBlt text block.
BI
Legend:
(CC) :: Chain Command (CC) Flag in CCW is set to 1.
(Interrupt)
so
TCU-generated interrupt (CE
r::
Channel End, DE
r::
Device End, UE r:: Unit Exception, UC:;: Unit Check)
. . Reversed numben refer to notes.
Figule 3-6 (Part 1 of 1). Read-Type Commands, Sequence/Response Diagram
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSe
3-21
Status and Sense (SIS) Bytes
All remote status and sense conditions are combined into 2 bytes. These 2 bytes are
always sent in a status message. In EBCDIC code, the bits are transmitted as indicated
in Figure 3·7. If the sense bytes are transmitted in ASCD code, the EBCDIC coc\e
defmed below is translated to ASCD before transmission.
Status and sense conditions are recorded by the 3276 for each device. These conditions
may include busy or ready status or detected errors. Figure 3-8 shows how these
status and sense con~tions are interpreted for each error response transmitted by
the 3276 in response to a poll sequence from the TCU.
Error-Recovery Procedures
Errors detected at the 3276 are indicated to the system processor by the following
responses: RVI, NAK, EOT, or sense/status information. The meaning of the responses
depends upon their sequences, as defmed in Figures 3-2 through 3-6.
I When errors occur in the 3178, 3278 and 3279, the error condition is reported once to a
General Poll. The 3276 allows parts of messages to be transmitted to the host before
all data is transferred from the 3178, 3278, and 3279 to the 3276. If a terminating condition prevents completion of data transfer from the 3178, 3278, and 3279 to the 3276
after inbound link transmission has started, the 3276 sends STX ..... SUB ENQ. The
3276 responds to a Specific Poll with DC status. FollOwing a selection addressing sequence,
a write-type command is aCcepted but a read-type command is rejected, and DC status is
returned by the 3276.
When the host selects the 3276 and issues a Read Modified command, the 3276 transmits
a single block of text followed by ETX. If the host makes an error by starting a new
command sequence with STX, the 3276 responds with ENQ. If more than one text block
is transmitted to the host, with ACK received from the host after each BTB, the host
may respond to BTX on the last block, With a new command sequence beginning with
STX,BSC.
Figure 3-9 lists the various error combinations of sense/status bits (with the exception
of Device Busy (DB), which is not an error) and the recommended error-recovery
procedure for each combination. Although there are 256 possible combinations of status
and sense bits, only a portion of this total is nonnally used. Combinations other than
those listed may occur. For example, an unpredictable catastrophic hardware failure
could induce an undeflDed combination of status and sense bits. Brrors that occur at
the "from" device during a Copy command are identified by an Operation Check (OC)
sense bit in addition to the sense bit representing the detected error.
3-22
~
Bit
No.
Bit Definition
SIS Byte 0:
0
Dependent upon setting of bits 2-7.
1
Always a 1.
2
Reserved.
3
Reserved.
4
Device Busy (DB) - This bit indicates that the addressed device (except the 3178, 3278, or 3279) is busy executing an operation
or that a busy detection was previously made by a command or Specific Poll. The device is busy when it is executing an Erase All
Unprotected command or a print operation, accepting data from the operator identification card reader, or performing various
keyboard operations (ERASE INPUT, Backtab, and CLEAR).
This bit is set with Operation Check when a Copy command is received which specifies a "busy" device with its "from"
address.
This bit is set with Unit Specify when a command is addressed to a busy device. This can occur by chaining a command to
a Write, EraselWrite, Erase/Write Alternate, or Copy command which started a printer or by chaining a command to a Specific
Poll addressed to a busy device.
Note: DB is not returned for the 3178,3278, or 3279 when executing an Erase All Unprotected command, accepting data from
the MSR, or performing ERASE INPUT, Backtab, or CLEAR keyboard operations.
5
Unit Specify (US) - This bit is set if any SIS bit is set as a result of a device-detected error or if a command is addressed to a
busy device.
6
Device End (DE) - This bit indicates that the addressed device has changed from unavailable to available and not ready to ready,
or busy to not busy. This bit is included during a Specific or General Poll but is not considered pending status by a selectionaddressing sequence.
If a selection-addressing sequence detects that the addressed device has pending status and also detects one of the above status
changes that warrants a Device End, then the Device End bit is set and preserved along with the other pending status, and an RV I
response is made.
7
Reserved.
SIS Byte 1:
o
Dependent upon setting of bits 2-7.
1
Always a1.
2
Command Reject (CR) - This bit is set upon receipt of an invalid 3270 command.
3
Intervantion Required {/R} - This bit is set if:
•
4
A Copy command contains a "from" address in its data stream which specifies an unavailable device.
•
A command attempted to start a printer but found it not ready. The printout is suppressed.
•
T.he 3276 receives a selection-addressing sequence or a Specific Poll sequence for a device which is unavailable or which
became not ready during a printout. A General Poll sequence does not respond to the unavailable/not ready indication and
proceeds to determine the state of the next device.
•
The 3276 receives a command for a device which has been logged as unavailable or not ready.
Equipment Check (EC) - This bit indicates a printer character generator or sync check error occurred, the printer became
mechanically disabled, or a 3276 detected bad parity from the device.
5
Oats Check (DC) - This bit indicates the detection of bad parity from the device, or 3276 operation to a device was unsuccessful
6
Control Check (CC) - For the 3276, this bit indicates a timeout check. A timeout check occurs when a device fails to respond
(i.e., the device was disabled with DC returned to the host; IR will be returned on subsequent retry by the host).
to 3276 communications within a specified time period or when a device fails to complete an operation within a specified time
period.
7
Operation Check (OC) - This bit, when set alone, indicates one of the following:
•
Receipt of an illegal buffer address or of an incomplete order sequence on a Write, Erase/Write, or EraselWrite Alternate
command.
•
The device did not receive a CCC or a "from" address on a Copy command.
•
Receipt of an invalid command sequence. (ECS is not received in the second data character position of the sequence.)
•
The internal buffering capability is exceeded on a 3276. This bit is set with Unit Specify to indicate that the "from" address
on a Copy command specified a device with a "Iocked" buffer (the device data is secure).
Figure 3·7. Remote Status and Sense Byte Definitions - Bse
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - Bse
3-23
Device
Response
RVI
Command
SIS Explanation
Selection
Outstanding Status - Pending information from a previous operation with the same device. (If the
addressed device is busy, WACK is sent to the TCU instead of AVI, and no SIS bit is set.) Note: A
selection-add,..lng sequence does not recognize a Device End III pending ,tatus. If there is no other
pending status, It f8$eU thi' bit and proceetJs with the selection. If the addf8#ed device hili other pending
statu" Device End remain, set with it, and the RVI response i, made III usual.
CC - A timeout check is caused by the addressed device. The operation is tried twice before this bit is set.
CC, IA - Power on reset occures during selection.
IA - The addressed device is unavailable.
DE, IR - The addressed printer is out of paper, its power has been turned off, or its cover is open.
DE, lA, EC, US - The addressed printer is mechanically disabled and cannot recover.
DE, DC, US - A parity error is detected at the printer.
DC, US - A parity check or cursor check is detected by the addressed device on the data it is sendir:ag to
the control unit. For a 3276, an operation to a terminal was unsuccessful. The terminal was disabled and
DC US returned to the host. On subsequent retry by the host, IR will be returned to the host.
EOT
Aead
Commands
CR - Invalid 3270 command is received.
OC -Invalid command sequence (ESC is not in the second data character position), or data follows the
command in the data stream received at the device.
DB, US - The addressed device is busy. The command was chained to a Write, EraselWrite, EraselWrite
Alternate, or Copy command which started a print, or it was chained to a Specific Poll.
IR - A command is addressed to an unavailable device.
DC - The 3276 is unable to complete a Read command operation after the first block has been sent to
the host, because either there was an error in the terminal or the terminal was powered off after the first
block was sent. A SUB character and an ENQ character are placed in the buffer.
DC, US - A parity check or cursor check is detected by the addressed device on the data it is sending to
the control unit. For a 3276, an operation to a terminal was unsuccessful. The terminal was disabled
and DC US returned to the host. On subsequent retry by the host, IR will be returned to the host.
EOT
Write
Commands
CR - An invalid or Illegal 3270 command is receiVed.
OC - An invalid command sequence (ESC is not in the second data position), an illegal buffer address
or an incomplete order sequence is received, or a data byte was sent to the device during the Write
command before the operati~n required by the previous data byte was completed.
DC, US - The device detects a parity or cursor check on its buffer during the command operation. For
a 3276, an operation to a terminal was unsuccessful. The terminal was disabled and DC US returned
to the host. On subsequent retry by the host, IR will be returned to the host.
CC - The device fails to complete an operation.
DB, US - The addressed device is busy. The message is accepted but not stored in the 3276 buffer.
The command is aborted.
Figure 3-8 (Part 1 of 2). Remote Error Status and Sense Responses - BSC
3-24
Device
Response
EOT
Command
Copy
Command
SIS Explanation
CC, OC - The "from" device fails to complete an operation or respond to the 3271 in a certain time
(timeout check). (Not used for the 3274 or 3276.)
DB, OC - The "from" device is busy. (The device is busy executing an operation, a printout, reading
data from the operator identification card reader, or performing a keyboard operation.) The Copy
command is aborted.
IR, OC - The "from" device is not available.
OC, US - The "from" device has.a locked buffer.
CC - The data stream contains other than two bytes (the CCC and the "from" address). The command
is aborted.
OC - The "from" device buffer is larger than the "to" device buffer.
OC - The buffer of the "from" device (as APL/Text feature) contains APLlText characters (entered since
an Erase/Write or Erase/Write Alternate command or a CLEAR key operation) and the "to" device does
not have the APL/Text feature.
DC, OC, US - Set when "from" device detects an internal parity or cursor check. For 3274 or 3276,
an operation to a terminal was unsuccessful. The terminal was disabled and DC US returned to the host.
On subsequent retry by the host, IR will be returned to the host.
DB, US - The addressed "to" device is busy.
EOT
Write,
Erase/Write,
Erase/Write
Alternate,
Copy
Commands
IR - Addressed device is not available, or addressed printer is not ready.
EOT
Erase All
Unprotected
Command
OC - One or more data bytes followed the command (buffer overrun).
Specific
and
General
Poll
DE. IR, EC, US - An unrecoverable mechanical failure is detected at the printer.
DC, US - A parity check or cur.' lr check is detected by the addressed device on the data it is sending to
the control unit. For a 3276, an operation to a terminal was unsuccessful. The terminal was disabled
and DC US returned to the host. On subsequent retry by the host, IR will be returned to the host.
DC - The 3276 is unable to cOIT.plete a Read Command operation after the first block has been sent to
the host, because either there was an error in the terminal or the terminal was powered off after the
first block was sent. A SUB character and an ENQ character are placed in the buffer.
DE - The poll finds a device (1), previously recorded as busy, now not busy or, (2), previously recorded
as unavailable or not ready, now available and ready.
IR, DE - The poll finds a device. previously recorded as ready. available, and busy, now not ready and not
busy, or the printer went not ready during a printout.
DC, US, DE - A parity error is detected at printer.
CC (Specific Poll only) - The poll finds a device, previously recorded as unavailable, still unavailable
(timeout check).
NAK
Specific
Poll
DB - The addressed device is busy.
Read and
Write
Commands
NAK is transmitted by the 3276 when it detects a block check character (BCC) error on the TCU
transmission. A BCC error has priority over all other detectable error conditions. If, for example,
a BCC error and parity error are detected during the same command transmission. the parity error
condition is reset, and a NAK response is set by the 3276.
Fipre 3-8 (Part 2 of 2). Remote Error Status and Sense Responses - BSe
Chapter 3. Remote Operations· BSe
3·25
Transmitted
in Response
to:
Detected during 3270 Operation
Sensei
Status
Bits
Hex
EBCDIC
CR
OC
OC,US
IR
IR,OC
DC
DC, US
DC,OC,US
DC, US, DE
IR,DE
IR, EC, US, DE
DB
DB, US·
OC, DB·
DE
Ce,IR
40
40
60
C1
C4 C1
40 50
40 01
40 C4
C4
C4
C6
C2
C6
C8
4C
C8
C2
40
C4
C5
C4
50
08
40
40
C1
40
02
ASCII
20
20
41
41
26
4A
44
44
45
44
20
44
20
20
20
44
44
46
42 26
46 51
48 20
3C 20
48 41
42 20
20 4B
Selection
Addressing
Sequence
Specific
Poll
Sequence
General
Poll
Sequence
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
P
P
P
D,P
P
P
P
D,P
A 3270
Command
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
Specific
Poll
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
P
P
P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
D,P
General
Poll
D,P
D,P
P
P
P
D,P
Error
Recovery
Procedure
3276
6
6
13
4
5
2
2
3
8
4
7
9
10
11
None
4
Note: The attached deflice erron that are detected lI$ynchronously do not cause a sense bit to set until the deflice il pol/ed for statuI during
a 68lection-addffJ66ing, Specific Pol/, or General Pol/sequence. Those error SIS bit combinations that contain DE were detected during a
printout
-The DB, US, and OC SIS bits will be combined if a Copy command is addressed to a busy "to" device and the command also specifies
the "from" device the same as the "to" device.
Legend:
NA - Not Applicable
o - Display (3178, 3276, 3278, 3279)
P
- Printer
Figure 3-9. Remote 3276 BSC Status and Sense Conditions
The error-recovery procedures recommended in Figure 3-9 are as follows:
1. Execute a new address selection addressing sequence and retransmit the message,
starting with the command sequence that was being executed when the error
occurred. If, after two retries, the operation is not successful, this should be
considered a nonrecoverable error. Follow supplementary procedure B after two
retries.
2. Reconstruct the entire device buffer if possible, and retry the falling chain of
commands (within the BSC sequence of operations). The sequence of commands
used to reconstruct the buffer should start with an Erase/Write or Erase/Write
Alternate command. If the information in the screen buffer is such that it cannot,
or need not, be reconstructed, the operation may still be retried. If an unrecoverable
3178,3278, and 3279 buffer error or an.error occurring on a transfer between the
3276 and the 3178, 3278, and 3279 is detected, the entire buffer is cleared and
the host system is informed of the error by receiving DC, US status but is not
informed of the clear operation. If, after three retries, the operation is not
successful, this should be considered a nonrecoverable error. Follow supplementary
procedure A.
3-26
3. The error occurred during execution of a Copy command. Execute procedure 2,
except that it is the buffer of the "from" device specified by the Copy command that
should be reconstructed. After three retries, follow supplementary procedure B,
listed below under "Supplementary Procedures."
4. The error indicates that the printer is out of paper, has its cover open, or has
a disabled print mechanism; or it indicates that the device is unavailable. Request
(or wait for) either the display or system operator to ready the device. Then,
retry the printout by issuing a Write command with the proper WCC and no data
stream. (There is no data error, and the data is still intact in the device buffer
and can be reused.) OR, follow procedure 2.
s.
The error indicates that the "from" device specified by a Copy command is inavailable.
Note that the device address associated with the error status and sense information
does not indicate the device that actually required "readying." The device that
requires the corrective action is the device specified by the "from" address in the
Copy command. When the device is determined and made "ready," follow procedure
1.
.6. The operation should be tried up to six times. Continued failure implies an application
programming problem which can be detected by analyzing the failing write data stream.
7. The error occurred during a printout operation and indicates either a charactergenerator error or a disabled print mechanism. There is no data error. The proper
error-recovery procedure is application-dependent since the user mayor may not
want a new printout. If a new printout is required, follow procedure 4.
8. A data error occurred in the device buffer during a printout; procedure 2 should
be followed.
9. A Specific Poll detected that the addressed device is busy. Periodically issue a
Specific Poll to pick up the Device End sense/status bit sent by the device when
it becomes not-ready (unless this status change is detected on a selection addressing
sequence).
10. Indicates that a command was erroneously addressed to a busy device. Periodically
issue a General or Specific Poll to pick up the Device End sense/status bit sent by
the device when it becomes not busy. Then follow procedure 1.
11. Indicates that, in attempting to execute a Copy command, the "from" device was
found to be busy. Follow procedure 1 when the "from" device becomes not busy.
Note that the device address associated with the status and sense message is the
address of the "to" device and not that of the busy "from" device. The "from" device
will transmit Device End via a Specific or General Poll when it becomes not busy.
12. An attempt was made to execute a Copy command, but access to the "from" device
data was not authorized. The device address associated with the error sense/status
bits is that of the copy "to" device.
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSe
3-27
Supplementary Procedures
A. Request maintenance for the device that is giving trouble. After repair, reconstruct
the screen buffer image. The sequence of commands used to reconstruct this image
should start with an Erase/Write command. Retry the failing chain of commands
according to the procedure that referred you to this supplementary procedure.
B. The "from" device specified by the Copy command in the failing chain of commands
(CCWs) is malfunctioning. The "from" device should be determined from the datastream infonnation, "ud maintenance should be. requested for the device. After
the repair, reconstruct the buffer image. The sequence of commands used to
reconstruct this image should start with an Erase/Write command. Retry the
failing chain of commands according to the procedure that referred you to this
supplementary procedure.
C. Same as procedure 1, except a new selection addressing sequence is not perfonned,
and this message is transmitted as part of the present device selection.
D. Same as procedure 1, except retransmit the entire failing chain of commands.
NAK to a Text Block
When the 3276 detects a BCC error at the end of a text transmission, it transmits a
NAK. The following recovery action should be taken.
If the text is a write command sequence chained from a previous Write, Erase/Write,
or Erase/Write Alternate command, and if the failing write command data stream contains
more than one byte but does not contain .an SBA order sequence immediately following
the wee, then procedure 2 (above) should be executed.
In all other cases, supplementary procedure C (above) should be executed, except
the number of retries should be six. If after these six retries the problem is not
corrected, the program should issue an EDT and follow supplementary procedure A
(above).
Note: An FF (hex) character in a data field does not cause a BCC e"or when operating
with the 3276 units.
EOT to a Text Block
The recommended recovery procedure depends upon the type of detected error. A
Specific Poll must be issued immediately following the EDT to obtain the error sense/
status infonnation. Then the recovery procedures referenced in Figure 3-9 should be
executed.
~I
3-28
E"ors Detected during a Specific or General
Poll Sequence
Any errors that result from execution of the poll sequence itself are contained in
Figure 3-9, and those recovery procedures apply. The detected error bits are
transmitted to the Teu in a Status Message during the poll sequence.
R VI to Selection Addressing Sequence
A Specific Poll must be issued immediately following the RVI to a selection addressing
sequence to obtain the error sense/status information. Then the recovery procedures
defmed in Figure 3-9 should be followed.
Chapter 3. Remote Operations - BSe
3-29
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
This chapter provides information to aid the system analyst and the system programmer
in establishing the host-to-3276 communications, using System Network Architecture
(SNA) protocols. A knowledge of the Network Control Program (NCP), IBM access
methods, and/or 3790 concepts, where the 3276 is attached to .3790, is assumed. The
IBM access methods supporting SNA are VTAM, teAM, and EXTM.
Additional information on SNA can be found in Systems Network Architecture Format
and Protocol Reference Manual: Architecture Logic, SC30-3112. Information to assist
the host programmer in planning the use of SNA commands and access method macros
can be found in the following publications:
VTAM:
VTAM Concepts and Planning, GA27-6998.
VTAM Macro Language Reference, GC27-699S.
VTAM Macro Language Guide, GC27-6994.
TCAM:
TeAM Concepts and Application OS/VS, GA30-2049.
TCAM Programmer's Guide OS/VS1, GC30-20S4.
TCAM Programmer's Guide OS/YS2, GA30-2041.
EXTM Option of CICS/DOS/VS:
EXTM Version 1.0 General Information, GH20-1S97.
EXTM Version 2.0/3.0 General Information, GH20-1702.
3790 Communication System:
Introduction to the IBM 3790 Communication System, GA27-2807.
Network Control Program:
IBM 3704 and 3705 Communications Controller Network Control Program/VS Generation
and Activities Guide and Reference Manual, GC30-3008.
Transmission Formats
The host program and the 3276 communicate using half-duplex, flip-flop, send-receive
protocols~ When the host program or the 3276 program is transmitting data, it assumes
the role of the sending Logical Unit (LU). The LU to which the transmission is directed is
the receiving LU. [An LU is the logical entity that communicates on behalf of an end
user (such as a terminal or application program).] The term outbound refers to transmissions from the host to the 3276. The tenD inbound refers to transmissions from the
3276 to the host.
Otapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-1
The portions of a transmission between the host and the 3276 that are discussed in
this chapter are:
• Request/Response Header (RH). This header describes the type of message being
transmitted and contains indicators that control SNA protocols.
• Request/Response Unit (RU). This contains the data or commands that flow in the
transmission. (Note that occasional reference is made to a Null RU, that is, an RU
that contains no data.)
• Transmission Header (TH). This header contains format identification, mapping fields,
and an expedited flow indicator.
The 3276 can communicate with the host system by means of a teleprocessing network
that uses the synchronous data link control (SDLC) transmission format. A description
of SDLC transmission format is found in the IBM Synchronous Data Link Control General
Information manual, GA27-3093.
Session Components
Within SNA, communication takes place between LUs. For 3276 operation, the host always
contains the Primary Logical Unit (pLU), and the 3276 contains the Secondary Logical
Unit (SLU). The 3276 can have from 1 to 8 SLUs (addresses 2 through 9).
A set of logical connections, called sessions, is required to control the exchange of
data and control infonnation between the host program and a 3276 SLU. At the
host system, the access method provides the System Services Cohtrol Point (SSCP)
function for all sessions that are established with the 3276. The SSCP maintains information that allows a PLU to establish and maintain an LU-LU session with a specific
3276 LU.
SNA Sessions
The sessions that must exist between the host system and the 3276, for an access
method application program and the 3276 to exchange information, are as follows:
SSCP-PU [access method - 3276 Physical Unit (PU)]
SSCP-PLU (access method - host program)
SSCP-SLU (access method - 3276 SLU)
PLU-SLU (host program - 3276 SLU) (referred to as LU-LV)
The following paragraphs discuss the sessions individually and identify how they are
established and terminated. The SNA commands that establish and terminate the sessions
are identified. SNA commands are discussed in detail under the heading "SNA Commands."
SSCP-PU Session
Before establishing the SSCP-PU (access method - 3276 control unit) session, the
physical transmission or channel connection to the host must be established.
4-2
The SSCP·PU session must be established before establishing the SSCP·SLU or LU·LU
sessions. When the access method network operator activates a specific 3276, the access
method issues the Activate Physical Unit (ACTPU) command to the control unit. A pre·
defined start procedure for the access method may also request the activation of specific
3276 control units. The SSCP-PU session is the fust session established between the
host system and the 3276.
The SSCP·PU session is terminated when the access method network operator deactivates
the 3276. When all SSCP·LU sessions for the control unit have been tenninated, the
access method issues the Deactivate Physical Unit (DACTPU) command. When the 3276
returns a positive response to the DACTPU comman<;l, the SSCP·PU session is terminated.
Figure 4-3 lists commands that are valid for the SSCP·PU session.
SSCP-Secondary LU Session
When the SSCP·Pq session is established, an activate command may be issued to the
access method to establish the SSCP-SLU session. The access method will issue an
Activate Logical Unit (ACTLU) for the appropriate SLU or SLUs in the 3276. The
SSCP-SLU session must be established before establishing the LU·LU session.
The SSCP-SLU session is terminated when the access method sends a Deactivate Logical
Unit (DACTLU) command to the specified SLU. When the control unit returns a positive
response to the DACTLU command, the SSCP-SLU session is tenninated.
Figure 4-3 lists commands that are valid for the SSCP-SLU session.
LU-LU Session
Initiating an LU·LU Session
Three types of LU-LU sessions are supported by the 3276. Further description of these
sessions is provided later in this section.
The LU-LU session types are:
Type 1 -
The device attached to the 3276 SLU is a printer, and the data stream is
the SNA Character String (SCS).
Type 2 -
The device attached to the 3276 SLU is a keyboard/display, and the data
stream is in the 3270 data stream compatibility (DSC) mode format.
Type 3 -
The device attached to the 3276 SLU is a printer, and the data stream is
in the 3270 DSC mode format.
The SNA Bind command is used to differentiate ~ese types of sessions.
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-3
The command flow sequence required to establish a session is summarized in Figure 4-1.
The command flow nomenclature is generalized, and access method specific macro names
are not used. The example assumes that no sessions are active between the host and
the 3276. The access method sends the ACTPU command to establish the SSCP·PU
session II. ACTLU commands. are then sent to establish SSCP·PLU and SSCP·
SLU sessions. The SSCP·PLU session can be established by the host application any
time prior to logon. The network is now ready for LU·LU sessions to be established.
Host System
Host
Application
Program
3276
SSCP
(Access
Method)
ACTLU
(SSCP-PLU)
fJ
D
fJ
ACTPU (SSCp.pU)
Physical Unit
ACTLU (SSCP-SLU)
m
Open Session
II
.
II
I
Logon
I
Bind
+Resp
.
I
Display
or
Printer
Logical Unit
2
I
I ____
1-
_ Logon Exit
-
I
1
- - - ..
I
1______
II
Logon
Logical Unit
3
IJ
Display
or
Printer
~
Logical Un it
4
,.--
~~
"roo-
L. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ....
Logical Unit
n*
*The highest LU number for a 3276 is 9. (Note that LU1 is reserved for the 3276.)
Ffsure 4-1. Establishing a Session with a 3276
44
Display
II orPrinter
Display
or
Printer
~
An LV-LV session is started by the host application program when it issues the Bind
request. The LU-LU session may be initiated by the host application program (for
example, acquiring the terminal or by a simulated logon) or by the display tenninal
operator II (a character-coded logon). If a character-coded logon is received by the
access method, the access method translates the logon request and schedules a logon
exit II for the PLU. After the PLU receives control at the logon exit, or when the
PLU acquires a terminal, the PLU passes an open session request to the access method
iii which results in an SNA Bind II being passed to the SLU. The 3276 LU
examines the session parameters of the Bind and, if they are acceptable, allows the
session to be established by sending a positive response II to the Bind command. If
the session parameters are not acceptable, the 3276 LU rejects the Bind command by
returning a negative response, indicating that the session parameters are invalid
(sense code X'OS21 '). Also, if power is not on at the device, a negative sense code
X'OSOA' or X'OS4S' is returned to the Bind. Figure 4-4 identifies the bind parameters
that can be specified for 3276 sessions.
After the Bind command has been accepted with a positive response, the host program
can issue the Start Data Traffic command to allow data traffic to flow for the session.
The manner in which an LU-LU session may be initiated depends on the type of session
being started. A type 1 or type 3 session must be initiated by the PLU. A type 2
session may be initiated by either the PLU or SLU.
3276 Attachment to a 3790
When the 3276 is attached to a 3790, the 3790 provides the services otherwise provided
by the host access method. The logon message from the tenninal operator is intercepted
by the 3790 and examined to detennine whether the session is to be established with the
3790 itself or with an application program in a host that is communicating with the 3790.
Tenninating an LV-LV Session
The PLU can terminate an LU-LU session by requesting that the SSCP close the session.
The SSCP then sends the Unbind command to the secondary LU and the LU-LU session
is terminated.
Type 2 sessions can also be terminated by the display operator in either of two ways.
The fust method is to notify the PLU (where supported), on the LU-LU session, that
tennination is desired; the PLU then terminates the session. In the second method, the
display operator changes from an LU-LU session to an SSCP-SLU session by use of the
System Request (SYS REQ) key and enters a logoff message. The SSCP then passes the
logoff request to the PLU, if the logoff message is conditional, or issues the Unbind for
the PLU if the logoff message is unconditional. When the 3276 is attached to the 3790,
all logoff requests are treated as unconditional.
A PLU may close the session in an orderly fashion by issuing a Shutdown command.
When the host program issues the Shutdown command, the 3276 returns the Shutdown
Complete command after completing any outstanding operation and entering the Between
Bracket state. Note that the PLU must close a bracket with end bracket before the
Shutdown command is effective.
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-5
Transmission Header
The 3276 terminals support FID2 transmission headers (TH). The transmission header
consists of 6 bytes:
THO:
FID (Bits 0-3)
MPF (Bits 4,5)
RES (Bit 6)
EFI (Bit 7)
Format Identification
Mapping Field
Reserved
Expedited Flow Indicator
TH1:
RES (Bits 0-7)
Reserved
TH2:
DAF' (Bits 0-7)
Destination Address Field
(See Figure 4-2 and "Device Addressing" in Chapter 1)
TH3:
OAF' (Bits 0-7)
Origin Address Field
Sequence Number on Normal, ID Number on expedited
flow requests and responses
TH4,5:
Device
Number
Device Adclrea Field
Bits: 0 1 234 667
PU
••
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
•• Address reserved.
Figure 4-2. Device Addressing for SNA Terminals
The 3276 handles transmission headers received on outbound requests as follows:
1. All reserved parameters are ignored on requests.
2.
MFP - The 3276 supports outbound segmenting for FM data.
3.
EFI - The expedited flow indicator identifies normal (0) or expedited (1) flow
requests.
EFI=l
The 3276 supports the following requests as outbound expedited flow requests:
RUCategory
Request
SC
ACTPU,DACTPU,ACTLU,DACTLU,B~,UNBEND,CLEA~
NC
DFC
FMD
SDT
Not supported
SIGNAL, SHUTDOWN
Not supported
When the 3276 receives any requests listed above with correct categories and EFI=l,
they will be passed through for further processing. When the 3276 receives any
requests listed above with incorrect categories and EFI=l or any requests not listed
above with EFI=l, it will reject them with the negative response sense code X'lOO3'.
The 3276 handles all expedited flow requests as if they have ONLY-IN-CHAIN, NO
BRACKET, NO CD, NO QRI, and NO PACING.
EFI=O
The 3276 supports the following requests as outbound normal flow requests:
RU Category
Normal Request
SC
NC
DFC
FMD on PLU-SLU
FMD on SSCP-SLU
FMD on SSCP-SPU
Not supported
Not supported
CANCEL, BID, CHASE
Any request
Any in SCS format
REQMS
When the 3276 receives any of the requests listed above associated with the correct
categories and EFI=O, they will be passed through for further processing. When the
3276 receives any requests listed above with incorrect categories and EFI=O or any
requests not listed above with EFI=O, they will be rejected with the negative response
code X'l003'.
SNA Commands
SNA commands define a set of controls to establish and terminate sessions, and to assist
in the management of host-to-3276 data flow and sessions. Three types of SNA commands
are discussed:
• Session Control (SC) commands - These commands establish and terminate sessions in
the network.
• Data Flow Control (DFC) commands - These commands control the flow of data in an
LU-LU session.
• Function Management Data (FMD) command - This command is used to transfer data
in the LU-LU session.
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-7
Commands Supported
The SNA commands supported by the 3276 are listed in Figure 4-3.
SNACommand
1
2
Nama
Type
ACTPU
DACTPU
ACTLU
DACTLU
BIND
UNBIND
SOT
CLEAR
CANCEL
CHASE
LUSTAT
SHUTD
SHUTC
RTR
BID
SIGNAL
DATA
REQMS
RECFMS
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
DFC
DFC
DFC
DFC
DFC
DFC
DFC
DFC
FMD
FMD
FMD
ssep
... ... ... ... ... ...
SSCP
PU
SLU
PLU
SLU
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X1
X
X
X
x2
X
X
Only SLU types 1 and 3
Only SLU types 1 and 2
~
I
Figure 4-3. SNA Commands Supported by the 3276
Command Description
Activate Physical Unit (ACl'PU)
The ACTPU command is sent by the access method to establish the SSCP-PU session
with a 3276 control unit. The SSCP-PU session is established when the 3276 returns a
positive response to the ACTPU command.
The ACTPU command can be transmitted when the SSCP-8LU and LU-LU sessions are
active; for example, when an NCP restart procedure occurs. When the 3276 receives
the ACTPU command, all active sessions are tenninated bnmediately. The 3276 returns
a positive response to the ACTPU command, and the SSCP-PU session is reestablished.
Deactivate Physical Unit (DACTPU)
When the 3276 receives the DACTPU command, all LU-LU and SSCP-8LU sessions and
the SSCP-PU session are terminated. If a command other than ACTPU is received after
a positive response has been returned for the DACTPU command, the 3276 returns a
negative response with sense data indicating PU not active (sense code X'8008').
4-8
Activate Logical Unit (ACTLU)
The ACTLU command is sent by the access method to establish the SSCP-SLU session
with each 3276 control unit LU. The SSCP-SLU session is established when the 3276
returns a positive response to the ACTLU command. The SSCP-PU session must be
established prior to the receipt of ACTLU to allow the 3276 to return a positive response to this command. If the 3276 receives a command other than ACTPU, ACTLU,
DACTPU, or DACTLU before the SSCP-LU session is established, a negative response
is returned with sense data indicating LU not active (sense code X'8009'). Note that
the SLU is in the 3276 and that the session can be activated without a display or
printer being powered on or attached.
When an SSCP-SLU session has been previously established and the 3276 receives an
ACTLU command for that LU, any active session between that LU and a host program
is terminated. The 3276 returns a positive response to the ACTLU command, and the
SSCP-LU session is reestablished.
Deactivate Logical Unit (DACTLU)
Receipt of this command terminates the SSCP-SLU session. If an LU-LU session is
established when the DACTLU command is received, the session is terminated. When
the 3276 receives a command other than DACTPU, ACTPU, or ACTLU after a positive
response has been returned for the DACTLU command, a negative response is returned
.
with sense data indicating SLU not active (sense code X'8009').
Bind
This command is sent by the access method to request an LU-LU session between an
application program and a 3276 SLUe The 3276 returns a positive response to establish
the LU-LU session. When the session cannot be established, the 3276 returns a negative
response with sense data that describes the reason the session was rejected.
The 3276 examines session parameters that are received with the Bind command. The
values required depend on the type of session established. Figure 4-4 provides a
detailed description of the session parameters that are sent with the Bind command.
When the SSCP-SLU session is established and the 3276 receives a command that flows
in the LU-LU session, other than Bind, a negative response is returned with sense
data indicating no session established (sense code X'8005').
If the device attached does not have power on or is physically detached from the 3276
cable port, a negative response is returned with sense data indicating power off (sense
code X'080A').
When an LU-LU session exists, that is, one Bind has been accepted, and the 3276
receives a subsequent Bind command for the LU, a negative response is returned with
sense data indicating session already exists (sense code X'081 5') if the Bind sender
address is the same as the session already found. A negative response indicating
function active (sense code X'0805') is returned if the Bind sender address differs from
the session already found.
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-9
Hex
Value
o
Bit
Setting
Meaning
31
Identifies this RU as a Bind command.
01
Bind type and format.
The only Bind type supported is Hex 01.
2
03
Function management (FM) profile.
Specifies that the data flow control commands and the
request/response protocols that are to be used for this session
conform to FM Profile 3.
3
03
Transmission services (TS) profile.
Specifies that the 3276 conforms to TS Profile 3, that
is, pacing and sequence numbers ale used with normal flow
transmission and that data traffic is controlled bV the Clear and
Start Data Traffic commands.
Primary LU Protocols.
4
X ...... .
Chaining use:
o
The PLU can send only slOgle-tllement chains.
The PLU can send single' or multiple-clement chains .
. X ..••..
Request mode selection:
o
. • X~ .•..
Immediate request mode IS used.
Only one definite response can be outstanding at a time. That
response must be received before the PLU can send another
RU .
Chaining responses:
01 The PLU can only request exception· only responses.
10 The PLU can only request definite responses.
11 The PLU can request definite or exception-only responses.
00 . .
Reserved .
. . X.
Compression indicator:
..• X
Send End Bracket Indicator (EB):
o
Must be O.
The PLU can send the EB.
5
Secondary L U Protocols.
X...... .
Chaining Use:
o
The 3276 can send only single-element chains.
The 3276 can send single-or multiple-element chains.
Note: 0 or 1 for LU type lor 3.
1 for LU type 2.
.X ..... .
Request mode selection:
o
.. XX· •...
Immediate request mode is used.
The 3276 can issue a request for a single definite
response. No further transmissions are sent until the
3276 receives the requested response .
Chaining rtlsponses:
01 The 3276 can only request exception-only resposes.
10 The 3276 can only request definite responses.
.... 00 ..
11 The 3276 can request only exception-only respose .
Reserved.
Figure 4·4 (part 1 of 3). Bind Command Session Parameters
4·10
Hex
Value
Bit
Setting
Meaning
..•.•. X.
Compression indicator:
o
....
• •. X
o
6
The 3276 cannot send compressed data.
Send End Bracket indicator (EB) .
The 3276 cannot send the EB.
Common Protocols.
0 ...
Reserved.
.X ..
Function management
o
.. X .••..
(FM~
header usage:
The PlU and the 3276 cannot exchange FM headers .
Brackets usage:
1 • Bracketed session is used. Both the PlU and the 3276
must use bracket protocols .
•.• X ..••
Bracket termination protocol:
Bracket termination rule 1 is used (refer to "Bracket
Protocol" for a description of bracket termination rule
X. . .
1~.
Alternate Code selection:
o
Both the PlU and the 3276 must use EBCDIC.
Both the host program and the 3276 can use an alternate
code. An example of an alternate code is ASCII.
. . . . . 000
Reserved.
Common Protocols.
7
XX..... .
Normal Flow Send/Receive mode
(selection~:
10 This session uses half-duplex, flip·flop (HDX FF~ trans'
miSSions. Refer to "Session Processing States."
.. X ...••
Recovery responsibility:
o
•.. X .••.
o
000 .
..• X
The PlU is responsible for error recovery .
Brackets first speaker:
The 3276 is always the first speaker.
Reserved.
Contention resolution:
o
Contention (simultaneous transmissions from the host
program and the 3276) is resolved in favor of the 3276.
8
OOxx xxx x
Secondary·to·primary lU pacing count. If set to zeros,
pacing is not used.
9
OOxx xxxx
The primary' to-secondary pacing value defines the number
of RUs that may be received by the 3276 before a pacing
response must be returned to indicate readiness for another
block of RUs. If set to zeros, pacing is not used. See "Pacing"
for recommendations of pacing values.
10
xx
Maximum RU size sent by the secondary LU. This value
represents the largest RU that can be sent by the 3276.
It is expressed as a mantissa (8 through F~ and an exponent
value of 2 by which the mantissa is multiplied. For example,
when the mantissa is speJ;ified as 8 and the exponent of 2 is 5
(hex 85~, the AU size represented is 256 bytes. Examples of
mantissa and exponent values used by the 3276 are shown
below with the RU size they represent:
86"'512
C7=1536
C6=768
E7=1792
87"'1024
88=2048
Figure 4·4 (part 2 of 3). Bind Command Session Parameters
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4·11
Byte
Hex
Value
Bit
Setting
Meaning
See "RU Lengths Supported" for detailed information about
values supported by the 3276.
11
XX
Maximum RU size sent by the primary LU. This value represents
the largest RU that can be sent by the PLU and is specified in
the same format as for the secondary LU (byte 10). See "RU
Lengths Supported" f.or detailed information about values
supported by the 3276.
12. 13
0000
Reserved.
For SLU Type 1:
14
01
Type 1 print function using SCS data stream.
15·17
00
Reserved.
18
E1
Sent but not checked by the 3276 for LU type 1.
19
00
Reserved.
Not supported for LU tYpe 1.
20-24
For SLU Types 2 and 3:
02
Type 23270 data stream compatibility mode.
14
03
Type 3 3270 print function using 3270 data stream.
15-19
00
Reserved.
XX
Refer to Figure 1·8 for LU type 2.
Refer to Figure 1·9 for LU type 3.
14
120. 24
For all SLU Types:
25+
Reserved.
Figure 4·4 (part 3 of 3). Bind Command Session Parameters
Session parameters included in the Bind command RU defme the protocols that govern
the session. Figure 44 describes contents of a Bind command RU that are supported
by the 3276 and explains how the session parameters are used. A generalized setting
for the access method logmode table is listed under "Bind Default" later in this chapter.
Also listed (under "Bind Check") are the checks that the 3276 makes when the Bind
command is received. Specific customer optimization or device features may require
changes for each installation.
Also listed in this chapter (under "Logical Unit Status") are the checks made by the
3276 for each logical unit type. Failure to properly specify the required session parameters results in rejection of the Bind command by the control unit because the session
parameters are invalid (sense code X'0821 ').
4-12
Unbind
Receipt of this command directs the 3276 to terminate the LU-LU session between a host
program and a 3276 SLU. The LU-LU session is terminated when the 3276 returns a
positive response to the Unbind command.
Clear
Receipt of the Clear command causes the 3276 to enforce the data-traffie-reset state
upon the LU-LU session. Clear also causes the 3276 to initialize all inbound and outbound transmission buffers. When data-traffic-reset state is activated for an LU-LU
session, only the following commands are valid for that session: Clear, Unbind, and
Start Data Traffic (SDT).
Start Data Traffic (SDT)
This command allows data traffic to flow during an LU-LU session. The SDT command
must be issued after a Bind command has established the LU-LU session. It is also
sent after Clear to complete a session resynchronization sequence with the 3276. SDT
is valid only when the data-traffic-reset state is active for an LU-LU session.
To complete a session resynchronization sequence, the host program must request
transmission of the SDT command from the access method.
Cancel
When received, normal SNA usage of this command directs the receiver to discard all
elements of the chained transmission being received. However, the 3276 processes data
RUs to the display or printer as they are received without waiting until end-of-chain.
Therefore, the Cancel command serves the purpose of providing a proper termination
for an otherwise incomplete chain. A Cancel command received between chains only
affects the 3276 state controlled by the change direction (CD) and end bracket (EB)
bit settings carried in the RH with the Cancel command. Processing of a chained
transmission is terminated when the Cancel command is received. ED or CD may be
sent with the command.
When a chained transmission is in progress, and the 3276 returns a negative response
to an element of that chain, the PLU should terminate that chained transmission and
issue the Cancel command if the last chain element has not already been sent to the
3276.
When sent by the 3276 type 2 SLU, the Cancel command directs the PLU to stop processing a chained transmission and to discard all elements of the chain that are
currently being received. The Cancel command is substituted for the end of the chain
I if a 3178, 3278, or 3279 failure or operator action prevents transfer of all data from the
display to the 3276.
OIapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-13
When the PLU returns a negative response for an element of a chain, the following will
happen:
• For a 3276 when inbound pacing is not used, the entire chain will be transmitted
before the PLU response is examined. Cancel will not be sent.
• For a 3276 when inbound pacing is used, the negative response from the PLU will be
examined only if the 3276 must look for a pacing response. If the negative response
is examined, the 3276 will send Cancel and will not transmit the remaining elements
in the chain. If the negative response is not examined, the entire chain will be
transmitted and Cancel will not be sent.
In either case, the PLU should discard all elements of a chained transmission after
sending a negative response.
Chase
Chase is used to confmn that all preceding requests have passed through the network
and have been processed. When this command is received, the 3276 returns a positive
response to the PLU, indicating all previous chains have been processed.
The PLU should complete or cancel the current chained transmission before issuing the
Chase command. When a chained transmission is sent with exception-only responses
requested, the Chase command can be used to verify that all responses for that chain
have been received. The EB or CD indicators can be issued with the Chase command.
Bid
The Bid command is sent by the PLU to a 3276 SLU to request permission to begin a
bracket. The use of Bid avoids long chains of data using transmission time and then
being discarded because SLU won bracket contention. If the Bid is accepted by the
SLU, a positive response is returned and the SLU goes to begin-bracket-pending state
and waits for the request containing BB.
A 3276 SLU can reject a Bid command by winning bracket contention for the following
reasons:
1.
LUType 2
• The 3276 is already In Bracket (INB) and a PLU protocol error exists. The sense
code returned is X'0813'.
• The operator has initiated an inbound data stream carrying Begin Bracket (BB).
The sense code returned is X'0813'.
• An operator has started to enter data on the screen but has not initiated an
inbound data stream. The sense code returned is X'081B'.
2.
LU Type 1 or 3
• The SLU is already INB and a host program protocol error exists. The sense code
is X'0813'.
• A printer attached to the 3276 is busy doing a local copy operation. The sense
code returned is X'0814'. The 3276 will send the Ready to Receive (RTR)
command to the host program when the printer becomes not-busy and a BB
can be accepted by the secondary LU.
4-14
~I
Signal
The PLU can send the Signal command to the 3276 SLU to request the Change Direction
(CD) indicator. The SLU will complete any chained transmissions that are in progress
and send the CD to the PLU. A request with CD but no data (a Null-RU) will be sent
if the SLU is in send state but has not started transmitting. If the SLU is already in
receive state, BETB, or ERPI state (see "Session States"), the Signal is positively
responded to but no SLU action is taken.
The 3276 will send the Signal command (X'OOOlOOOO') when the tenninal operator
presses the keyboard ATTN key or, for an LU type 1, either of the printer PA switches.
The command is expedited and has no effect on SLU states. Once Signal has been sent
by an SLU, pressing the ATTN or PA keys will not cause a second Signal until the 3276
has received a response to the rust Signal.
LU Status (LUSTAT)
The 3276 SLU sends the LUSTAT command to notify the PLU that a processing error
has been detected or that a change in the operational status of a device has occurred.
A 4-byte status code is sent by the 3276 SLU to describe the error condition or the
device status change.
For LUSTAT codes and conditions that detennine which LUSTAT is sent, refer to
"Logical Unit Status" later in this chapter.
Ready to Receive (RTR)
A 3276 type 1 or 3 SLU sends this command to indicate when a previously rejected
bracket (with sense code X'0814') can be initiated by the host program. The RTR
command is allowed only when the session is ready to receive new bracket.
When the RTR command is sent and a positive response is received from the host
program, the printer LU enters begin-bracket-pending state and expects the host
program to begin a bracket.
REQMS
The Request Maintenance Statistics (REQMS) conunand is sent by the SSCP to a 3276
when the Network Detennination Aid Processor (NOAP) requests PU perfonnance
statistics. Four types of requests can be made:
• Type 1 - Link Test Statistics
• Type 2 - Summary Counters
• Type 3 - Conununication Adapter Data Error Counts
• Type 5 - 3276 Machine Level Infonnation
The state of the RESET/NO RESET indicator in the REQMS request detennines whether
or not the log area where the transmitted maintenance statistics are stored is cleared.
An REQMS request that cannot be executed by the 3276 is rejected with a negative
response; an accepted REQMS request receives a positive response and the requested
statistics (fonnatted as RECFMS) as an inbound message.
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-15
RECFMS
Record Fonnatted Maintenance Statistics (RECFMS) is sent by the 3276 to the SSCP in
response to an REQMS command (the 3276 will not send unsolicited RECFMS requests
to the host). The RECFMS maintenance statistics are recorded at the host by the Network Communications Control Facility (NCCF).
When the 3276 accepts an REQMS request, it transmits the maintenance statistics
requested. If the REQMS specified "RESET", the error log area referenced by the
REQMS is reset by the 3276 after the 3276 receives a positive response to the
RECFMS; otherwise, the error log area is not reset.
For descriptions of the RECFMS responses, refer to Appendix G.
Shutdown
The PLU sends the Shutdown command. Receipt of this command directs the 3276 SLU
to prepare for a session tennination sequence. The 3276 returns a positive response
to the PLU, but data-transfer sequences are not inhibited.
The Shutdown command causes the session to enter shutdown-complete-pending state.
The pending state is maintained until the SLU completes nonnal flow processing and
goes between bracket (BETB). The SLU then sends the Shutdown Complete command
to thePLU.
Shutdown Complete
This command is sent by the 3276 after the Shutdown command has been received from
the host program and an End Bracket has caused the SLU to go to BETB state.
When the Shutdown Complete command is sent to the PLU, the session enters shutdown
state. When shutdown state is active, no data transmissions can be sent to the PLU;
the PLU, however, may continue to send data to the 3276.
The PLU may either tenninate the session using Unbind when the Shutdown Complete
command is received from the 3276, or use Shutdown as a means of quiescing traffic.
Exit from Shutdown Complete requires a Clear and SDT if the command is used as a
quiesce function.
FMData
This command is used to transfer data in the LU-LU session or in SSCP-LU session.
It may only be sent in LU-LU session when data traffic is allowed (SDT has been
issued and received a positive response).
When communicating with a 3276 SLU, the following PM data protocols are used:
Bracket: Bracket protocol is used to delimit a series of related inbound and outbound
FM data request units (RUs); for example, all the RUs required to complete a
transaction.
4-16
r-\,
Chaining: Chaining logically connects one or more RUs from a single LU; for example,
all RUs required to complete a display image
Change Direction: Change direction informs the receiving LU that the sending LU has
completed transmission and expects the next transmission to be from the receiving LU;
for example, the PLU has transmitted a complete fonn image and expects the next
transmission to be from the display operator when the blank fields in the form image
are filled in.
Bracket Protocol. The 3276 provides a bracket protocol to delimit a series of related
inbound and outbound requests. A bracket may consist of one input and one output,
many sets of inputs and outputs, or a series of requests flowing in a single direction.
The Begin Bracket (BB) and End Bracket (EB) indicators are used to delimit a bracket.
References are made to bracket states (BETB and INB); these states are described
under "Bracket States."
A bracket is initiated when the Begin Bracket (BB) indicator is accepted by the
primary or secondary LU. The bracket is usually ended when the End Bracket indicator
(EB) is received by the secondary LU. The specific conditions that end a bracket are
dermed by SNA bracket tennination rule 1 (see below). Two commands, Bid and Ready
to Receive (RTR), are implemented to further defme the initiation of a bracketed
session. These commands are described under "SNA Commands."
The following protocols apply for 3276 bracket processing.
For sessions with type 2 SLUs, the SLU may begin a bracket any time the session is
between brackets. The PLU may request pennission to begin a bracket using Bid. If
the SLU returns a positive response, the PLU may begin a bracket. If the SLU
returns a negative response, the PLU must wait for the next BB from the SLU.
F or type 1 and 3 sessions, the PLU may begin a bracket any time the session is
between brackets (the only time the SLU will begin a bracket is when the operator
presses the PA key). The PLU may start a bracket by sending a transmission that
contains BB or by sending Bid, waiting for a positive response, and then sending a
transmission that contains BB.
The PLU may attempt to initiate a bracket by simply sending a transmission with BB.
If a contention situation exists (the SLU begins a bracket before receiving BB from
the PLU), the SLU returns a negative response to the PLU's transmission and then
discards all portions of the chain from the PLU. The SLU assumes that its transmission
will be accepted by the PLU.
If a Bid or BB from the PLU is rejected, the 3276 will do the following:
• For a session with a type 2 SLU, the SLU sends BB when it next has data to send.
The PLU may return its data when it receives Change Direction (CD) .
• For a type 1 or 3 session with a 3276, the SLU will only reject the PLU's Bid or BB
if the printer is performing a local print function or when a protocol error is detected. When the local print is completed, the SLU will send RTR.
The host program can end a bracket. The 3276 cannot end a bracket.
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4·17
Bracket protocol establishes the following restrictions on beginning and ending
brackets:
1. BB and EB cannot be sent with response RUs ..
2. The EB cannot be sent with the Bid or RTR command. All other normal flow DFC
commands can end the bracket.
3. All outbound. chains that begin a bracket but do not carry EB must be sent with
de~te response requested.
The 3276 supports bracket termination rule 1 as follows:
1. When EB is received and the last element of a chain required defmite response,
the 3276 will enter between-bracket (BETB) state from in-bracket (INB) state after
+RSP to the chain or stay INB after -RSP.
2. When EB is received and the last element of a chain requires exception response,
the 3276 will enter BETB from INB immediately.
The 3276 ignores the BB bit on all outbound requests except PM data, and ignores
EB on all outbound requests except PM data and DFC commands Cancel and Chase.
Chaining Protocol Defmition. A data chain is a complete unit of data that originates
at a single LU. Data RU chaining provides a method of logically defming a complete
unit of data regardless of whether the data is transmitted as a single RU or as a
series of consecutive RUs. Each RU is associated with only one chain. An individual
RU may be the beginning, middle, ending, or only (both beginning and ending) RU in
the chain; the chaining indicators, Begin Chain (BC) and End Chain (EC), are contained in the request header. The following are definitions of each type of RU in a
chain:
First in Chain (FIC)
- Identifies an RU that begins a chained transmission
(RH=BCrEC).
Middle in Chain (MIC) - Is transmitted with all RUs following the BC transmission,
with the exception of the last RU in that chain (RH=rBQ-EC).
Last in Chain (LIC)
- Identifies the RU that completes a chained transmission
(RH=ECr-BC).
Only in Chain (OIC) - Both the BC and EC indicators are included to indicate a
transmission that consists of a single RU. That RU is termed
a single-element chain (RH=BCEC).
A chain is correct if the RUs consist of:
FIC,LIC
or
2. FIC, MIC, ... , LIC
or
3. OIC.
1.
Any other sequence of chaining indicators will cause a chaining error.
4-18
Chaining Operations. When the 3276 receives a chain with chaining indicators in an
improper sequence (for example, FIC, MIC, FIC), a negative response, with sense
data indicating a chaining error (sense code X'2002'), is returned to the host program.
The 3276 purges the chain, ignoring subsequent elements of the chain until a data RU
with the LIC or a Cancel cormnand is received. Receipt of an OIC data RU tenninates
the purging of a chain; the OIC message is also purged. Sending RUs having chaining
indicators in the sequence FIC, MIC, OIC is a violation of chaining protocol. In this
case, when the 3276 receives the OIC transmission, the chaining error is detected,
the OIC transmission is purged, purging of chain elements is stopped, and a negative
response is sent for the OIC transmission. The 3276 is now ready to normally process
the next chain.
Change Direction. The 3276 uses a half.duplex, flip-flop (HDX-FF) mode to transfer
normal flow data. Only one of the two LUs in the session may send at a given time.
The flip·flop protocol demands that, when one LU is sending, the other must be prepared to receive. Therefore, the two states of send and receive (RCV) exist on each
end of the session.
A bit in the request header, called the Change Direction (CD) indicator, is used to
keep the two end-point LUs in synchronization. Each time an LU accepts this CD in a
request, it means it is that LU's tum to send. Each time an LU sends the CD in a
request, that LU must then be prepared to receive. The 3276 always sends CD with
EC or OC in an FMD RU. Exceptions may occur following negative responses. See
"ERPl" state.
Pacing
Inbound and outbound pacing is supported by the 3276. Pacing is used as a tuning
parameter for the system. Usage comments are included here; however, control is under
the user's discretion at NCP or equivalent defmition time.
The pacing count (N) determines the number of normal flow request RUs that can flow
before a pacing response is required to allow the next group of N RUs to continue. A
special response designated as Isolated Pacing Response (IPR) is used to return the
pacing response if a response to the outbound request is not required at the time the
pacing response is required. The 3276 will indicate readiness with a pacing response
as soon as printer buffers become available after receiving the pacing request. Thus,
the number of normal flow RUs allowed in the network due to pacing is up to 2N-l.
RUs may vary in length as 'specified in the Bind parameter.
LUType 1
For the 3276, device dependencies exist because the printer is slower than the displays.
Care must be exercised in the use of pacing and/or definite response protocol so that
waiting RUs and/or chains are not stacked in the 3276 link buffers.
Within a chain, the 3276 transfers RUs from the link buffer pool to the printer buffer
as they are received. The pacing parameter is then used to ensure that there is
adequate printer buffer space so that the link buffer pool does not fill and restrict
data flow to the keyboard displays or other printers.
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4·19
During the transmission of multiple chains, interaction occurs between pacing and the
type of response requested. When a definite response is requested, a response for a
chain must be received by the PLU before it can send the next chain. When exception
response is requested, the PLU may send any number of consecutive chains without
waiting for a response. Therefore, a defmite response enforces a type of pacing.
~
When ole RUs are used that are less than, or equal to, 256 bytes, it is redundant to
specify both pacing and defmite response; unnecessary network traffic will occur if
both are specified. When chains with multiple RUs are used, pacing is necessary even
though defmite response is requested.
During the transmission of multiple chains, the 3276 waits for each chain to be processed by the terminal before removing the next chain from the link buffer pool.
Therefore, while ole RUs of 256 bytes or less may be acceptable (based on the
available buffer capacity), the link buffer pool may be depleted and data flow to the
keyboard displays restricted if the pacing count is greater than one and exception
response is used. The pacing count should not be greater than two or three; one is
recommended.
If 3276 SLU type 1 receives more normal flow requests than it is guaranteed by using
the outbound pacing mechanism, and the printer buffer does not have enough space
I left to store the outbound data, a -RSP using sense code X'080l' will be returned.
The 3276 will respond to the RU causing the overrun.
LV Type 1 and 3
For LU type 2, the 3276 will generally operate faster than the link, and pacing is not
required for the controllers.
For LU type 3, the defmite response required when the wee Start Print bit is set is
an effective alternative to pacing.
In teleconununication networks where RUs are processed through more than one communication controller (for example, a 3704 and a 3790 or two 3705s), outbound pacing
may be required for type 2 and 3 LUs to prevent data traffic congestion in these
controllers.
Inbound pacing is supported by the 3276. Usage in a tree-structured network may not
be required. Usage in large telecommunication networks may require inbound pacing to
prevent congestion at communication controllers in the network. If a 3276 is attached to
a 3790, refer to 3790 documentation for detailed information about inbound pacing
support.
SNA Responses
The RH contains indicators that describe the type of response given: Definite Response
1 (DRl) or Defmite Response 2 (DR2). The RH also contains an Exception Response
(EX) indication that is used when describing the response protocol. Defmite response
protocol (DRlrEX or DR2rEX) specifies that a response, either positive or negative, must
be given. Exception response protocol (DRl EX or DR2 EX) specifies that only a
negative response may, or need be, returned.
The only defmite response type requested by the 3276 is Definite Response 1 (DRl).
The response protocol requested by the 3276 (defmite response and/or exception
response) is defmed in the Bind.
4-20
~
The 3276 will respond to a message from the host with any requested response type
(DR!, DR2, or both). The 3276 supports defmite response or exception response
protocols.
No distinction is made (within this chapter) between the specific response types. The
teon "positive response" indicates successful receipt of a command or data RU. The teon
"negative response" indicates that the receiving LU detected an error, which is reported
to the sending LU.
Summary of SNA Commands
Figure 4·5 summarizes the validity of SNA commands received by the 3276 relative to
the sessions (SSCP·PU, SSCP·LU, and LU-LU) to two LU·LU session processing states
(Data Traffic Reset and In Brackets). Figure 4-6 shows the same for SNA commands
sent by the 3276.
LU·LU Session
Proceaing States
SNA
Command
Received
SSCP.PU
Session
Active
SSCP·LU
Session
Active
LU·LU
Seaion
Active
ACTLU
R
E
T
ACTPU
E
T
T
DACTLU
R
T
T
DACTPU
R,T
T
T
Data
Traffic
Reset
On
Off
BIND
E, I
UNBIND
R,T
CANCEL
R
CHASE
R
CLEAR
R
SOT
R
X
SIGNAL
R
R
SHUTDOWN
R
R
FM DATA
R
R
REQMS
In
Bracket
On
Off
X
X
R
R
X
X
R
R
Legend:
R - Required state for this command to be valid.
I - Command invalid if in this processing state.
E - Command establishes this session.
T - Command terminates this session.
X - Command sets the processing state to the indicated status.
Figure 4·5. Summary of SNA Commands Received
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-21
LU·LU Slaion
Procealng States
Data
Command
SSCp.pU
Slaion
SSCP·LU
Sealon
LU·LU
Sealon
Sent
Active
Active
Active
SNA
In
Reset
Bracket
On
Off
On
Off
LUSTAT
R
R
SIGNAL
R
R
CANCEL
R
R
READY
TO REC.
R
R
R
SHUTDOWN
COMPLETE
R
R
R
FM DATA
R
R
RECFMS
R
Legend:
R - Required state for this command to be valid.
Ffsure 4~. Summuy of SNA Commands Sent
4·22
Traffic
R
R
Sample SNA Command Sequences
Figures 4·7 through 4·13 illustrate the use ofSNA commands. Responses to commands
are not shown unless the response is a necessary part of the example.
3276 SLU
Type 2
HOST
FIC
E
BB
MIC
LIC
E
E
•
OIC
.
•
CD
E
•
•
•
CD
FIC
•
LIC
CD
OIC
EB
•
. . Initial conditions: Session established and both ends in contention·between-bracket state.
SLU type 2 initiates a bracket and sends a chain as a result, for example, of Enter key
depression.
•
After the required exchange of chains is completed, the host ends the 'uhit of work' by
sending EB (an LU type 2 cannot send EB). The EB chain may contain data: for example,
a write to the screen; or it may be a Null AU chain, that is, only AHs.
Figure 4-7. Bracket/Clain - LU Type 2 Initiated (without Contention)
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-23
3276SLU
Type 2
.
HOST
•
C
•
+RSP
FIC
•
BB
•
MIC
•
LIC
CD
OIC
CD
OIC
EB
C
.
BID
•
•
Initial conditions: Session established and both ends in contention between bracket state.
Host sends Bid to indicate intention to begin a bracket.
The +RSP was SLU type 2, go ahead to the host. The host initiated the 'unit of work'
with BB. Note: the h06t h_ the option of going directly to 2, thet iI, Ikipping the Bid.
However, there il a pDI$ibility of Bid rejection, which would f86ult in f86ending the data
. .ociared with 2.
FiguJe 4-8. Bracket/Qain - Host Initiated (without Contention)
4-24
3276SLU
Type 2
HOST
~.
•
~
..:
C
•
:
~
C
•
D
BID
Operator starts
entering data.
II
Operator initiates
enter operation
(preSS8s Enter).
~
-RSP 081B
• II
Fie
BB
•
Lie
eD
•
ole
EB
~
Fie
X
D
BB
BID
-RSP 0813
:
.
II
Operator starts
entering data.
Operator initiates
enter operation.
•
Lie
eD
ole
EB
•
~
Initial conditions: Session established and both ends are in between-bracket state.
The first operator keystroke puts the type 2 SLU in the send (but not transmitting) state.
The type 2 SLU remains in BETB state.
II
The type 2 SLU will reject a Bid (or BB) with 081 B. Receiver in transmit mode.
II
The operator initiates an enter operation; for example, he presses the ENTER key.
The type 2 SLU begins a bracket and transmits the operator-entered data.
II
When the operator presses the ENTER key, type 2 SLU goes to in-bracket (lNB) state.
Type 2 SLU begins a bracket and starts sending data. The host end has sent a Bid (or BB) before
the type 2 SLU first chain element was received. The type 2 SLU rejects the Bid (or BB) with 0813.
Thel8nse code differs from reference 2 because the bracket check is made before the HDX state check.
In raference 2, the bracket check was good.
Fipre 4-9. Bracket/Chain - Host/SLU Contention
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4·25
3276SLU
Type 2
HOST
•
FIC
•
.e
MIC
•
•
C
C
E
SIGNAL
+RSP
•
MIC
•
LIC
CD
II
11
SIGNAL
+RSP
NULLRU
.
•
CD
•
•
~
~
•
CD
•
. . The SLU type 2 receives Signal while sending. The +RSP is returned to acknowledge
receipt of Signal. The Signal is effectively treated as a NO-OP, and the SLU completes
sending of the chain. The SLU type 2 always sends CD with the end of a data chain.
•
CD allows the SLU to send. The operator starts keying in data.
11
Before the operator initiates sending of data, for example, presses the ENTER key,
the host sends Signal. The SLU sends +RSP to Signal, locks the keyboard, and
sends CD.
Fipre 4·10. Signal from Host
4·26
3276SLU
Type 2
HOST
~
~
C
•
.
I(
<
FIC
•
MIC
•
+RSP
•
MIC
•
LIC
CD
OIC
EB
D
•
>
•
SHUTC
•
.
SHUTD
•
UNBIND
II
11
. . The SLU type 2 is alerted that the host wants to shut down. However, a synchronizing
EB must be received before effecting shutdown.
rJ
The SLU goes into shutdown; that is, inbound normal flow (including Signal) is inhibited.
11
The host terminatOl the session. (Nota: The host could clear the condition and continue
by,endlng Clear, SDT In,tead of tBtminatlng the 'fill/on.)
FfsuIe 4-11. Shutdown/Shutclown Complete
Chapter 4. 3176 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-17
3276SLU
Type 2
HOST
FIC
•
E
MIC
•
•
·RSP
C
E
D
~
CANCEL
•
r-'\
D
II
The type 2 SLU receives-RSP to a chain element. Note: Normally, the 3274 or 3276 will
not flXamine any fflSPon,e until the entire chain has been sent and will therefore not
,end Cancel. the result of receiving a -RSP' HOWfJver, when inbound pacIng i, in
effect, mponses are flXamined when the SL U must receive a pacing response before
continuing transmillion. A-RSP will then be detectfld and cau6fl Cancel to be 6IInt
The type 2 SLU sends Cancel to direct the host to discard the chain elements
already received. The SLU goes to receive state. waiting for host recovery action.
Figure 4-12. CANCEL, SLU Type 2 Sending
3276 SLU
Type 1 or3
HOST
•
c
FIC
BB
•
II
•
II
•
11
-RSP 0814
RTR
.
The printer associated with the SLU type 1 or 3 is not available because a local copy
is being done. Consequently. the SLU type 1 or 3 cannot honor the host BB (or Bid).
II
The SLU type 1 or 3 rejects B8 (or Bid) with -RSP X'0814' (Bracket Reject. RTR to
follow).
•
FIC
BB
)
The printer becomes available. and SLU type 1 or 3 send RTR to indicate to the host
that a bracket may be started.
Figure 4-13. RTR - LU Type 1 or LU Type 3 Send
4·28
~
Session Processing States
The 3276 controls the processing of SNA commands, responses, and user data transmissions with a set of session states. Some of these states are dermed by SNA and others
are unique 3276 definitions that cause SNA state transitions. When the 3276 receives
the Clear or Bind command, all 3276 session states are reset.
This section describes the processing states used by the 3276. When several states
relate to a common processing function such as bracket or chain processing, they are
described under a common heading. The remaining processing states are described
individually.
Data Traffic (Reset/Active) State
Reset of all SNA LU-LU states in the 3276 is assured by entering Data Traffic Reset
state. This state is entered when a Bind or Clear command is received from the PLU.
When Data Traffic Reset state is turned off by SDT, the state is referred to as Data
Traffic Active.
When in Data Traffic Reset state for any LU-LU session, the 3276 SLU cannot transmit
data or commands to the host program. The host can send only session-recovery and
session-tennination commands when in this state. The 3276 accepts only data RUs for
an LU-LU session during Data Traffic Active state.
When in Data Traffic Reset state and a data RU or a command other than SDT or
Unbind is received from the host program, the 3276 returns a negative response with
system sense data indicating that data traffic is inactive (sense code X'200S'). No other
state, except Contention, can exist when the SLU is in Data Traffic Reset state.
Contention (CONT) State
The Contention state on the LU-LU session exists only between brackets. In this
state, the LU resources are not allocated. All associated I/O devices are enabled and
the SLU can accept data from either the tenninal or the host, whichever occurs first.
The first arrival triggers a change to Send or Receive state.
For the SSCP-SLU session, Contention state exists between the successful completion
of all chains.
Send (SEND) State
The Send state is common to both contention and HDX FF modes of operation.
In Send state, the 3276 LU resources are allocated for inbound (to the primary) operations. Internally, there are two subdivisions of the Send state. These are referred to
as Send-.xmit (Send-not-transmit) and Send-xmit (Send-transmit). Send-.xmit exists
while the control unit is entering data from a keyboard, MSR, or selector light pen
into the device buffers. The state is entered from contention by the first keystrokes
capable of changing data on the display, or by initial input from the type 2 SLU MSR
or selector light pen or the type 1 SLU PA key. The state is maintained until exited
to Send-xmit by an action causing the data to be sent inbound, generally the ENTER
key. The transition from Send-.xmit to Send-xmit also causes the transition to In
Bracket (lNB) state when leaving contention. The transition always causes the keyboard to be locked and the Input Inhibit (3276 keyboard/display, and 3278 and 3279)
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-29
I and Wait (3276 keyboard/display or 3178,3278, and 3279) indicators to be turned on.
When In Bracket, Send-.xmit is entered from Receive state or ERPI state after successfully
processing an outbound chain carrying CD but not EB.
The type 2 SLU keyboard does not automatically unlock when the Send state is entered
from either Receive state or ERPI state. The keyboard is unlocked only if:
• A previous wce specified keyboard restore, or
• The SLU is in Send state and the tenninal operator presses the RESET key.
After going from Contention to Send-.xmit state, any nonnal outbound requests
received on that session will be discarded and a negative response "Receiver in Transmit
Mode" with sense code X'081B' will be sent. Once INB, any nonnal outbound requests
received on that session (FMD with BB or Bid) while in Send State will be discarded
and a negative response "Bracket Bid Reject" with sense code X'0813' will be sent.
Neither of these responses causes any state change in the 3276 SLU. IfINB and in Send
state, a request received that does not carry BB will be rejected by the 3276 with sense
code X'081B'.
During Send·xmit state, the data is being transferred from the device buffer to the
PLU. Except for a possible LUSTAT, all nonnaI flow chains on the LU·LU session will
carry the CD. The transition out ofSend·xmit depends upon the response type carried
with the inbound request. If a defmite response is requested, the transition from
Send·xmit to Receive takes place after the response to the inbound request is returned
to the 3276. If an exception response is requested, the transition from Send to Receive
takes place as soon as the end-of-chain has been successfully transferred to the transmission link.
The SSCP-8LU session operates in definite-response mode only. Therefore, the transition is from Send-xmit to Contention upon the receipt of a positive response, or from
Send·xmit to Receive if a negative response is returned.
Receive (ReV) State
The Receive state is common to both contention and HDX-FF modes of operation. In
this state, the 3276 LU resources are allocated for outbound (from the PLU) operations.
When RCV state is active, inbound nonnal flow requests cannot be sent. Responses, as
requested, and control commands of the expedited flow can be sent inbound.
Input devices may be activated by a wec character that specifies Keyboard Restore.
However, an attempt to send data to the PLU by an operator, by using the selector
light pen or MSR, or by pressing the ENTER, PA, or CURSR SEL key will not be
allowed.
NonnaI flow traffic from the PLU is passed to the device when it is in Receive state.
This is allowed to halt local device operations by causing the keyboard to be locked
and the Input Inhibited and Wait indicator to be turned OD. A request with a wee
containing the Keyboard Restore bit set to zero is treated as a NO'()P for the keyboard
states; that is, if the keyboard was unlocked before the write, it will remain unlocked
after a successful write. If the keyboard was locked before the write, it will remain
locked after the write.
4·30
.~
For the LU-LU session, Receive state is entered from Contention state if an outbound
nonnal flow message is accepted for processing. It is entered from Send-xmit after
receiving a response from an inbound request carrying CD and defmite response, or
after successfully transferring the chain to the data link when the request carries CD
and exception response. For the SSCP-LU session, Receive state is entered from Contention if an outbound nonnal flow message is accepted for processing. 'It is entered
from Send-xmit if a negative response is received for an inbound request.
F or the LU-LU session, Receive state is changed to Send-.xmit after successfully
processing a last-of-chain carrying the CD. Receive state is changed to Contention
state after successfully processing and responding to· a chain carrying EB, or after
receiving a chain carrying EB which carries exception response requested. Receive
state is changed to ERPl state if any negative response except X'08l3', X'08l4\ or
X'08lB' is returned to the outbound request.
For the SSCP-LU session, Receive state is changed to Contention after returning the
response to the outbound request.
ERPl State
ERPl is a special state created to allow for error recovery protocols. The PLU is always
responsible for error recovery; therefore, the SLU state structure generally is awaiting
an outbound request to correct the error condition. However, ~ere are times when the
SLU must first recover and notify the PLU of its recovery by use of LUSTAT command
before the PLU can take action. Thus, the SLU ERPl state allows a fonn of contention
mode within brackets. This state has the characteristic of being able to receive any
request, but only sending LUSTATs.
When an LUSTAT flows inbound, the SLU remains in ERPl state. This allows successive
LUSTATs to flow without requiring the general exchange of CD between each LUSTAT.
LUSTAT does not request change direction when sent while in ERPl state.
ERPl state is entered by an SLU after responding with any negative response except
X'08l3', X'08l4', and X'08lB'. If the negative response does not change the state to
between-brackets (BETB), the transition to ERPl takes place at end-of-chain.
ERPl state is changed by accepting an outbound chain carrying CD. Following processing of the CD bit, the transition is made to Send state.
When in ERPI state, the keyboard is locked, except for the SYS REQ, ATIN, and
TEST REQ keys.
Bracket States
The 3276 has three major states associated with bracket protocols. These states are
Between Bracket (BETB), In Bracket (INB), and Pending Begin Bracket (pEND.BB).
These states are used to ensure synchronization of traffic between the PLU and the
SLU. Transitions between these states are controlled by the BB and EB bits and by
the Bid command.
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4-31
Between Bracket (BETB) State
BETB state exists when the PLU and SLU are in contention to begin a bracket. This
is the state entered after the SnT conunand is accepted. When the Bid or BB is
\
accepted from the PLU or sent by the SLU, BETB state ends. If the host program
cancels the chain containing the Begin Bracket, or if the SLU sends negative response
for the chain containing the Bid or BB, the 3276 returns to BETB state. BETB state
is nonnally assumed when an EB has been processed successfully.
When a chain carrying both BB and EB is being processed, BETB state is not changed.
The 3276 sets BB on the rust RU transmitted when the control unit enters INB from
BETB.
BETB is tenninated and INB is entered when the first (or only) element of a chain with
BB bit on is. ready to be transmitted; that is, an ENTER, PA, PF, or other attention
key is pressed.
Pending Begin Bracket (pEND.BB) State
In the PEND.BB state, the 3276 is waiting for a bracket to be begun by the host
system. The 3276 either has returned a positive response to a Bid command or has
received a positive response to a Ready to Receive conunand. When the host program
attempts to begin a bracket and the 3276 is in PEND.BB state, the 3276 will not reject
the bracket with sense code X'OS13' or X'OS14'.
In Bracket (INB) State
INB state is entered when the 3276 receives a BB without the EB or when the 3276
begins a bracket. INB state is maintained by the 3276 until the positive defInite re
sponse to the ED chain is returned to the host or until the 3276 receives the last
element of the ED chain when exception response is requested.
3276 Bracket State Errors
Error codes generated for bracket error conditions are shown below; the bracket state
conditions remain unchanged after sending the error code.
~
State
BETB
INB
PEND.BB
4·32
CHASE
IlEB
CHASE
",EB
2003
-
-
2003
-
BID
-
0813
CANCEL
"EB
2003
-
2003
CANCEL
& -, EB
FMD
"BB
FMD
",BB
-
-
2003
0813
-
2003
1"'\
RU Lengths
~
Outbound to the 3276
The maximum RU length that a PLU is pennitted to send is defmed in byte 11 of Bind.
The 3276 accepts a maximum RU size within the following constraints. Note that where
multiple constraints apply, the maximum RU size is limited to the smallest size calculated
by applying each constraint.
For a type 1 SLU in a 3276: The following fonnula ~ppUes:
MRU s;:: 256 X L [_1 X L (BUFF.80)]
PC
256
where:
MRU is the maximum RU size specified in byte 11 of the Bind.
PC is the pacing count specified in byte 9 of the Bind.
BUFF is the device buffer size.
L is the symbol that means round down to the next integer.
Example: If the printer buffer size is 2048 bytes, and a pacing count of2 is selected,
then the maximum MRU that may be specified in Bind byte 11 is 768 bytes.
A Bind reject with sense code X'082 l' will occur if the Bind specifications do not meet
these limits.
For type 2 and 3 SLUs in a 3276: There are no 3276 restrictions.
Inbound from the 3276
The 3276 accepts only a 'Multiple Element Chains' Bind for inbound operation. The
maximum RU size can be controlled by the PLU through byte 10 of the Bind request.
For the 3276, the maximum RU size is 2048. If the value of byte 10 is greater than
the 3276 capabilities, the Bind will be accepted, but the actual RU size will be limited
to device capabilities.
The minimum value that may be specified by byte 10 ofthe Bind request is 256 bytes
for the 3276. If lesser values are specified, the Bind will be rejected with a negative
response, sense code X'0821'. For the 3276, if a mantissa value of byte 10 is less than
8, then minimum value is selected as a default.
(bapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC CommUDlcations
4·33
Segmenting Description
RUs sent to network terminals are often larger than acceptable for optimum transfer
of data by the link connecting the terminal to the network. Therefore, a Basic Information Unit (BIU) consisting of RH and RU may be divided into smaller elements,
called segments, that are transmitted over the link. The 3276 supports inbound and
outbound segmenting on the LU-LU session.
The segment elements are defmed as follows. The First in Segment (FIS) element is
equated to Begin-BIU, not End-BIU. The Last in Segment (LIS) element equates to
End-BIU, not Begin BIU. The Middle in Segment (MIS) equates to not Begin-BIU, not
End-BIU. An Only in Segment (OIS) contains the en~re BIU.
Sequencing of segments is in the correct order if the sequence consists of:
1. FIS, LIS
2. FIS, MIS, ... , LIS
3. OIS
Segmenting Outbound
Errors due to improper sequencing of the segment elements will cause the ·3276 to enter
nonna! disconnect mode. This action does not pennit sending a negative response to
the PLU. The 3276 will also deactivate the physical unit and all logical units. The 3276
Program Check indicator will be turned on and show the segmenting error. The 3276
will also tum off the ON LINE indicator. See Appendix C.
The 3276 passes segment elements through for processing and immediate display or
printing when the terminal is attached using a Teoninal Adapter Type A (for example,
a 3278).
The maximum size for segment elements (the NCP MAX DATA SIZE parameter) delivered
to the 3276 must not exceed 256 bytes of data plus 6 Transmission Header (TH) bytes
and 3 Request/Response Header (RH) bytes for the FIS or OIS. The maximum size for
MIS or LIS must not exceed 256 bytes of data plus 6 bytes of TH. (Because the maximum MIS or LIS length is 262 bytes, specify the MAX DATA value equal to 262 bytes
for the 3276 control unit.)
Continuous rejection of a segment element that is too long is expected to cause a retry
failure in the communication controller, and results in a station inoperative disconnect
by the node. The 3276 will return a Command Reject for this condition. The 3276
depends on the sending node to limit the data length in a segment element to 256 or
fewer bytes of data, and does not check for the overrun error that could occur in
the MIS or LIS. The bytes of data exceeding 256 will be lost.
The Communication Check indicator showing buffer overflow is turned on for all
I operational 3178, 3278, or 3279 displays connected to the 3276 and the 3276 display,
when the control unit detects buffer overflow.
When the 3276 is connected to NCP, the NCP buffer size should be set for one of the
following byte sizes:
4-34
Optimum:
64, 128, or 256 bytes.
Second choice:
84,124,248, or 252 bytes.
~
Segmenting Inbound
Segmenting inbound is supported by the 3276 on the LU·LU session under the following
conditions:
I 1.
When maximum RU size is specified as 256 and accepted at Bind time, no segment·
ing is used by the 3276.
2. When maximum RU size is specified as greater than 256, the RUs are segmented
into segment elements containing 256 data bytes each for FIS or MIS, provided
sufficient data is transmitted to cause segmenting.
When the Bind maximum RU size is greater than 256 bytes, considerations other than
maximum RU size and amount of data to be transmitted may detennine the actual RU
length (~max RU size) that is sent. The 3276 will never send an RU having more than
2048 bytes. The number of segment elements allocated to an RU by the 3276 is variable
and depends on the availability of link buffers when the RU is assembled for transmis·
sion. For example, if the maximum RU size is set to 2000, a sequence of sending 2500
bytes of data might appear on the line as follows:
FIC
MIC
MIC
LIC
:S: 5 12 data bytes
:S: 1280
:S:256
remainder
FIS, LIS
FIS, MIS, MIS, MIS, MIS, LIS
OIS
FIS, MIS, LIS
The 3276 Errors
t"'-\
Data Link
For data link control, action is as discussed in the IBM Synchronous Data Link Control
General Information manual, GA27·3093. Unique action is that the Set Normal Response
Mode command causes the 3276 to reset from an Activated Physical Unit to a Deactivated
Physical Unit. All sessions must be restarted by the sequence starting with ACTPU.
A segmenting error will not be reported by an SNA negative response, but will cause
the 3276 to go to normal·disconnect mode and do an internal DACTPU.
LV-LV Session Error Reporting
A protocol has been established for the reporting of transmission errors and processing
errors during sessions. When the host program or the 3276 SLU is the receiving LU,
errors are reported by returning a negative response to the sending LU, with descrip·
tive sense data included.
The format of the 4·byte sense data RU, sent with a negative response, is as follows:
o
1
2and3
System
Major Code
Sense
Modifier
User
Sense
Chapter 4. 3276 SNA/SDLC Communications
4·35
Byte 0 of the sense data RU is bit-encoded to reflect one of six transmission error
categories, as follows:
Byte 0 in Hex
Major Code B
'80'
'40'
'20'
'10'
'08'
'00'
Path Error
RH Error
State Error
Request Error
Request Reject
User-Defmed Error
~
',-
Byte 1 of the sense data RU is a binary modifier that further defmes the error condition. The modifier encoding is unique to each major code.
Bytes 2 and 3 are zeros for all negative responses sent by the 3276. The section "SNA
Sense Codes" later in this chapter defmes modifier encoding for each major code of
system sense data issued by the 3276.
Note that the 3276 will not examine the sense data in a negative response from the host.
All negative responses on the LU-LU session cause the 3276 to enter RCV state and
await further action by the host.
3276 Session Interaction
Three sessions exist for the 3276 when operating with SNA protocols. These sessions
are: SSCP-PU, SSCP-SLU, and LU-LU (PLU-SLU). The protocols and interactions
between sessions are next described.
The three sessions can exist simultaneously. The SSCP-SLU and LU-LU sessions may
wish to use the display simultaneously.
An interactive protocol is used with the 3276, in which, at any given time, only one
of the sessions is defmed as the device (display screen, keyboard, and data buffer)
owner. During ownership, any attempts by the nonowner session to send FM data is
rejected by the 3276.
The state diagram (Figure 4-14) shows the transfer of device ownership between the
SSCP-SLU and the LU-LU session. Prior to ACTLU, or following DACTLU, no
session can own a device. Local operations initiated by the TEST key are not defmed
as sessions.
Device ownership is indicated to the operator by symbols in column 3 of the Operator
Infonnation Area. (Refer to Figure A-4 for a detailed explanation of Operator Infonnation Area symbols.) Prior to ACTLU or following DACTLU, this column is blank.
ACTLU causes the Unowned symbol to appear.
After ACTLU is received, the SYS REQ key may be used by the operator to control
which session owns the device. When the LU-LU session is not bound and the Unowned
symbol appears in column 3, the SYS REQ key, or an RU from the SSCP, transfers
device ownership to the SSCP-SLU session. At this time the System Operator Symbol
appears in column 3. The operator can then communicate with the SSCP.
If the attached device is a printer or a display without a keyboard, an FM data request
to the SLU from the SSCP while in the unowned state will be rejected with category not
supported sense code X' 1007' .
4-36
I~
Ownership: LU·LU
Symbol: • (My Job)
UNOWNED
m(
.
SSCP·SLU
(System Operator)
Hn
TEST
III
ACTLU+RSP
(Except from TEST ownership)
SYS REQ key or RU from SSCP
TEST key
•
)
character. To post the payment against the selected invoice
numbers, the operator can select APPLY. If, however, the operator cannot easily tell
the invoices to which the payment is applied, he can select CALC instead of APPLY.
Selecting CALC displays Panel 4 (Figure 5-21); this is the same as Panel 3 except
that ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE, which was high intensity in Panel 3 , is now normal
intensity in Panel 4. A new line with CALCULATOR in high intensity indicates the
screen mode and explains the functions of the PF keys. The teoninal operator can
now use the lower right quadrant of the screen as a scratch pad to figure out a
combination of open invoices that will total the payment check. This use of one part
of the screen for a separate function is sometimes called a split-screen capability.
S-30
-
.........." " \ 1 / / / / / " . .
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE -
/ / / / 1 1 1 " " ' ........
ENTER CUSTOMER •
OR CUSTOMER NAME-
CHECK AMOUNT
INVOICE •
PANEL ],
Ffaure 5-18. Panel 1 of an Accounts Receivable AppUcation
• • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • •
ITEM
CUST
NAME/ADDRESS
1.
001.0341.
CAPITAL AVIATION
71.1. HILLSBOROUGH ST.
RALEIGH, N.C.
2761.1.
2
0028472
3
0034020
0041.938
CUST
NAME/ADDRESS
5
0052693
CAP ITOL ELEC TR Ie
56 STATE ST.
MONTPELI ER, VT.
05602
CAPITOL BAKERIES
1.800 MAIN ST.
COLUMBIA, S.C.
29201.
6
0084362
CAPITOL FEATHER co.
899 LOGAN ST.
DENVER, COLO.
802]'7
CAPITOL COLA CORP
1.439 PEACHTREE ST. NE
ATLANTA, GA.
30309
7
0048729
CAPITAL GLASS CO.
],2], STATE ST.
ALBANY, N.Y.
CAPITAL DRUG CO.
201. NORTH 9TH ST.
RICHMOND, VA.
2321.9
8
ITEM
]'l20]'
0038492
CAPITOL HOLDING co.
1.609 SHOAL CREEK B
AUST IN, TEXAS
7870],
PANEL 2
Figure 5-19. Panel 1, ShOwing the Results of a Search on a CUstomer Name
Chapter S. Screen Desfp
5-31
_
..... " , \
\
I , I
'I I I I ,
I , I I , , , ,,_
-::::: ACCOUNTS RECE I VABLE ::::::/~""
CUST •
CAPITOL BAKERIES
CHK AMT
TOT DUE
$1t,000.00
$5,358.1t0
MANUAL
CALC
INVOICE ,
NAME
00281t72
, , , I, , 1'1' , , \ \ \'......,;
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
A984632
BOO031.2
BOO041.8
BOO0964
BOO1.200
BOO1.1t39
BOO1.800
B00201.5
DATE
1.1./01./71.
1.2105/71.
1.2107171.
1.211.1./71.
1.2121./71.
1.2/25/71.
01./1.1./72
01./1.5172
CD)
•
•
GROSS
$],82.50
$178.00
$98.50
$1.,250.00
$682.40
$395.00
$],,029.75
$982.50
NET
$],82.50
$778.00
$98.50
S],,250.00
$682.40
$395.00
S],,009.1.5
$962.85
APPLY
NEXl
PANEL 3
Ftaure 5-20. Panel 3, Showing the Custom~'s Open Invoices
The calculator could be programmed a number of different ways. It could, as our
example illustrates, show in one column in the CALCULATOR quadrant all invoice
numbers selected (shown with> in Figure 5-21) prior to selecting CALC and in another
column show any balance remaining from the check amount after subtracting the
selected invoice numbers. In Figure 5-21, Panel 4 is shown as it would appear if the
tenninal operator had fust selected four invoice numbers and then selected CALC. In
this example, the selected invoices equal the check amount so .00 is shown as the
balance after subtracting the selected invoices.
Panel 4 shows that the CALCULATOR could also allow the operator to key in amounts
and to add or subtract them from the check amount (pressing PF 1 in our example
adds keyed-in amounts; PF2 subtracts one keyed-in amount from another). To start
over at any point, the operator can press PF3 to clear the calculator quadrant. In our
example, the selected invoices equal the check amount, so they can now be posted.
But fllSt the teoninal operator must leave the CALCULATOR routine by pressing PF4
(RETURN). This displays PanelS, shown in Figure 5-22.
Panel 5 is the same as Panel 4 except that, with the operator having signaled completion of the CALCULATOR, the word now appears in nonnal intensity and ACCOUNTS
RECEIVABLE once again appears in high intensity. The terlninal operator can now,
using the selector pen or cursor select, select the invoices against which to apply
the payment and then select APPLY to post the payment.
Panel 6 (in Figure 5-23) shows the ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE flle for the customer after
posting the payment, with the new balance and the total amount applied. To continue
to the next customer, the operator selects NEXT and returns to Panel!.
5·32
Not all the 3270's possibilities are shown in these six panels, and not all users will
have the selector pen or cursor select; this example was designed to show only what
panels are and how the 3270 can be used.
Note that, in the above example, the terminal operator does not see as many panels
as the programmer must create; not all panels necessarily appear to the operator in
any given application. What the programmer regards as separate panels may appear to
the tenninal operator as one changing panel.
In the above example, anumber of additional panels or variations to the panels shown
would be required. For example, if the tenninal operator presses an invalid PF key,
a variation 'of the panel would be required to send a message to the operator over the
panel presently at his display. In programming panels that are variations of one main
panel, it may be useful to assign panel designations (for example, Pane14A, 4B, and
so forth) for variations of Panel 4.
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
CUST ,
NAME
0028472
CAPITOL BAKERIES
CHK AMT
TOT DUE
54,000.00
55,358.40
MANUAL
CALC
APPLY
NEXT
INVOICE"
? A984632
> B00031.2
? B0004]'8
> B000964
? BOO1.200
? BOO]'439
> BOO1.800
> B00201.5
_"
,
DATE
(D)
],1./01.171.
1.2/05171.
1.2/07/7]'
]'211.1.171.
1.2/21./71.
1.2/25171.
0],/1.1./72
0],/],5/72
•
•
GROSS
S1.82.50
1778.00
S98.50
S1.,250.00
S682.40
$395.00
S1.,029.75
S982.50
NET
$1.82.50
1778.00
$98.50
$1.,250.00
$682.40
$395.00
S1.,009.]'5
$962.85
, \ \ \ \ , I I I I I I I I ,', I , I I I I , , I I I I 1,/
~ CALCULATOR
PF1.= + PF2= PF3~ CLEAR PF4=
/"
I I I I , I I I I I I I I I I II I I I I I I I , I , \ \ \
U78.00
$],,250.00
$],,009.1.5
5962.85
RET
"
~
...
.00
PANEL 4
Figure 5-21. Panel 4, Showing Use of the Calculator
Chapter 5. Screen Desfsn
5-33
__, \ \ " , , ' 1 . 1 1 1 III'"".""".
-;:::. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ::::::-
'I"
CUST •
NAME
0028472
CAPITOL BAKERIES
CHK AMT
TOT DUE
14.000.00
15.358.40
MANUAL
CALC
APPLV
NEXT
""1"'\\\\'''''
INVOICE
•
? A984632
> BOO032.2
? BOO042.8
> BOO0964
? BOO2.200
? BOO2.439
> BOO2.800
> B00202.5
(DI
DATE
2.2./02./72.
2.2105/72.
2.2107171
12/2.2./71
2.2/22./71
12125/71
02./12./72
01/15/72
CALCULATOR
••
PF2.- + PF2= 1778.00
11,250.00
$1,009.15
$962.85
GROSS
n82.50
$778.00
198.50
$1.250.00
1682.40
1395.00
$1,029.75
$982.50
NET
$2.82.50
1778.00
198.50
$1,250.00
$682.40
1395.00
$2.,009.15
1962.85
PF3= CLEAR PF4= RET
.00
PANEL 5
Ffpre 5-22. Panel 5, Showfna Selection 01 Invoices after Using the Calculator.
,\"'111111""',
:: ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ::
'1/11111"'"
CUST •
NAME
0028472
CHK AMT
TOT DUE
NEW IAL
CAPITOL BAKERIES
14.000.00
15.358.40
Il.358.40
SEL INV
14.000.00
MANUAL
CALC
APPLV
NEXT
•
A984632
INVOICE
?
? BOO042.8
? BOO3.200
? BOO1439
DATE
2.2./02./72.
2.2/07/72.
2.2/23./72.
2.2I25171
PANEL 6
FJaure 5-23. Panel 6, ShowiDs New Balance alter PostiDg
5-34
\,\,
(DI
GROSS
1],82.50
198.50
1682.40
1395.00
NET
1182.50
$98.50
1682.40
1395.00
Analyzing Input Data
The Operator's Response
When a sign-on panel is displayed, the operator responds by entering name, location,
and serial number as shown in Figure 5-24. As the operator keys this information, the
entered data characters are stored in the display unit's buffer and are displayed as
part of the panel. Data that is entered in a nondisplayable field is stored in the buffer,
but does not appear on the panel.
SIGN-ON PROCEDURE
PLEASE ENTER YOUR SIGN-ON INFORMATION
NAME z JOHN SMITH
SERIAL NUMBERz
LOCATION: BOSTN
96398~
WHEN ALL INFORMATION IS COMPLETE
YOU MAY PRESS THE ENTER KEY
Figure S-24. Sign.()n Panel with Operator's Input
When the operator fmishes entering the reque~ted data, he indicates the end of this
operation by pressing the ENTER key, which causes an automatic Read Modified
command execution and sends the follOwing infonnation to your program:
• An attention code to identify that the ENTER key was pressed.
• The address of the cursor's location.
• The start buffer address code to identify the next 2 characters as addresses.
• The starting addresses of every modified field, followed by the data in the modified
field.
Figure 5-25 shows this sequence of input data, which is explained below.
Addr
first
AID
modified
for
Cursor
Enter address SBA field
Text from
first
modified
SBA
field
Addr of
second
modified
field
Text from ~
second
modified
field
D
Fipre S-2S. Input Data Sequence
Chapter S. Screen Design
S-3S
Attention Identifier (AID)
The Attention Identifier (AID) is a hexadecimal code. By identifying this code, your
program can detennine in which of several possible ways the operator contacted the
program and detennine what request is being made. For example, pressing the ENTER
key requests "Please enter this data."
F or a Read Modified, the AID code is followed by the cursor address, which is the
hexadecimal code for the row and column location of the cursor when the operator
contacted your program.
Input Data
All the modified fields from the panel follow the AID code and the cursor address.
A modified field is any field whose field attribute has the MDT on. A modified field
can be one that was modified by the operator or one that was defmed by you in your
program with the MDT on in its field attribute.
When any character location in an input field is modified by the operator, the MDT in
the field attribute for that field is automatically turned on. An input field is not
necessarily a modified field. If the operator made no entry in the SERIAL field, for
example, only his name, location, and the date would be sent as modified fields to
your program.
The display unit sends all the data in a modified field except nulls. When an operator
fmishes an operation, the display unit reads through the buffer for every field
attribute whose code indicates its MDT is on. Each time one is found, the display unit
provides an SBA code and the starting address (the field attribute's address plus 1) of
the modified field. The SBA code identifies to your program that an address follows.
It is the same X' 11 ' code that you coded in your panel to identify the starting locations
of the panel's text.
SBA Codes
SBA codes identify the incoming data by cross-referencing it to the correct input field.
For the sign-on panel, your program knows that row 6, column 8 (X'C34F') is the start
of the name input field. When it receives the flfSt SBA code (X' 11 '), it checks the
address that follows to see if it is (X'C34F'). If it is, your program knows the text
that follows it (until the next SBA code) is the operator's name and can process the
input accordingly.
The fust part of the input from the sign-on panel is as follows:
5-36
(~
The hexadecimal codes are:
7D:
The AID code for the ENTER key
C4C6:
The cursor address R7, C23. The cursor is at the next character location
after the entered serial number.
11:
The SBA order code which tells the program the next 2 characters are
addresses. (See Figure 5-12.)
C34F:
The location (R6, C8) where the following text is located on the panel.
JOHN SMITH.: The first modified field containing the operator's name.
Program Attention (PA) Keys
Each 3270 keyboard has at least one program attention (PA) key that the operator can
use to request program attention without sending any input data.
The AID codes for the PA keys are shown under a separate heading in Figure 1-17,
because they are not followed by input data even though there may be modified fields
on the panel when a PA key is pressed. All four short read codes consist of just the
AID code.
Your program should use these keys for operator requests for immediate action such
as trouble alerts or requests fot tennination. For example, the assigrunent of several
PA keys might be:
PAl: Tenninate current application
PA2: Return to starting (master) panel
PA3: Explain system message
Program Function (PF) Keys
Program function (PF) keys are a keyboard feature. Your program dermes the function
that each key requests when it is pressed by the operator.
There is a separate AID code for each PF key so that your program can quickly
identify which key was pressed and consequently which function was requested. When
a PF key is pressed, all modified fields on the panel and their addresses are sent with
the AID code and cursor address, the same as the ENTER key. For this reason, aPF
key can be a valuable time-saving device for the operator. For example, the assignment
of several PF keys might be:
PF 1:
PF2:
PF3:
PF4:
PF5:
PF6:
Return to previous panel
Clear (without using data) and repeat current panel
Set up next panel
Page forward
Page backward
Return to page 1
Chapter 5. Screen Design
5-37
Selector Pen and Cursor Select Input and Output
Positioning data for selector pen (optional feature) or cursor select (basic feature on
the 3276, 3278, and 3279) use and setting the attribute characters are the same as for
any other type of data, but the select function has additional data-stream requirements.
Selector Field Format
A field for selector pen operations must be defmed as shown in Figure 5-26. The
cursor select does not require the three-part character that must precede the selector
pen field, although it can be present. Also, the cursor selection can be on any character in the field.
The field attribute, the designator character (described in the next section), and
displayed alphameric characters must be on the same line. If the field is longer than
one line, only those characters on the same line as the field attribute can be detected
by the selector.
SPD
(Selector
Pen
Detectable)
Field
Data
Character
3 Space
Characters
Preceding field (on the same line as the SPD field).
Attribute
Character
The attribute byte defines the field as displayed and
selector·pen detectable. (An SPD field may be protected
or unprotected, alphameric or numeric.)
Designator
Character
The designator character which defines the type of operation
performed by detection on the field.
Displayed
One or more displayed alphameric characters for sensing by
the selector pen.
Characters
Attribute
Character
Three space or null characters must precede the attribute
byte defining the SPD field unless the attribute byte
is the first character on the line.
Three null or space characters are required when a new field
follows on the same line as the SPD field.
Succeeding field (on the same line as the SPD field).
Data
Character
Figure S-26. Defmition of Field for Selector Pen Operation
S-38
Designator Characters
Designator characters derme three types of selector fields: selection and two types of
attention. Each type of field perfonns a different operation.
The selection field is dermed by a question mark (1) designator character. When the
selector can detect a selection field, the MDT bit in the field attribute for that field
is set in the display buffer. Also, the designator character is automatically changed
on the screen to a greater than (» sign to provide a visible indication to the operator
that the detection was successful. If a mistake was made and the operator again detects
on that same field, the > reverts to a ? and the MDT is reset. The first type of
attention field is dermed by a space or null designator character. Pro~ing an attention
field or selecting it with the cursor is similar to using an ENTER key""The input
infonnation is released to be read by the application program when it is ready to do
so. The second type of attention field is the ampersand (&) with the 3276. Probing
this field causes the program to issue a Read Modified command and obtain both the
address and data of each field.
Figure 5-27 shows a sample selector pen panel that illustrates some of the special
input and output data stream considerations.
For output, an Erase/Write creates the panel. In the WCC, you enable input and
optionally reset the MDTs. Next you specify an SBA sequence to get you to Rl, C7,
followed by an SF with a protected attribute.
COLUMN
01
02
03
04
06
06
07
08
09
10
11
~
12
13
Figure 5-27. Sample Panel for Selector Pen or Cursor Select Detection
Chapter S. Screen Design
5-39
This should be followed by the heading "PICK ... COLUMN" and another SBA to R3,
C9. Then specify an SF order, followed by a protected (detectable fields may be protected) and detectable attribute. Next you need the designator "1" followed by "RED":
i
I c I 0 I L I u I MIN I I R31
C91
~ I ; I? 1R1
E
I- D 1
An SBA after "RED" to R3, C2S, provides more than the three required null characters
and positions the SF field attribute and designator for "2 DOOR." This type of sequence
is repeated for the remaining fields to location R7, C28. The designator here must be
a null or a blank so that probing or selecting by the cursor causes the "ENTER" field
to release the selection to the application program.
As the operator uses the selector pen or cursor select, the program correlates the
address of each selector pen detectable field with the data associated with it.
To combine selector pen or cursor select detectable input with keyboard or cursor
select input, use the keyboard to release the data to the application program by
pressing the ENTER key or a PF key. Use of the selector pen or cursor select to
release the data, such as by selecting "ENTER" in our example, transmits only the
addresses of the fields in which the MDT was set unless you are using a 3276 control
unit, in which case the address and data are transmitted.
In the example, if you pick RED and 4 DOOR, the symbolic input would appear as
follows.
Pen
A
Cursor
I
ADDR
D
S
B
A
R3
Cl0
S
B
A
R4
C26
Shortening transmissions by eliminating unnecessary data requires some caution. If
you design a panel requiring both pen selection and keyboard entry, do not put an
attention designator (space or nUll) on the panel. An attention designator after
keyboard entry transmits only the address of the keyboard input field and causes the
loss of its contents. Not having an attention designator on the panel assures you that
an ENTER or PF key will be used, and the modified field contents will be transmitted
(and the words "RED" and "4 DOOR" in the example).
The Relationship of One Data Stream to Another
The examples used so far have assumed that you started with a blank screen and that
you bunt the entire panel into your data stream with Erase or Write commands. This
approach may lead to tedious work and lengthy data streams, which you can avoid if
the panel you wish to display differs only slightly from the one that is presently
displayed. The following discussion deals with modification of existing data streams.
540
/~
Modifying Existing Panels
Suppose the displayed panel is the sign·on panel in the previous sections. If the
operator keys an invalid serial number, you may wish to notify him of his error and
request reentry of the serial number field only. You could create a new error message
panel, write it to the display, require that the operator acknowledge its receipt, create
a special serial number entry panel, write it, and fmally read the corrected serial
number. A better way might be to use the existing sign-on panel.
After the operator has keyed the data and it has been read into the computer, the
screen appears as shown in Figure 5·28. You would like the screen to look like Figure
5·29. Most of the infonnation you want displayed is already there. An Erase/Write or
Erase/Write A1terpate command would clear the screen and require writing a data stream
containing all the infonnation for the new panel. You could use a Write command which
modifies existing data in the 3270's buffer.
To change the panel in Figure 5·28 to look like Figure 5·29:
1. Position the cursor at R7, CI7.
2. Replace the message beginning at RIO, C5 with the error message.
3. Change the attribute at RIO, C4 to high intensity for the error message.
To make these changes, the right side of your panel layout for the error panel might
(in abbreviated fonn) look like Figure 5·30:
Item 1.
Repositions the cursor to R7, C17.
Item 2.
Changes the attribute at RIO, C4 to protected and high intensity.
Note: If the designer of the sign-on panel had combined the original field at
this location with the previous field, with the field "SIGN·ON PROCEDURE, "
and with the following field by omitting the attributes at Rl 0, C4; R2, Cll;
and R4, C2, the result would be undesirable. The attribute placed at Rl 0,
C4 would begin a new field This would not affect the preceding field but,
by wraparound, would cause "SIGN·ON PROCEDURE" and "PLEASE . ..
INFORMA TION" to be high intensity even though they were neither intended
to be so nor rewritten. For this reason you should adhere closely to the
"Field Concept" and not combine fields unless necessary for efficiency; if you
must combine fields, be very careful to avoid undesired results.
Item 3.
Repositions the data flow to correctly place the second line of the error
message. Three characters are used instead of 6 null characters.
Item 4.
Repositions the data flow for the third line of the error message.
Chapter 5. Screen Design
541
COLUMN
01
02
03
04
05
06
01
~~~~~~~~~Ud~~LL~~~~~~un~~~~~
08
09
Fi81ll8 5-28. Modifying an Existing Panel, Basic Panel
FiaUre 5-29. Existing Panel with Error Message
542
Display
Printer
Item Row Col
J
2
~
Dec
Hex
JD
JJ
e
CD
-e
0
Prot
No.
High Sel
Int
Det
l·uIA
07 17
tlU: J OF
~l
.. -t4E
1/2 It't
r-J
"I..]
%
~y
3
IOJ~'
,
,
{
~1I.ftll
"
0 =-
1
/
~
~
NonDisp MDT
Prt
On
\
~
~
04~J
~
Buffer
Address
-
IfRROJ~
M. E~" 161·
.I
~~c.
LI III; ;"
1·,Gi
II
.
IA.~ ~"
~
\.
J
r
1/
Figure 5-30. Panel Layout Changes for Error Message (Keyed to Text)
Since there are two different types of Write commands for the 3276 you must tell the
I/O portion of your program which type to use for the data stream. You may want to
indicate the type you want in a comment in the data stream. It is suggested that you
establish some convention for indicating command selection by discussing it at your
installation with the people responsible for the I/O portion of the program.
In Figure 5-28, assume that the operator now keys "9" and presses the ENTER key.
The "9" corrects the original entry error and the serial number field now reads "963981."
What goes into the application program? The prior discussion of input data streams
shows the basic fonnat, but which fields can you expect? You know that the serial
number input field will be received in its entirety, since keying the "9" caused the
display to tum on the MDT for this field, and any field which has been modified is
transmitted in its entirety (except nulls).
The input field MDTs for NAME, LOCATION, and SERIAL NUMBER were all turned on
by the data entered into those fields in the sign-on panel. While an Erase/Write or
Erase/Write Alternate resets all MDTs, a Write does not: therefore, if you do not reset
them, all three input fields are returned to the application program. Because not all
of them have changed, all three should not return to the application program. You may
specify in the wce that all MDTs in the device are reset "ofr' or "not modified" (you
should do so here).
You may also want to sound the audible alarm, if you have one, with the error panel.
A WCC to reset the keyboard, reset all MDTs, and sound the alarm is defmed as DC
X'C7' (see Figure 5-17). You can now use the Write command to change the sign-on
panel into the error message panel.
Warning: As you have seen, the Write command allows you to modify an existing screen
image whlle retaining all or a portion of the infonnation already displayed. With the
Write command, you can treat the 3270 as a typewriter-type tenninal and write your
panel line by line or field by field. Using multiple Write commands to create a panel,
while technically possible, may create problems.
The operator might start keying data into the panel before you have finished writing
it all to the screen. You can prevent this problem by not enabling the keyboard until
the last Write in the series.
Chapter 5. Screen Desfp
543
Using successive Write commands to accomplish what one Write command can do is an
inefficient use of the communication line on remote 3270s and unnecessary I/O overhead
on local 3270s.
Wherever possible, use a single Write command to avoid the inconveniences noted above.
Using Erase Unprotected to Address (EUA)
The error panel shown in Figure 5-29 displayed the erroneous serial number. All the
operator had to do was to key over the incorrect digits. This may sometimes be
confusing. You might instead want to erase only the serial number input field as
shown in Figure S-31.
Begin again with the desired WCC. Place the cursor at R7, C17 with an SBA to R7,
C17, followed by an IC order. To erase what was entered in the serial number input
field, use the EUA order (watch the sequence of these letters so you do not confuse
them with EAU, which is discussed next). EUA inserts nulls (erases all unprotected
positions) from the current buffer address up to, but not including, the specified
stop address. It will also set any character attributes of the nulled characters to
X'OO'.
The specified stop address then becomes the current buffer address. The format of
the order is similar to an SBA; the code for the order itself (X'12' for EUA) is
immediately followed by a row and column address.
COLUMN
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
~
12
13
~--~~~~--~~~--~~~--~--~~~~~~--~--~~~
Figure S-31. Error Messqe Panel with Serial Number Field Erased
S44
~
At the fust pOsition to be erased (a result of prior operation), you should include an
EUA order. For a tenninating address, you may use R7, C23 (the fust position after
the last to be erased). There is a better stop address, however. Since EUA erases
only unprotected fields, and since the field beginning at R7, C23 is protected, it can
be included in the range covered by the EUA. If RIO, C4 is used as the stop address,
nothing additional is erased, but you can then write the next attribute without using
an SBA, saving three characters of transmission (see Figure 5-32). The current buffer
address is the stop address. Any data or SF order that follows goes into the buffer
at this address.
EUA erases all unprotected fields within its range and can erase multiple fields.
Suppose you wanted all three input fields erased on the error panel, as shown in
Figure 5-33. First place the cursor at R7, C17; then "back up" with an SBA to R6,
C8 (the name input field) before issuing the EUA to RIO, C4 (see Figure 5-34).
You could have started at R6, C8 with an SBA to R6, C8, followed by the EUA to RIO,
C4. However, sometime later in the data stream you would have had to "back up," probably with an SBA to insert the cursor.
Using Erase All Unprotected (EAU) Command
In the preceding example, you wanted to erase all unprotected data, reposition the
cursor, and add some new titles to the sign-on panel to make it an error panel. The
EAU command:
• Clears all unprotected character locations and associated character attributes to nulls.
• Resets MDTs in all unprotected fields.
• Unlocks the keyboard.
• Resets the AID.
• Repositions the cursor to the fust character of the fust unprotected field.
Buffer
Address
Display
Printer
Item Row
1
Col
Dec Hex
D7 11
tiE II
Prot
0
-l8A
It
fUA
ID 10'1
2.
I~LJ:
eCD
'E
of
S£
NonDisp MDT
On
Prt
""'
,
\
,
(
AJT
~ltf OR
•
•
•
No.
High Sel
Int
Det
~
V'"
~ ~SS ~&f~
J
(
\
)
V
Figure 5-32. Example of EVA Use
Chapter s. Screen Desisn
5-45
COLUMN
01
02
03
04
06
00
07
08
~~~~~~~~LL~~~~~~~~UUWB~LL~~~
~Ud~DA~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~LL~~~~
09
10
~~~-L~~~~-L~~
__~__~~~~~~~~~~~~__~-'~
11
I
12
13
~------~--~~--~----------~--------~--. .--------~. . .
Figure 5-33. Sign-On Panel with Three Erased Fields
Display
Printer
Item Row
Col
01 07 17
[06 08
llO O~
Buffer
Address
Dee
Hex
e
Q)
...
0
'a
Prot
No.
High Sel
Oat
Int
~8A
~
NonDisp MDT
Prt
On
~
•\..
1
(
)JIIA
E..UA
SF ATT
•
•
•
~
\
V
,
(
J
J
./
Figure 5-34. Erasing Multiple Fields with EVA
This command appears to do what you want (it even does what the wee would have
done), but it does not write any data to the screen. You could issue an EAU command
before the Write command. Then you would just write the new titles in their proper
positions. You have then issued two commands to create one panel. What, then, is
EAU for? It logically resets the panel for repetitive input using the same panel.
Do not use EAU to change panels.
546
Data Entry Example: You can use the EAU command to change a sign-on panel slightly
and make it a data entry panel. _ . .en the operator just keys in NAME, LOCATION,
and SERIAL NUMBER for the first employee. If an error is made, an error panel is
shown. If there is no error, you may want to clear the input, reset the MDTs, unlock
the keyboard, and reposition the cursor. The data entry panel might appear as shown
in Figure 5·35.
The operator keys JOHN SMITH, presses TAB, keys BOSTN, presses TAD, keys
963981, and presses E~ER (Figure 5·36). You simply send the 3270 an EAU command
to unlock the keyboard. The operator then sees the same panel as in Figure 5·35 and
may now key data for the next employee. You have used your knowledge of what is
already displayed" to arrive at the next panel or to re-create the present panel.
Repetitive Output
In the data entry example, you used one panel repetitively for input of employee
information. You can reverse the requirement and design an employee data screen.
For this example, assume the application is inquiry with "browsing" capability. Assume
also that the operator has previously used another panel to request the information
for employee number 963981. The display might appear as shown in Figure 5·37.
At the bottom of the panel, the operator is instructed to use the PAl key to see the
next employee page, probably number 963982. The PA2 key is assigned to page back·
ward. Remember, PA keys are assigned by the program. Program attention keys
cause a short transmission; they do not even transmit the contents of changed fields.
F or an inquiry and browsing application, there should be no input. The PA key
assures there is no input even if the operator changes one of the unprotected fields,
so its use is preferred to the ENTER or PF keys.
Using the Program Tab (PT)
The input fields in the previous examples are output fields in this example. You could
designate them as protected, but if you did, you could not use another 3270 function
called Program Tab. The Program Tab (PT) order advances the current buffer address
to the address of the fIrSt character location of the next unprotected field. When the
PT order immediately follows an alphameric or null character (not another order) in the
Write data stream (other than the character specified by the Repeat to Address order,
which is discussed earlier), it also inserts nulls in all the character positions from the
current buffer address to the end of the current field. The PT order can be used to
page through the employee data rue.
Chapter 5. Scleen Design
547
COLUMN
01
02
03
04
06
00
~~Mil~-LLL~~~~~LL~~~~~~~~~~~
07 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~LL~~~~~L1
08
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.
09
~~~~~-L~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
10
.....................
11
~
a:
12
13
~__~.M__~~~~~__~~__~~______"~~~__~__~,,_
~~~-L~-L~~~~~~~-L~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Figure 5-35. Example of Data Entry Panel
COLUMN
01
02
03
04
06
00
07
08
09
10
11
12
Figure 5-36. Data Entry Panel with Entered Data
548
COLUMN
01
02
03
04
06
06 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
07
08
09
10
11
~
oa:
12
13
FJaure 5-37. Employee Data Panel
When ready to view the infonnation for the next employee, press the PAl key. Since
you want to modify only the present panel, not erase it or blank the unprotected fields,
you request a Write command with a wee to unlock the keyboard. Because you are not
sure of the present buffer address, you might begin with an SBA order to R6, es,
followed by the next employee name from the disk flle - JOE AMES. Because this name
contains fewer characters than JOHN SMITH, the screen would look like this if you did
not clear the remainder of the field:
03
04
~~~~~~-L~~~~~~-L~~~~
~~~~~~-L~~~~~~~~~~~
06 ~~~~~~-L~~~~~~~~~~~
06 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~L
07
~~~~4-~-L~~~~~~-L~~~~
08
,~
Chapter 5. Screen Design
549
You must also place the location code at location R6, C36. You could use blanks after
the name and an SBA sequence, or EUA with its associated address. Use PI' instead.
Insert a PT order after the "S" in "AMES". The single PI' order clears the remainder of
the unprotected name field to nulls and positions for the location code. PI' should also
follow the location code to position for the serial number. The data stream might look
like this:
ws
C B
C A
R6
C36
J C E
p
A M E S T K
p
N G S T T 9 3 9 8 2
The screen would appear as shown in Figure 5-38.
COLUMN
01
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
11
~
12
13
~~--~--. .- -. .--~--~--. .--~~--~. .~~~~~~~~~
Figure 5-38. Panel Defined with Program Tab
~\
5-50
Chapter 6. Screen Management
A screen management program module is a set of subroutines physically separate from
application programs and from the telecommunications management program module of
an online 3270 system. Figure 6-1 illustrates this relationship.
Support functions in a screen management program may reduce the amount of detail
work required by the application programs and effectively use the features of the 3270.
The separation of screen management from the other programs also allows screen
management to be modified with little or no impact on application programs or on
telecommunications management programs.
Screen management might include:
• Decoding input data streams.
• Dynamic building of output data streams.
• Generating multiple I/O requests to the Line Control Module based upon a single
request from an application program (that is, WRITE then READ).
• Automatic paging; the application program passes mUltiple pages to screen management, which asks the line control module to write a particular page to a display,
depending on the display operator's request.
• Automatic copying (prOviding a hard copy of a display image).
The BSC COpy function supports data movement between any types of device attached
to the same control unit: display to display, display to printer, printer to display,
and printer to printer. To prevent copying information from an unauthorized device,
the control unit provides a program-controlled copy-lock for devices attached to it.
If the frrst position of a device buffer contains a field attribute character with the
protected option, the control unit rejects any attempt to copy from that device.
1
-- -
I
Appl ication
Programs
--
--
Screen
Management
---
Telecornmunications
Management
-
--
PhYllcal TP
Interface
IUch asllAM
Figure 6-1. Relationship of Screen Management to TelecommunicatioI1B Management and Application Program
Chapter 6. Screen Management
6-1
Decoding and Generating Data Streams
The data streams sent between application programs and the 3270 contain unique orders
that request particular operations by the 3270 displays and printers. Generalized subroutines can be written to assist the application programmer's interface with the 3270
system, and an interface can be bunt to simplify online programs.
This chapter discusses several approaches to the development of a screen management
module whose functions can be used by the applicati<;>n programmer to prepare output
data streams and to decode input data streams. The approaches demonstrate how some
3270 device-dependent considerations can be removed from the application programmer's
responsibility. The different techniques for 3270 input or output data stream manipulation can be used in various combinations to suit the needs of the installation.
This discussion assumes that the device management routines (line control) make the
local and remote 3270 transparent to the application program. Therefore, discussion
of data streams in this chapter ignores all header data in the input stream up to and
including the AID character and all header data in the output stream up to but not
including the Write Control Character (Wce).
Decoding Read Modified Input Data Stream
A Read Modified command for a display station with a foanatted screen (a screen with
at least one attribute character defmed) produces a data stream consisting of the data
from each field whose modified data tag has been turned on (either by program control
or by data entered in the field). Each transmitted data field is preceded by the 3270
buffer address where that data is located on the display. The order of the fields
transmitted from the screen is from left to right for each line, starting at the top of
the screen and ending at the bottom of the screen. All null characters in a transmitted
field are stripped out by the control unit during transmission.
The data stream, ignoring the header infoanation up to and including the AID character,
appears as:
A
1
A
2
DATA
S
B
A
A
1
A
2
If the data entered in a field is of variable length or if a field can be skipped by the
teaninal operator, the data from a particular field on a given panel can app.ear in a
different location within the data stream for each set of operator input. A Read'Modified
command produces a variable-length data stream of fixed-length fields and variablelength fields concatenated together.
6-2
Each 2-character screen address in the data stream is immediately preceded by a Set
Buffer Address (SBA) order. The detection of each SBA order in the data stream
identifies the next 2 characters in the stream as a 3270 screen address and also
indicates the end of the preceding data field. The System/360 and System/370 Translate
and Test instruction (TRT) can be used to scan the data stream and to stop at each
main storage address containing an SBA order. If the detected main storage address
of the current SBA order is known, the following calculations can be performed for a
given data stream:
SBA(l), ADD(lA), ADD(lB), DATA FIELD (1),
SBA(2), ADD (2A), ADD(2B), DATA FIELD (2),
SBA(3),
The numbers in parentheses are used as subscripts to provide unique identification:
• The length of data field (1) =(Address ofSBA(2)· Address ofSBA(1» ·3.
• The 2-character 3270 screen address of data field (1) can be found at the address
of SBA(l) +1.
• The length of data field(2) =(Address of SBA(3) • Address of SBA(2) ) ·3.
• The 2-character scre~n address of data field(2) can be found at the address of
SBA(2) +1.
The 2-character 3270 screen address as it appears in the input stream does not provide
a direct decimal or binary numeric value that can be used to calculate the relative
position in the 3270 buffer from which the data was read. However, you can use the
follOWing routine to convert the 3270 address as it appears in the input data stream to
a binary value which directly indicates the position (relative to zero) of the data in
the 3270 buffer.
Assume that R3 contains the address of SBA(l) and that R4 and R5 are work registers.
R5 will contain the result at the end of the routine.
ADDCNVRT
EQU *
SR R4, R4
SR RS, RS
IC R4, o (R3)
N
R4, = F'63'
IC RS, 1 (R3)
N
RS, = F I 63
SLL R4, 6
AR RS, R4
CLEAR WORK REG
CLEAR WORK REG
GET FIRST ADDRESS CHAR (ADD (lA»
TURN OFF ALL BITS EXCEPT LAST SIX
GET SECOND ADDRESS CHAR (ADD (lB»
TURN OFF ALL BITS EXCEPT LAST SIX
SHIFT FIRST ADDRESS SIX BITS TO THE LEFT
ADD THE RESULTS TOGETHER
By using the above technique, several approaches may be developed to a general
purpose subroutine that decodes the variable·field.length data stream for the application
program, and returns the data in a more easily processed format.
Chapter 6.
SCIe8D
Management
6·3
Nonselector Pen or Noncursor Select Data Streams
DISPLAY BUFFER IMAGE TECHNIQUE: By using the Read Buffer command you can
use the display buffer image technique to return to the application program a main storage
buffer area the same size as the display buffer (480, 960,1920,2560,3440). The data
read from the display is placed in the same relative position in the main storage buffer
as it occupied in the display buffer, with all other positions in the returned buffer
cleared to spaces.
For this technique, use the TRT instruction and the 3270 address conversion routine.
You must know the relative locations in the display buffer where data can be entered
by the operator, so that the decoded buffer can be processed when returned by the
mapping subroutine. The completed layout sheet for the panel in which the operator
enters data will give you the required addresses relative to the respective buffers.
Using the image technique, all data received from the 3270 is left-justified in its
respective fields. This has no effect on fIXed-length fields, variable-length alphameric
fields (which are normally left-justified), or on omitted input fields. However, you must
be aware of variable-length numeric fields where the operator can omit leading zeros.
Although the image technique requires little main storage for the mapping subroutine,
main storage can be wasted if the routine returns a complete buffer with little data.
To help overcome this problem, the decoding routine can pass back to the application
program a field at the beginning of the buffer. The field indicates the total length of
the buffer, which allows the decoding routine to use a buffer areajust large enough
to accommodate the relative address of the last data field read.
MAPPING FROM A TABLE OF REQUIREMENTS: This mapping technique requires a r - " \ ,
table assembly for each unique input panel that the mapping subroutine decodes for the
application program. The table provides information to the subroutine so that the input
data stream in one main storage buffer can be decoded a field at a time and moved to
a specified relative offset in another main storage buffer (the target buffer) according
to the directions assembled in the table. The preassembled table could be used to
specify the following information to the mapping subroutines:
1. The 3270 buffer address preceding each field, which could be read from a particular
panel. This is the buffer address as it appears in the data stream which corresponds to the first data position in a field, not to the buffer location of the field
attribute byte that defmes the field. Any data fields in the 3270 input stream that
do not have a matching buffer address in the table would be ignored by the typical
mapping routine using the table approach.
2. An offset relative to zero that provides the starting position of each field in the
target buffer. This information allows the application programmer to order the
fields in the target buffer in a sequence that mayor may not agree with the field
sequence in the transmitted data stream.
3. A value that indicates the maximum length of each field in the target buffer. This
information allows the mapping routine to truncate data stream fields that are too
long for the target fields. The maximum field length value is also required if the
mapping routine supports right-justification of fields during mapping.
64
4. A flag byte consisting of bit switches that could indicate:
• Whether left justification with low-order blank padding is requested.
• Whether right justification with high-order zero fill is requested.
• Whether the field should be translated to ensure uppercase characters only.
• Any additional functions the installation wishes to implement in the mapping
routine.
Figure 6-2 shows some typical logical contents of the table. The order of the elements
within each table entry is optional.
Assume that you map the following input data stream in hexadecimal using the sample
table in Figure 6-2:
1140D4FIF2F31140E8818283848511CIC6E385A7A3
The following target buffer, also in hexadecimal, would be returned to the application
program:
CIC2C3C4C54040404040FOFOFIF2F3E385A7A34040
This approach to mapping makes the application program's input processing routine
device-independent.
Instead of the mapping table, you could write a macro instruction to prepare the table;
the macro would convert written requests into the proper machine language constants.
A typical format for a macro instruction to build the sample table shown in Figure 6-2
might be:
MAP
MAP
MAP
MAP
NAME=TABLE,MODEL=2
ADO=(l,21),OFFSET=11,MAXL=5,JUST=RIGHT
ADD=(l,41),OFFSET=1,MAXL=lO,JUST=LEFT,TRAN=YES
ADD=(1,71),OFFSET=16,MAXL=6,JUST=LEFT
Note: The ADD parameter specifies the 3270 buffer in row and column notation relative
to 1. For example, buffer pOSition 0 equals row 1, column 1. The offset values are
expressed relative to 1. The macro instruction can have default options,' for example,
ifJUST=RIGHT is not specified, JUST=LEFT can be assumed.
Chapter 6. Screen Management
6-5
DS
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
ENTRY 2
DC
DC
DC
DC
ENTRY 3
DC
DC
DC
ENDOLIST DC
TABLE
ENTRY 1
OH
X'40D4'
H'10'
HLl's'
X'SO'
X'40ES'
H'O'
HLl'10'
X'40'
X'C1C6'
H'ls'
HLl '6'
X'OO'
X'FF'
ACTUAL 3270 ADDRESS FOR POS 20
RELATIVE OFFSET IN TARGET BUFFER
MAX FIELD LENGTH OF TARGET FIELD
RIGHT JUSTIFY, NO TRANSLATE FLAG
ACTUAL 3270 ADDRESS FOR POS 40
RELATIVE OFFSET IN TARGET BUFFER
MAX FIELD LENGTH OF TARGET FIELD
LEFT JUSTIFY, TRANSLATE FLAG
ACTUAL 3270 ·ADDRESS FOR POS 70
RELATIVE OFFSET IN TARGET BUFFER
MAX FIELD LENGTH OF TARGET FIELD
LEFT JUSTIFY, NO TRANSLATE FLAG
END OF LIST INDICATOR
Note: 3270 buffer eddl'8S888 in the table a18 shown relatiflB to buffar location 0,' relatifle
offsets in the target buffer are shown mlatifle to O.
Figure 6·2. Table of Requirements
The following example shows the logic flow for a table-driven input mapping technique:
1. Find the 3270 buffer address of a data field to be processed in the input data
stream using the TRT instruction.
2. Determine the length of the data field in the data stream using the techniques
discussed in this section.
3. Search the table of requirements, using the 3270 buffer address found in step 1
as a search argument to fmd a matching entry.
4. Add the offset value from the entry found in the table to the starting address of
the main storage map buffer to produce the main storage address of the start of
the receiving field.
.
5. If the length of the data field determined in step 2 is greater than the maximum
field length value in the entry found in the table, go to step 10.
6. Check the flag byte in the entry found in the table. If left justification is requested, go to step 10. Otherwise proceed to step 7 for right justification.
7. Move zoned decimal zeros to the receiving field, using the field starting address
determined in step 4. Use the maximum field length value in the entry found in
the table as the length for the move.
8. Develop a new main storage address for the start of the receiving field to accommodate the request for right justification. The right-justified starting address for
the receiving field =(field starting address determined in step 4 + maximum field
length value in the entry found in the table) -length of the data field in the data
stream found in step 2.
9. Move the data field from the data stream to the main storage address developed in
step 8, using the length of the data in the data stream determined in step 2.
Return to the start of this routine to fmd the next data field in the data stream.
/~
,~
10. Move blanks to the receiving field using the starting address of the field as determined in step 4. Use the maxhnum field length value in the entry found in the table
as the length for the move.
11. Move the data field from the data stream to the receiving field using the field
address detennined in step 4. Use the length of the data in the data stream
(determined in step 2) as the length for the move.
12. Check the flag byte in the entry found in the table to determine if uppercase
translation is requested. If it is not requested, return to the start of this routine
to fmd the next data field in the data stream.
13. Translate the data in the receiving field to uppercase; then return to the start of
this routine to fmd the next data field in the data stream. The translation can be
done in two ways:
• Use the Translate instruction with the translation table built to convert lowercase
alphabetic characters to uppercase.
• Use the OR instruction to place blanks in the field. This will change the DUP
and FM characters. The FM appears as a semi-colon (;) on the screen, but
appears in the data stream as X'lE'. It will be converted to a true semi-colon
(;), that is, X'SE'. The DUP appears as an asterisk (*) on the screen, but
appears in the data stream as X' 1C'. It will be converted to a true asterisk (*),
(X'SC').
Immediate Selector Pen or Cursor Select Data Stream
When a Read Modified command is executed for a display station as a result of an
immediate detection by the selector pen or cursor select, the resulting data stream
consists of address strings that identify which fields on the screen have the modified
data tag set; the 3276 control unit also transmits the modified data if the proper
designator character is used.
The data stream, ignoring the header information up to and including the AID
character, appears as:
,
A
,
A
A
2
If the operator keys into a field and an immediate selector field is selected, the keyed
data is not transmitted. However, if keyed data is entered by the operator, delayed
selector fields are selected, and the ENTER key or a PF key is pressed; then the
address and data for all fields, whether selected or keyed, are included in the data
stream.
You can use a subroutine to free the application program from determining which fields
were selected on a panel. A table can be built that consists of the 3270 buffer
addresses, giving the location of each selectable field on ~ panel. The mapping routine
can then compare the addresses in the table, and return to the application program a
list of indicators that identifies the selected fields.
Chapter 6. Screen Manasement
6-7
The list of indicators can be returned to the application program. A string of oneposition fields can be used, and each position can indicate with a unique character
that a field was selected. The first position in the returned list can be marked if a
field in the data stream has the same address as the frrst element in the address table;
the second position in the returned list can be marked if a field in the data stream has
the same address as the second element in the address table. The application program
can then determine which relative positions in the list have been marked to determine
which fields have been selected by the operator.
Because the input from a display using selector pen or cursor select detection is a
series of fIXed-length addresses, the mapping routine can analyze the input stream
and decode it.
For example, using the selector panel illustration in Figure 6-3, assume that the
operator has selected the delayed-detectable fields located at row 5, column 10 and
row 3, column 26 and the immediate-detectable field located at row 7, column 18.
The input data stream transmitted in hexadecimal from the display would be:
llClE911C2E911C4Cl
COLUMN
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Figure 6-3. Example of Selector Pen Panel
Using the sample table in Figure 64, the mapping routine returns a list in hexadecimal
to the application program:
406F40406F406F
6-8
~,
This list indicates that the second, fifth, and seventh fields were selected. Note that
the addresses of the selected fields appear in the data stream in the same sequence
as the fields appear in the display buffer. When a selector pen panel is designed by
columns, the address of the field selected from the fIrst column may not occur before
the address of the field selected from the second column in the input data stream.
y 01.t can write a macro instruction similar to the one used to build the table in Figure
6·2 to build the selector pen table:
MAP
MAP
NAME=SELTABLE,MODEL=1
ADD= (3,10)
ADD=(3;26)
ADD= (4, 10)
MAP
MAP
SELTABLE
EQU
*
DC
X'C1D9'
X'C1E9'
X'C2C1'
X'C2D1'
X'C2E9'
X'C2F9'
X'C4C1'
X'FF'
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
FOR IDDEL 1 DISPLAY
ROW 3 COL 10
ROW 3 COL 26
ROW 4 COL 10
ROW 4 COL 26
ROW 5 COL 10
ROW 5 COL 26
ROW 7 COL 18
TABLE STOP INDICAIDR
Note: The 3270 addffJS$es used in the above table correspond to the buffer position
of the Selector Pen dfl$ignator character in a field, not to the location of the field
attribute character which definfl$ the field.
Figure 6-4. Sample Mapping Table
Mixed Read Modified Input Data Streams
When some keyed input and some delayed selector pen or cursor select detection occur
in a panel during the same input operation from a display, you can use the table·
driven mapping technique for non selector pen or cursor select panels. Specify the
table elements so that all delayed selector fields have a maximum length of one
character. The mapping routine places the first character from the appropriate data
stream field into the target field. The fIrst character in a delayed selector field that
has been selected is always a (»; that is, X'6E'. The application program can examine
the target buffer for that character in the proper target field to determine if the field
has been selected.
Chapter 6. Screen Management
6-9
Building Output Data Streams
The 3270 requires specific bit patterns for order sequences, control characters, and
buffer addressing. The data streams can be prepared in several different ways. A data
stream to build a static panel (a panel which will always be displayed in exactly the
same manner) can be assembled in an application program as a set of data constants.
A semidynamic panel, which may occasionally be modified or added to, can have the
static portion assembled in the application program and have the program dynamically
modify or add to the data stream. A data stream for a dynamic panel (a panel with a
high degree of change) must be created or assembled as a unit at execution. This
section discusses how to reduce the considerations of device-dependency required to
support static, semidynamic, and dynamic output data streams.
Static Data Streams
You can write macro instructions to simplify the preparation of static data streams for
the 3270. One approach is to write a set of macro instructions in which each macro
instruction prepares a single order sequence. Another approach is to write one macro
instruction that can prepare all types of order sequences, but prepares only one
sequence for each execution of the macro instruction in a program.
A sample macro instruction of the fIrSt type might be:
$MOD MODEL
= 1,
2, 3, 4, 5
This macro instruction sets a global value so that the specified model number is used
until another SMOD macro instruction is encountered. The model number is required to
correctly calculate 3270 buffer addresses. The buffer address X'C2DS' represents column
4, row 30 for a Modell display, and column 2, row 70 for a Model 2 display.
The following are also examples of the fust type of macro instruction:
SSBA
(I, 10) generates the SBA order sequence X'II4OC9'
SSF
(pROT ,NUM,8KIP ,MDT,HI,DET ,NONDISP)
generates an SF order (X'ID') followed by the appropriate attribute character
dermed by the options selected in parentheses. Notice that if PROT is not
specified, unprotected is assumed; if numeric is not specified, alphameric is
assumed.
SRA
(1,10,'*') generates the RA order sequence X'3C4OC9SC'.
SEUA (1,10) generates an EUA order sequence X'124OC9'.
SWCC
(RESET,RESTORE,ALARM,PRINT,4OCHAR,64CHAR,8OCHAR,NLEM)
generates the proper WCC, depending on the options selected in parentheses.
6-10
~
SCCC
1""-\1
(PRINT ,4OCHAR,64CHAR,8OCHAR,ALARM~'ITR,UNPROT ,PROT ~L)
generates the proper copy control character (CCC), depending on the options
selected in parentheses. (The CCC identifies the type of data to be copied.)
SIC
generates X'13'
$KBD
KEYBOARD
=APL or Text
Used with the Data Analysis feature to identify the keyboard providing 3277·2
display input.
SSI
generates the Suppress Index character, valid for the 3289 printer. Other printers
receive I (the or bar) in place of the Suppress Index character.
After you have defIned the macro instruction, the data stream required to build the
sign-on panel shown in Figure 5-6 could be created as follows:
SIGNON
$MOD
$WCC
$SBA
$SF
DC
,~
$SBA
$SF
DC
$SBA
$SF
DC
$SF
$IC
$SBA
$SF
DC
$SF
$SBA
$SF
DC
$SF
$SBA
$SF
$SBA
$SF
DC
MODEL=l
(RESET ,RESTORE)
(2,11)
(PROT)
C'SIGN-QN PROCEDURE'
(4,2)
(PROT)
C 'PLEASE ENTER YOUR SIGN-QN INFORMATION'
(6,1)
(PROT,HI)
C'NAME: '
(6,25)
(PROT,HI)
C 'LOCATION: '
(7,1)
(PROT,HI)
C'SERIAL NUMBER:'
(NUM)
(7,23)
(PROT)
(10,4)
(PROT)
C'WHEN ALL ••• ENTER KEY'
Otapter 6. ScIeen Manasement
6·11
You could also write the second type of instruction, a single 3270 data stream macro
instruction, which might have the fonnat:
,
,(attributes)
(symbol] $MAC op-type , ( row, column) [ ,character] , MODEL- 2
3
4
symbol
specifies a symbol that refers to the data stream
op-type
specifies the type of screen control operation to generate. Valid values are: SF,
SBA, IC, RA, EUA, WCC, and CCC.
(row,column)
specifies the row (1 to 43) and column (1 to 132) where the operation starts or
ends (depending on the op-type). This parameter is required for op-types SBA,
RA,andEUA.
(attributes)
indicates attributes or control bits for SF, WCC, and CCC.
Some valid values for SF are: PROT, SKIP, NUM, MDT, HI, DET, NONDISP.
Some valid values for WCC are: RESET, RESTORE, ALARM, PRINT, 4OCHAR,
64CHAR, 8OCHAR, NLEM.
Some valid values for CCC are: PRINT, 4OCHAR, 64CHAR, 8OCHAR, ALARM,
ATTR, UNPROT, PROT, ALL.
character
specifies the character used in the RA function.
MODEL:::
indicates the model of 3270. This model number is used to calculate the buffer
address. This parameter is specified once in the fmt macro instruction of a data
stream series or whenever the data stream to be generated is for a different
model than the preceding series. Model numbers 3 and 4 can be specified only for
the 3278 Display Station.
6-12
After you have defmed the macro instruction, the data stream required to create the
sign-on panel shown in Figure 5-6 could be as follows:
I~'
SIGNON
$ MAC
$ MAC
$ MAC
DC
$MAC
$MAC
DC
$ MAC
$ MAC
DC
$MAC
$MAC
$MAC
$MAC
DC
$MAC
$MAC
$MAG
DC
$MAC
$ MAC
RMAC
$ MAC
$ MAC
DC
wcc,
(RESET, RESTORE) ,MODEL=l
SBA,(2,11)
SF, (PROT)
C'SIGN-QN PROCEDURE'
SBA, (4,2)
SF, (PROT)
C 'PLEASE ENTER YOUR SIGN-QN INFORMATION'
SBA, (6,1)
SF, (PROT ,HI)
C 'NAME: '
SF
IC
SBA, (6,25)
SF, (PROT,HI)
C 'LOCATION: '
SF
SBA,(7,1)
SF, (PROT ,HI)
C 'SERIAL NUMBER: '
SF (NUM)
SBA, (7,23)
SF, (PROT)
SBA, (10,4)
SF, (PROT)
C'WHEN ALL ••• ENTER KEY'
These two types of macro instructions can generate either a total static data stream or
static sections of data streams that can be dynamically assembled at execution by the
application program.
SemidYlUlmic Output Streams
A semidynamic panel requires some dynamic modification. Perhaps an error message
must be written to a particular part of the panel and the cursor must be moved to the
input field in which an error was detected during editing. The application program can
concatenate preassembled static data stream segments into the program, such as field
error messages. The same macro instructions that build static data streams can build
partial static streams. As the input from a panel is edited, the standard error message
for each field can be assembled in the output buffer, thus allowing multiple brief
messages to be sent to the display in one operation.
You may have to change one or two attribute characters from high intensity to low
intenSity and erase the unprotected fields on a display. For example, an error message
segment may have changed a field to high intensity to call the operator's attention to
the field; the operator has recognized the error and reentered the correct information.
The display must now be made ready for the next input on the panel. Concatenate the
order stream segments to change the attribute characters and use the Erase Unprotected to Address (EUA) order to restore the panel; do not transmit all the data and
orders to completely refresh the panel.
Chapter6 Screen Management
6·13
DY1Ul11lic Output Streams
It may become physically impossible to hold in main storage all possible output data and
order stream combinations that could occur during execution of an application. You can
incoIporate a subroutine into screen management to accept parameters from an application program to decode the parameters and to create the data stream. You can also
write for the application program a macro instruction that builds a parameter list inline
from entries you specify in the macro instruction, and then branches to the screen
management routine to build the required orders and data in the buffer area.
The macro instruction could appear as follows:
$BUILD ADD=ADDFIELD,ATTR=(R3),DATA=(R4),LEN=(RS)
The ADDFIELD contains the 3270 buffer address in either row-column fonnat, binaIy
offset, or 3270 address fonn. R3 contains the address of the attribute byte, R4
contains the address of the data to be entered in the field, and RS contains the length
of the data. The attribute character parameter is optional.
The subroutine could convert row and column buffer addresses relative to 1 to decimal
offsets relative to 0 with the following fonnula:
Modell Buffer:
Model 2, 3, 4 Buffer:
( (R-l) X40) + (C-l)
( (R-l) xaO) + (C-l)
If the row and column buffer addresses relative to 1 are in two single-byte areas in
binary, the conversion to binaIy offsets relative to 0 can be coded as follows:
SR
IC
BCTR
SR
IC
BCTR
MH
AR
6-14
R3,R3
R3,COLUMN
R3,C
R4,R4
R4,ROW
R4,0
R4, =H ' 40' USE VALUE OF
R4, R3
RESULT IN R4
ao
FOR K>DEL 2
The following subroutine converts a binary halfword that represents the offset relative
to 0 of a position in a 3270 buffer to an equivalent 2-character 3270 address. R3 is a
work register, and R4 points to the binary halfword to be converted. The converted
result is found at ANSWER.
LH
STC
SRL
STC
NI
TR
ANSWER
TAB
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
R3,0 (R4)
R3,ANSWER+l
R3,6
R3,ANSWER
ANSWER+l,X' 3F'
ANSWER ( 2) , TAB
X'OOOO'
X'40ClC2C3C4CSC6C7C8C94A4B'
X'4C4D4F4FSODlD2D3D4DSD6D7'
X'D8D9SASBSCSDSESF606lE2E3'
X'E4ESE6E7E8E96A6B6C6D6E6F'
X'FOFlF2F3F4FSF6F7F8F97A'
X' 7B7C7D7E7F'
Large Screen Size
Application programs written for systems that use 480- or 1920-character screen size
will run on large screen displays with the same width but with a greater number of
lines. Terminals with large screen capacity (960, 2560, and 3440 characters) will
automatically default to smaller screen size unless the large screen size has been
specified explicitly-by the application program. The Erase Write Alternate command is
used to switch a display into large screen mode.
Since buffer address wrapping is screen-sile-dependent, application programs should
not depend on buffer wrap during write operations. Also, field attributes must be
appropriately placed to delimit the end of the screen image.
Qapter 6. ScIeen Manaaement
6-15
Appendix A. Indicators and Controls
This appendix describes the function of switches, controls, and lights on the operator's
panel, and symbols displayed in the Operator Infonnation Area (Figure A-I and A-2).
r II _
3276 Switches, Controls, and Lights
Light 2
Light 1
~Address Keylock (3276 Only)
.
~
"
Modem Ready Light
(3276 Only)
\\
~
--rData/Talk
(3276 Only)
Other Unit Operable
Light (3276 Only)
Ught 3
OnlOff C'10 I
C C"I
(oJ I Switch
~\ [Dial Disconne~; ( C1 )Switch
(3276 Only)
8 'I
(A,atA) Switch
0
o-a
-=--
I.~
6""
SWitCh--ll~
Dualt Mono Case
-NormallTest Switch
~~~~I.
Alarm
~meControl
.J
~----==-""
--------------------
Cll\
~
Security Keylock
Contrast Control
Brightness Control
Operator Information
Area
Figure A·I. 3276 Operator Panel
A Switches
System
Machine
Q)(g©
Communicate/Local
Switch
Transmit Level
-1dB
2dB
Transmit level
Switches
(U.S. and
BSC
4dB
8dB
Canada Only)
Primary/Secondary SNBU/Non-switched
Line Speed
Line Switch
Switch
SOLC
BSC Switch
Figure A·2. 3276 Operator Drawer Panel
Appendix A. Indicators and Controls
A-I
The following listing describes the function of the indicators and controls shown in
Figure A-I and Figure A-2.
Audible Alarm Volume Control. This control allows adjustment of the audible alann,
when the Audible Alann feature has been installed on the 3276. The audible alann
tone amplifier control is attached to the Contrast Control, located below the Normal/
Test switch near the lower-right comer of the CRT.
Brightness Control. This is a dual-function control. Rotating the control clockwise
I.increases CRT brightness. On the 3276 display, rotating the control completely clockwise
and holding the control places the control in test intensity override position, which
unblanks the CRT screen. The Brightness Control is located near the lower-right comer of
the CRT.
Contrast Control. The Contrast Control controls CRT contrast and is located above the
Brightness Control.
Modem Ready Light. This indicator is turned on when the Data Set Ready signal is
received from the modem. It is located above the Dial Disconnect switch or Data/Talk
switch on the right side of the CRT.
Data/Talk. This switch, located on the right side of the CRT, is used to switch from
talk mode to data mode, or vice versa, when integrated modem is operated in the switched
network.
Dial Disconnect Switch. This switch is used to terminate a switche~ network call.
DuaI/Mono Case Switch. When in the Mono Case (A) position, only uppercase characters
are displayed. When in the Dual Case (A,a) position, uppercase and lowercase characterS
can be displayed. This switch is located on the right side of the CRT.
Light 2. This indicator should light after power is applied. It is loca~ed in the upperright position on the left side of the CRT.
Line Ready: This indicator lights when the communication line is functioning correctly.
In BSC operating mode, it is turned on when a polling or selection sequence is received
and is turned off after 3 seconds if character synchronization is not achieved in control
mode, or when a Machine Check condition caused by an integrated modem is detected.
The Line Ready indicator is located below the Light 2 indicator on the left side of
the CRT. The light is turned offwhen 8 seconds elapse without receiving the controller
address. It is also turned off by depressing Test Subsystem (3276), or when a Machine
Check condition is caused by MC/pC error except DTA card or caused by CCA or a
modem error.
I NQrmaltrest This switch, when placed in the Test position, disconnects the 3178, 3278,
3279, or 3276 display from the attached 3276 to allow testing operations. The Normal/
Test switch is located on the right side of the CRT.
Light 3. This indicator lights when normal power is available in the unit. It is located
above the Power On/power Off switch on the left side of the CRT.
Other Units Operable•. This indicator lights when at least one display station or
terminal printer, attached to the 3276 is operable. The indicator is turned off
when all attached devices are powered off or are disconnected from the 3276
because of a malfunction.
A-2
Power On/Power Off. This switch applies and removes internal power.
Light I. This indicator is located to the left of the Light 2 indicator on the upper.left
side of the CRT. It should light after power is applied.
The following listing describes the function of the indicators and controls shown in
Figure A·2:
BSC Address. The BSC address is established by the ~etting of five switches, positions
1 through 5 of switch B on the operator panel drawer on the right side of the CRT.
Communicate/Local. This switch connects or disconnects the 3276 to or from a loop of
the 8100 Infonnation System and the 4300 Processor. When this switch is in the Com·
municate position, the 3276 is connected to a loop; when it is in Local, the 3276 is
disconnected from a loop and the Line Ready indicator turns off. Whenever this switch
is turned to Communicate, a wrap test is perfonned for the 3276 loop adapter.
Half Duplex/Full Duplex. This switch is located at position 6 of switch B on the
operator drawer. With the switch in the on position (full duplex), the Request to Send
(RTS) signal is held on in SNA/SDLC operation. When operating in BSe, the RTS
signal is turned on when the End of Transmission (EOT) signal is received and is turned
off upon transmission of the EOT signal. When the switch is in the off position
(half duplex), the RTS signal is turned on when the EOT signal is received, and is turned
off at the beginning and end of each transmission of the text block.
Machine Check. This indicator lights when a nonprogramming recoverable error is
detected in the 3276.
NRZ/NRZI. This switch is located at position 8 of switch B on the operator drawer.
When the switch is in the ON position, transmission and reception are in NRZ mode.
When in the OFF position, NRZI mode is used.
Primary Line Speed/Secondary Line Speed. This switch is used to select secondary
speed.
SDLC Address. The SDLC address is established by the setting of eight switches,
positions 1 through 8, on switch panel A, on the operator panel drawer..
SDLC/BSC. This switch is set according to the line discipline selected.
Set Primary/Secondary Loop Speeds. The primary and secondary loop speeds are set by
the combination of the settings of switch positions 6 through 8, which are located on
switch panel B on the operator panel drawer. The following combinations are provided:
Switch Position
6
7
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
8
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Primary/Secondary Speeds
9600/4800
9600/2400
4800/2400
2400/1200
1200/ 600
Note: Loop speeds depend on the 8100 system. A decal is provided below switch
panelB.
Appendix A. Indicators and Controls
A·3
Switched Network Backup (SNBU). This switch is used to switch from nonswitched line
operation to switched line backup mode.
System Check. This indicator is turned on when a program check or communication
check is detected.
Test Indicator. This indicator lights under two conditions:
1. When the 3276 and attached devices have been placed in test mode, the Test
indicator lights and remains on while in test mode.
2. When the 3276 detects a loss-of-carrier condition, the Test indicator blinks and
the Line Ready indicator goes off.
Test Subsystem. This momentary switch is used to test the 3276 subsystem. Pressing
and releasing the switch starts the subsystem test.
Transmit Level (U.S. and Canada only). These four switches are used to match the
transmit level between an integrated modem and the protective coupler that is attached
to the telephone line.
t
I The following lists and explains the symbols displayed in the 3178, 3276, 3278, and
3279 Operator Infonnation Area.
Raadin. . and System Connection Symbols (locations 1 throuGh 6)
Symbol
A
.!.
Nama
Explanation
3276 Ready
The appropriate ready symbol is displayed in location
1 of the Operator Information Area when the 3276 II
control unit to which the display is attached is ready
(functional) and the display is ready.
Online A
Online B
The Online A and Online B symbols govern transactions
with the hoSt system. Certain keyboard functions and
the meaning of some Operator Information Area symbols
differ depending upon which set of rules are applicable.
Online A. The control unit is connected to the system
under A rules. The A symbol appears in remote systems
using BSC protocol.lt is turned on by receipt of the
following commands: Write, Erase/Write, Erase All Unprotected, Copy, Read Modified, and Read Buffer.
The A symbol is turned off when:
1. An operator action causes host communication.
2. The display station is turned off.
3. The Normal/Test switch is placed in Test.
•
TEST
Online B. The control unit is connected to the system
under .!.rules. The.!.symbol appears in systems that
use SNA protocol. It is turned on by completion of an
ACTPU/ACTLU command sequence, and is turned off
by execution of DACTPU or DACTLU, including an
internal DACTPU sequence, and when the NormallTest
switch is placed in Test or the TEST key is pressed .
My Job
The display station is connected to the operator's
application program. This symbol is displayed in
position 3. This symbol appears in systems that use
BSC or SNA protocol. In systems using esc, it is
turned on with the,Asymbol, and is turned off when
power is removed, and when the NormallTest switch is
placed in Test. When using SNA protocol, it is turned
on when the operator's application session owns the
screen.
System Operator
This symbol is used with SNA protocol and Indicates
that the system operator (SSCP Control Program)
session owns the display screen. Except for the
ENTER key, the Program Attention keys are not
functional when this symbol is displayed.
Unowned
The display station is connected to the system
(using SNA only), but not to the operator's applica·
tion program or to the system operator (control
program). The SYS REO key is used if LOGON
is required. This symbol is displayed in position 3.
Test
The display station is in test mode. Test mode is initiated
or terminated by pressing the TEST key while holding
the ALT key. TEST is displayed in positions 3 through
6. Test procedures are described in the IBM 3270 Information Display System: IBM 3178 Display Station
Operator Reference Guide, GA 18-2128,3276 Control
Unit Display Station; Problem Detennination Guide,
GA18-2014, the IBM 3270 Infonnation Di$play
System: 3278 Display Station; Problem Detennination
Guide, GA27-2639, and the IBM 3270 Infonnation
Display System: Problem Detennination Guide,
GA33-30S1.
Appendix A. Indicators and Controls
A-S
Do Not Enter (Input Inhibited), location. 9 through 17: All these symbols co,:,tain an "X" in
position 9 (do not enter), combined with other symbols in positions, 1 through 17, which define why
input is disabled. The keyboard does not lock mechanically, but a change in state of the keyboard
clicker (on to off, or off to on) indicates that the keyboard is disabled.
The following keys are not disabled: RESET, SYS REO, ATTN, TEST, DEV CNCl, shift keys, AlT
CURSR. CURSR BLINK. and Click keys.
During buffer transfer while executing a BSC Copy command (3274 and 3276), a limited number of
keystrokes will be accepted for processing, and Input is not disabled. The 3276 will queue at least
two keystrokes and. if the queue is not exceeded, the keystrokes will be processed when communi·
cation with the keyboard is restored. In either case, if the capacity of the queue is exceeded, all
queued keystrokes will be discarded and the What symbol is displayed.
RESET will remove the input disabled condition and restore the keyboard except when the following
symbols are displayed: Time, Printer Busy, Printer Very Busy, Printer Not Working, and Security Key.
For a 3278 or 3279 display without a keyboard. a selector-light-pen or MSR operation will remove the
same input disabled conditions as the RESET key. A selector-light-pen or MSR operation will not cause
a reset on a 3278 or 3279 display that has a keyboard attached.
The following symbols are arranged in "order of probability.
Symbol
Name
Time
Time is required for the system to perform a function.
This symbol is displayed due to:
1. line protocol requirements.
2. A keyboard that has been locked by the host; for
example, during a host-initiated print operation.
3. Internal processing constraints of the control unit.
When operating With SNA protocol, the keyboard will
be restored and the Time symbol is removed by a WCC
which contains the keyboard restore bit set to 1.
If a "Change Direction" was also received, the 3276
will enter send state. Howaver, if a CD was not received,
the session will remain in receive.
state when the WCC contains the Keyboard
Restore bit set to 1.
In this state. all keys can be used except the Program
Attention and Print keys. Use of a Program Attention
key will result in display of the Minus Function
"symbol. If a WCC which contains a Keyboard Restore
bit set is not received, display of the Time symbol
is determined by whether the CD has been received
as follows:
1. If CD has not been received, the session will
remain in receive state and the Time symbol
remains displayed with keyboard locked.
2. If CD has been received, the 3274 and 3276 will
enter send state; and, if the keyboard was
unlocked prior to receipt of the command, the
Time symbol is removed and the keyboard is
restored. Otherwise; the Time symbol is replaced
by the System Lock symbol.
If End Bracket is received, the Time symbol is
removed, the session enters contention state, and the
keyboard is restored regardless of the WCC setting.
A-6
Explanation
Symbol
When using BSC protocol, the keyboard will be
unlocked, and the Time symbol removed, if the WCC
keyboard restore bit is on, or if the keyboard had been
unlocked prior to receipt of the command. Otherwise,
Time will be replaced by the System Lock symbol.
)C
SYSTEM
System Lock
The program has disabled the keyboard following an
entry. The operator may receive a message and then
press RESET t6 restore the keyboard. In systems that
use SNA protocol, the System Lock symbol appears
when the application program has replied to the last
message sent by the operator and is requesting the
operator to send the next message. At this time.
however. the host has not unlocked the keyboard.
(The Keyboard Restore bit is not set in any wee that
follows the last message from the operator.)
When the System Lock symbol appears in BSC systems,
the host is notified of the last AID generated.
)C
~
nn
Machine Check
The display station is not working properly. The symbol
is accompanied by up to two digits [nn(3178, 3276,
3278, or 3279 attached to 3276)), which define the
probabte cause of the problem. Recovery procedures
depend upon the type of error.
Refer to Appendix C for a description of the machinecheck codes. Machine check symbols are almost always
reset by the operator using the RESET, SYS REO
(SNA only). or TEST keys. If the 3278 or 3279 does
not have a keyboard, a selector light pen, an MSR, can
be used to reset the Machine Check symbol.
)C ~nn
Communication
An attempt is made to cause host communication or
to use the MSR, or selector light pen that causes
host communication, and a communication link error
was detected while the Communications Reminder is
displayed. Data cannot be sent. The RESET, TEST,
or SYS REO (SNA) key should be pressed. This symbol
is accompanied by up to two digits [nn (3178,3276,
3278, or 3279 attached to 3276) 1, which define the
probable cause of the problem. (The Communication
Reminder symbol is displayed as long as the condition
exists.) Refer to Appendix C for a description of the
communication-check codes.
)( PROGnn
Program
A programming error was detected in the data received
by the control unit. RESET should be pressed and the
operation should be retried. This symbol is accompanied
by up to two digits (nn (3178,3276,3278, or 3279
attached to 3276) 1, which define the probable cause
of the problem. Refer to Appendix C for a description
of the program-chec k codes.
)C 1+
What?
The last input was not accepted. The What symbol
appears when:
1. Keystrokes are being queued during an unsolicited
write or buffer transfer. and the capacity of the
queue is exceeded. (The queue is not processed
in this case.)
2. SYS REO was pressed while inbound processing
was queued for the device.
Appendix A. Indicatom and Controls
A-7
Symbol
Name
Explanation
3. ATTN, SYS REO, or TEST was pressed during a
Time condition which was caused by internal
processing constraints of the 3276.
4. The operator continued to key while the Time,
Printer Busy, or Printer Not Working symbol
was displayed.
5. Two conflicting operations have been attempted
"simultaneously" with one operation not
serviced. (For example, CLEAR and selector light
pen,)
6. A dead key operation has been aborted, and a
standalone accent created at the cursor location.
7. Print 10 mode has been aborted. The RESET
key restores the keyboard.
Because of uncertainty about what was accePted, the
operator should check the contents of the screen
before repeating the operation. In addition:
1. If AL T or a shift key was used, press the key again
and then press RESET and retry the operation.
2. When retrying SYS REO or ATTN, repeated use of
these keys may be necessary if inbound processing E)
is queued.
)( -f
Minus Function
A currently unavailable function was requested.
RESET should be pressed to restore the keyboard.
Conditions that cause a Minus Function are:
1. Use of an ATTN, PF, or PA key while in SSCP
session or in" unowned state, "or prior to
ACTLU. Also use of the ENTER key in the
"unowned state" or prior to ACTLU.
2. Use of SYS REO prior to receipt of ACTLU in
SNA.
3. Any of the following actions in receive state
with the keyboard unlocked: Print and all AID
generating keys.
4. Use of ATTN while operating with remote systems
that use BSC.
5. Use of SYS REO, ATTN, and any PA or PF key
that is not specified for test mode.
6. When invoking concurrent test 0, the control
terminal is not the test terminal and the latter is
either in session (SNA), or has the Time indk.ator
on in systems that use BSC.
7. When using the IDENT key during a printing
operation.
S. MSR in "receive state" or in "unowned state."
9. MSR in SSCP-LU session with 10-character set.
The security key is turned off and no operator Input
)( -f~x
A-8
Minus Function
Operator
Unauthorized
This symbol means that the display operator has
tried to change the Programmed Symbols, Color, or
Extended Highlighting attributes when disallowed by
the host program. The keyboard is locked as a
result. Pressing the Reset key restores the keyboard.
~
Symbol
Nam.
~,
Explanation
The indocator is also displayed when a Programmed
Symbols terminal storage is referenced (PS-A - PS-F
attribute keys) but the storage has no symbol set
currently associated with it, or the symbol set is
marked not keyboard-selectable.
)C
0-..
Security Key
The security key is turned off and no operator input
can be accepted. When the key is turned on,: this
symbol disappears, but any other pre-existing do-notenter condition may then be displayed.
RESET does not remove the Security Key symbol.
The Shift key, ALT CURSR, CURSR BLINK, and
Click key, and associated symbols, and all other
noninput disabled symbols will function when the
Security Key symbol is displayed. The Security Key
has priority over other input disabled symbols except
when machine checks prevent communication
between the control unit and the terminal.
)C~
Printer Not
Working
The printer assigned to the display station is not
functioning, and no other printers in the class are
available. If this symbol appears after the Print key
was pressed, and if the Printer Failure symbol is not
displayed, the printer assigned to the display (or the
most available printer in the class) is not functional.
The print request is canceled, and the DEV CNCL key
should be pressed to restore the keyboard. (RESET
has no effect.) Restoration of the printer will not
automatically remove the Printer Not Working symbol.
If the Printer Failure symbol is displayed in the printer
status area, the printer stopped during the last print
operation. If the print operation was initiated by the
Print kay, DEV CNCL should be pressed to restore the
keyboard. The display terminal indicator may precede
a comparable indicator on the printer by as much as
2 minutes.
~
The Printer Not Working symbol may also appear for
a host-initiated print operation. Operators are not
instructed to use DEV CNCl, but, if used, the Printer
Not Working symbol is replaced with the Time symbol,
and the host must continue the operation. Subsequent
receipt of outbound FM data will remove the Printer
Not Working symbol.
)( c-c::I{(,:
Printer Busy
The printer assigned to the display station is busy_
The operator may either walt for the printer to become
available or press the DEV CNCl key. For print
requests initiated by the Print key, DEV CNCl will
cancel the request, remove the Device Busy symbol,
and restore the keyboard.
For host-initiated requests, DEV CNCL will cause
Device Busy to be replaced by the Walt symbol, and
a negative response will be sent to the host. If the
Print key was used, it may be possible to select another
printer.
Appendix ~ Indicators and Controls
A-9
Symbol
Name
Explanation
Printer Very Busy
This symbol applies only to operator-initiated requests
via the Printer key and means the same as Printer Busy
except that more time than usual is anticipated before
the print request is accepted. It is displayed when the
requested printer is allocated to the host as follows:
1. If II B is displayed, the printer is currently "in
bracket" with a host PLU.
2. If II A is displayed, a host Write, Erase/Write, or
Copy command has been addressed to the printer,
and the print operation has not yet been started
by the host (via a command with the Start Print
bit on in the WCC).
)( f)(
Operator
Unauthorized
This symbol means that the operator has requested a
printer for which the terminal or attached device is not
authorized. RESET should be pressed to restore the
keyboard.
This symbol appears when:
1. The Print key is pressed while the Printer Assignment columns of the Operator Information Area
show no printer assignment or show question maries.
2. During a print 10 sequence, the operator enters a
number which is in the printer authorization
matrix, but is not authorized for the display.
3. During a local print operation initiated by the
Print key, the "printer" assigned is really a display.
This can occur if an invalid device description is
loaded into the printer authorization matrix.
4. The print buffer is unable to store the contents
of a display buffer (for example when the display
buffer is too large) during an operator· initiated
local copy operation.
Go Elsewhere
An action has been attempted which is invalid for the
display screen location. RESET should be pressed and
either the cursor should be moved or some other action
taken.
The Go Elsewhere symbol appears when:
1. An attempt has been made to enter. Insert, erase,
or delete a character when the cursor is in a
protected field or at an attribute location.
2. An attempt has been made to use the CURSR SEL
key while the cursor is not in a cursor select or
selector-light-pen field.
)( :J:I'tUM
A-tO
More Than
This symbol means that the operator has attempted to
enter too much information into a field. RESET
should be pressed to restore the keyboard, and the
operation sh.ould be retried and the entry corrected.
Numeric
This symbol appears when the Numeric Lock feature
is installed. A non-numeric entry was made at a
display screen location reserved for numeric information. RESET should be pressed to restore the keyboard, and the operation should be retried.
Symbol
Name
Explanation
What Number
The operator has entered a number which is unacceptable at the display screen location. This message
appears when a selected print 10 is not numeric or is
not in the matrix, or an incorrect entry is made in
test mode. (Refer to description of IDENT key in
Chapter 3 for further information.) RESET should
be pressed to restore the keyboard and to make the
correct entry.
)( *9?
Questionable
Card
The operator tried to read an inappropr iate magnetic
stripe card. RESET should be pressed and the correct
MSR card should be used. If a keyboard is not
available. repeat the operation using a valid MSR card.
This symbol will also appear if the End of Inquiry
(EOI) character is present on the magnetic card.
Cards with EOI are applicable to the operator
identification card reader for the 3275 and 3277
only.
)( oJ:
Accent Plus What
These messages indicate that an invalid dead key/
character key combination was entered (Canadian
French keyboard only). RESET should be pressed to
restore the keyboard, and a valid dead key/character
key combination should be entered. Valid combinations are as follows:
.. , " .. "
a A e E u U
,
~\
+'{'
)( oJ:" +'7
)( t" +?
)( *"+?
)( :J:J+?
e E
A
A
A
aAeE
eEl
AI.
A
100uU
I u U
~ ~ ~
For further information, refer to "Dead Keys,
Canadian French Keyboards" in Chapter 2.
)( -s
Minus Symbol
The symbol keyed is not available. The RESET key
should be pressed to restore the keyboard.
Message Received
A message from the system operator (SSCP control
program) was received and rejected. RESET should be
pressed to restore the keyboard. This symbol appears
only on displays attached to a 3276 unit that uses
SNA protocol.
Reminders (locations 21 through 27)
~nn
Communication
The communication link connecting the control unit
to the system is producing errors. Refer to Appendix C
for a description of the error codes.
The Communication Reminder appears when:
1. The control unit detects a permanent error condition
in the connection to the host. (Attempts to retry
have ceased.) In this case, the reminder symbol is
sent to all terminals attached to the control unit.
2. In BSC mode, a line error is detected which results
in the original contents of the screen being restored
and a request for retransmission made to the host.
In this case, the reminder symbol Is sent only to the
affected terminal.
Reserved
This symbol (3178,3276, 3278, or 3279 attached to a
3276 only) is reserved for future use and should be
ignored if It Is displayed.
Appendix A. Indicaton and Controls
A-II
a.1ftI and MDda (IoadDftl :n through 41):
Note: Dilpltzy Itillionl thllt support the Extended Data Stream future Ule 10000tionl 36
through 44 for Shifll lind Model and the insert-mode symbol transfen to locllti(J.n 52.
HUM
Numeric
The Numeric lock feature is installed and the key·
board is in numeric shift, which allows use of the 0
through 9 keys, and the decimal sign, minus (-), and
DUP keys only.
UPlhift
The keyboard is in upshift.
Insert
The keyboard is in insert mode. A cheracter may be
inserted at the cursor location. Characters beyond the
cursor position move to make room for the inserted
character.
APL
The keyboard is in APL mode.
TEXT
The keyboard is in TEXT mode.
Printer StatUi (locations 60 through 64)
o-c::mn
Printer
Assignment
The display station is authorized to use printer address
numbel nne Individual printers may be assigned
address numbers 1 through 7 when attached to the
3276.
c-c??
What Printer
The printer IDENT has changed. Pressing the IDENT
key causes display of a new printer assignment.
Printer Printing
The printer identified by nn is printing information
from the display station.
Printer Failure
The printer identified by nn has stopped while
printing information from the display station. This
symbol will remain on until:
1. The condition is cleared following operator
intervention.
2. The operator uses DEV CNCl following a printernot-functional condition.
3. Receipt of outbound FM data.
4. Printer assignment is changed because power is
applied to another printer (3276 default printer
authorization matrix).
o-c__
ASSign Printer
(nothing displayed)
A-12
When the operator changes the assigned printer using
the IDENT key, the two numbers appear in the assignment columns, replacing the underlines.
If the display is attached to a 3276 ( II displayed in
location 1), there is no automatic printer authorization.
The operator may be able to assign a printer using the
IDENT key.
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
-~
~
40 Col
80 Co.
Position
Buffer Address (Hext
!L £.
!. £.
!!!!.. !!!!
~
~
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
03
0000
0001
04
05
06
0003
0004
001
002
003
004
0005
005
07
0006
08
09
0007
006
007
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
02
01
02
03
04
OS
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
01
02
03
04
06
06
07
02 08
02 09
02 10
02 11
02 12
02 13
02 14
02 16
02 16
02 17
02 18
02 19
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
-24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
41
48
49
60
51
52
53
54
66
56
51
0002
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0036
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0046
0046
0047
0048
68
0049
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0056
0056
0051
59
00S8
000
008
009
OOA
OOB
OOC
000
OOE
OOF
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
01A
01B
01C
010
01E
01F
020
021
022
023
024
026
026
021
028
029
02A
02B
02C
020
OlE
02F
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
031
038
039
03A
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
4Q
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
-01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E6
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F1
F8
F9
7A
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
60
51
52
50
24
2A
29
3B
5E
20
2F
53
64
55
66
51
68
69
5A
1C
2C
265F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
31
38
39
3A
Appendix B. Buffer Addreaa I/O Interface Codes
B·l
B·2
40 Col
R C
80 Col
R C
Position
Dec
Hex
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
04
04
0059
0060
0061
0062
0063
0064
0065
0066
0067
0068
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
04
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
05
02
06
02
02
02
02 09
02 10
02 11
02 12
02 13
02 14
02 15
02 16
02 17
02 18
02 19
02 20
02 21
02 22
02 23
02 24
02 25
02 26
02 27
02 28
02 29
02 30
02 31
02 32
02 33
02 .34
02 35
02 36
02 37
02 38
02 39
02 40
02 41
02 42
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
01
02
03
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
01
02
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
0069
0070
0071
0072
0073
0074
0075
0076
0077
0078
0079
0080
0081
0082
0083
0084
0085
0086
0087
0088
0089
0090
0091
0092
0093
0094
0095
0096
0097
0098
0099
0100
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0107
0108
0109
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0116
0117
0118
0119
0120
0121
038
03C
030
03E
03F
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
O4A
048
04C
040
04E
04F
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
05A
058
05C
050
05E
05F
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
06A
068
OSC
060
06E
06F
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
40
40
40
40
40
Cl
Cl
Cl
C1
Cl
Cl
C1
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
C1
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
C1
C1
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
C1
Cl
Cl
Cl
C1
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
C1
C1
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
C1
Cl
Cl
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
SO
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
-
20
20
20
20
20
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
23
40
27
30
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
AppencUx B. Buffer Address I/O Interface CocIea
B-3
40 Col
R C
80 Col
R C
Position
Dec
Hex
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06·
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
07
07
07
07
07
07
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
0184
0185
0186
0187
0188
0189
0190
0191
0192
0193
0194
0195
0196
0197
0198
0199
0200
0201
0202
0203
0204
0205
0206
0207
0208
0209
0210
0211
0212
0213
0214
0215
0216
0217
0218
0219
0220
0221
0222
0223
0224
0225
0226
0227
0228
0229
0230
0231
0232
0233
0234
0235
0236
0237
0238
0239
0240
0241
0242
0243
0244
0245
OB8
OB9
OBA
OBB
OBC
OBO
OBE
OBF
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
04
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
04
04
05
04
04
05
06
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
01
02
03
06
03
03
03
03
03
03
04
04
oeo
OC1
OC2
OC3
OC4
OC5
OC6
OC7
OC8
0C9
OCA
OCB
OCC
OCO
OCE
OCF
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
OOA
OOB
OOC
000
ODE
OOF
OEO
OE1
OE2
OE3
OE4
OE6
OE6
OE7
OE8
OE9
OEA
OEB
OEC
OED
OEE
OEF
OFO
OF1
OF2
OF3
OF4
OF5
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
C3
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F6
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
32
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
~
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
3B
5E
20
2F
53
64
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
32 33
43 34
43 36
43
~I
1"""'\
40 Col
R C
80 Col
R
C
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
'07
07
07
07
07
07
07
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
04
04
04
04
07
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
01
02
03
04
04
04
04
04
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
51
58
59
60
61
62
63
04
04 64
04 65
04 66
04 61
04 68
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
0246
0247
0248
0249
0260
0261
0252
0253
0264
0266
0266
0267
0258
0259
0260
0261
0262
0263
0264
0265
0266
0267
0268
0269
0270
0271
0272
0273
0274
0275
0276
0277
0278
0279
0280
0281
0282
0283
0284
0285
0286
0287
0288
0289
0290
0291
0292
0293
0294
0295
0296
0297
0298
0299
0300
0301
0302
0303
0304
0305
0306
0307
F6
C3 F7
C3 F8
C3 F9
C3 7A
C3 78
C3 7C
C3 70
C3 7E
C3 7F
C4 40
C4 C1
C4 C2
C4 C3
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
44
44
44
C4
44 44
44 45
44 46
44 47
44 48
44 49
44 58
44 2E
44 3C
44 28
44 28
44 21
44 26
44 4A
44 48
44 4C
44 40
44 4E
44 4F
44 50
44 51
44 52
44 50
44 24
44 2A
44 29
44 38
44 5E
44 20
44 2F
44 53
44 54
44 55
44 56
44 57
44 58
44 59
44 5A
44 7C
44 2C
44 25
44 5F
44 3E
44 3F
44 30
44 31
44 32
44 33
OF6
OF7
OF8
OF9
OFA
OF8
OFC
OFO
OFE
OFF
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
lOA
108
10C
100
10E
10F
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
11A
118
11C
110
11E
11F
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
12A
128
12C
120
12E
12F
130
131
132
133
C3
C4
C4 C6
C4 C6
C4 C7
C4 C8
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
44
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
Appendix B. Buffer Adclress I/O Interface Codes
B-S
40 Col
R C
BOCol
R C
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
04
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
p4
04
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
06
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
06
05
05
05
05
05
06
05
05
05
05
05
06
05
05
05
05
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Position
Dec
Hex
0308 134
0309 135
0310 136
0311 137
0312 138
0313 139
0314 13A
0315 138
0316 13C
0317 130
0318 13E
0319 13F
0320 140
0321
141
0322 142
0323 143
0324 144
0325 145
0326 146
0327 147
0328 148
0329 '149.
0330 14A
0331 148
0332 14C
0333 140
0334 14E
0335 14F
0336 150
0337 151
0338 152
0339 153
0340 154
0341 155
0342 156
0343 157
0344 158
0345 159
0346 15A
0347 158
0348 15C
0349 150
0350 15E
0351 15F
0352 160
0353 161
0354 162
0355 163
0356 164
0357 165
0358 166
0359 167
0360 168
0361 169
0362 16A
0363 168
0364 16C
0365 160
0366 16E
0367 16F
0368 170
0369 171
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04.
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
4~
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45'
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
46
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
40 Col
R C
~
10
10
10
10_
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
BOCol
R C
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
05
64
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
06
06
06
06
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Position
Dec
Hex
0370
0371
0372
0373
0374
0375
0376
0377
0378
0379
0380
0381
0382
0383
0384
0385
0386
0387
0388
0389
0390
0391
0392
0393
0394
0395
0396
0397
0398
0399
0400
0401
0402
0403
0404
0405
0406
0407
0408
0409
0410
0411
0412
0413
0414
0415
0416
0417
0418
0419
0420
0421
0422
0423
0424
0425
0426
0427
0428
0429
0430
0431
0432
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
17A
17B
17C
170
17E
17F
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
18A
18B
18C
180
18E
18F
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
19A
19B
19C
190
19E
19F
lAO
lAl
lA2
1A3
lA4
lA5
lA6
lA7
lA8
lA9
lAA
lAB
1AC
1Ao
lAE
lAF
lBO
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
C6
C6
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
- F9
7A
-7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C6
C4
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C5
C6
C6
C6 C5
C6 C6
C6 C7
C6
C8
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
C9
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
3B
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
B·7
B-S
40 Col
R C
80 Col
R C
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
06
06
06
06 64
06 65
06 66
06 67
06 68
06 69
06 70
06 71
06 72
06 73
06 74
06 75
06 76
06 77
06 78
06 79
06 80
07 01
07 02
07 03
07 04
07 05
07 06
07 07
07 08
07 09
07 10
07 11
07 12
07 13
07 14
07 15
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Addrea (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
0433
0434
0435
0436
0437
0438
0439
0440
0441
0442
0443
0444
0445
0446
0447
0448
0449
0450
0451
0452
0453
0454
0455
0456
0457
0458
0459
0460
0461
0462
0463
0464
0465
0466
0467
0468
0469
0470
0471
0472
0473
0474
0475
0476
0417
0478
0479
0480
0481
0482
0483
0484
0485
0486
0487
0488
0489
0490
0491
0492
0493
0494
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C6
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
C7
1Bl
lB2
lB3
lB4
lB5
lB6
lB7
lB8
lB9
lBA
lBB
lBC
lBo
lBE
lBF
lCO
lCl
lC2
lC3
1C4
lC5
lC6
lC7
lC8
lC9
lCA
lCB
lCC
lCo
lCE
lCF
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
lOA
lOB
10C
100
loE
loF
lEO
lEl
lE2
lE3
lE4
1E5
lE6
lE7
lE8
lE9
lEA
lEB
lEC
lED
lEE
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
68
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
63
54
56
56
57
68
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
~
~
aocol
R C
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
"36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
Position
Hex
Dec
0496
0496
0497
0498
0499
0600
0601
0602
0603
0604
0606
0606
0607
0608
0609
0610
0611
0612
0613
0614
0616
0616
0617
0618
0619
0620
0621
0622
0623
0624
0626
0626
0627
0628
0629
0630
0631
0632
0633
0634
0636
0636
0637
0638
0639
0640
0641
0642
0543
0544
0545
0546
0547
0548
0549
0550
0551
0552
0553
0554
0555
0556
Buffer Address (Hex)
ASCII
EBCDIC
1EF
1FO
1F1
1F2
1F3
1F4
1F6
1F6
1F7
1F8
1F9
1FA
1FB
1FC
1FO
1FE
1FF
200
201
202
203
C7 6F
C7 FO
C7 F1
C7 F2
C7 F3
C7 F4
C7 F6
C7" F6
C7 F7
C7 " F8
C7 F9
C7 7A
C7 7B
C7 7C
C7 70
C7 7E
C7 7F
204
C8
C8
C8
C8
206
206
207
208
209
20A
20B
20C
200
20E
20F
210
211
212
213
214
216
216
217
218
219
21A
218
21C
210
21E
21F
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
22A
228
22C
C8 40
C8 C1
C8 C2
C8 C3
C4
C6
C6
C7
C8 C8
C8 C9
C8 4A
C8 48
C8 4C
C8 40
C8 4E
C8 4F
C8 60
C8 01
C8 02
C8 03
C8 D4
C8 05
C8 06
C8 07
C8 08
C8 09
C8 6A
C8 58
C8 5C
C8 50'
C8 5E
C8 5F
C8 60
C8 61
C8 E2
C8 E3
C8 E4
C8 E5
C8 E6
C8 E7
C8 E8
C8 E9
C8 6A
C8 68
C8 6C
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
47
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
56
66
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
AppendJx B. BuRer Acldress I/O Interface Codes
8-9
8-10
80 Col
R C
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
07 78
07 79
07 80
08 01
08 02
08 03
08 04
08 05
08 06
08 07
08 08
08 09
08 10
08 11
08 12
08 13
08 14
08 15
08 16
08 17
08 18
08 19
08 20
08 21
08 22
08 23
08 24
08 25
08 26
08 27
08 28
08 29
08 30
08 31
08 32
08 ,33
08 34
08 35
08 36
08 37
08 38
08 39
08 40
08 41
08 42
08 43
08 44
08 45
08 46
08 47
08 48
08 49
08 50
08 51
08 52
08 53
08 54
08 55
08 56
08 57
08 58
08 59
08 60
0557
0558
0559
0560
0561
0562
0563
0564
0565
0566
0567
0568
0569
0570
0571
0572
0573
0574
0575
0576
0577
0578
0579
0580
0581
0582
0583
0584
0585
0586
0587
0588
0589
0590
0591
0592
0593
0594
0595
0596
0597
0598
0599
0600
0601
0602
0603
0604
0605
0606
0607
0608
0609
0610
0611
0612
0613
0614
0615
0616
0617
0618
0619
C8
C8
C8
C8
220
22E
22F
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
23A
238
23C
230
23E
23F
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
24A
248
24C
240
24E
24F
250
251
252
253
254
265
256
257
258
259
25A
258
25C
250
25E
25F
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
26A
268
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C8
C9
C9
C9
C9
C9
C9
C9
C9
C9
C9
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C9 4A
C9 48
C9 4C
C9 40
C9 4E
C9 4F
C9 60
C9 01
C9 02
C9 03
C9 04
C9 05
C9 06
C9 07
C9 08
C9 09
C9 5A
C9 58
C9 5C
C9 50
C9 5E
C9 5F
C9 60
C9 61
C9 E2
C9 E3
C9 E4
C9 E5
C9 E6
C9 E7
C9 E8
C9 E9
C9 6A
C9 68
48 5F
48 3E
48 3F
48 30
48 31
48 32
48 33
48 34
48 35
48 36
48 37
48 38
48 39
48 3A
48 23
48 40
48 27
48 3D
48 22
49 20
49 41
49 42
49 43
49 44
49 45
49 46
49 47
49 48
49 49
49 58
49 2E
49 3C
49 28
49 28
49 21
49 26
49 4A
49 48
49 4C
49 40
49 4E
49 4F
49 50
49 51
49 52
49 50
49 24
49 2A
49 29
49 38
49 5E
49 20
49 2F
49 53
49 54
49 56
49 56
49 57
49 58
49 59
49 5A
49 7C
49 2C
~
80 Col
R C
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
6.1
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
.19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Position
Dec
Hex
0620
0621
0622
0623
0624
0626
0626
0627
0628
0629
0630
0631
0632
0633
0634
0636
0636
0637
0638
0639
0640
0641
0642
0643
0644
0646
0646
0647
0648
0649
0650
0661
0662
0663
0664
0666
0666
0667
0668
0669
0660
0661
0662
0663
0664
0665
0666
0667
0668
0669
0670
0671
0672
0673
0674
0675
0676
0677
0678
0679
0680
0681
26C
260
26E
26F
270
271
272
273
274
276
276
277
278
279
27A
278
27C
27D
27E
·27F
280
281
282
283
284
286
286
287
288
289
28A
288
28C
280
28E
28F
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
29A
298
29C
290
29E
29F
2AO
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
2A9
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
6C
60
C9 6E
C9 6F
eg FO
eg F1
eg F2
eg. F3
eg F4
eg ·F5
eg F6
eg F7
C9 F8
C9 F9
C9 7A
C9 7B
eg 7C
C9 70
C9 7E
C9 7F
4A 40
4A C1
4A C2
4A C3
4A C4
4A C6
4A C6
4A C7
4A C8
4A eg
4A 4A
4A 48
4A 4C
4A 40
4A 4E
4A 4F
4A 50
4A 01
4A 02
4A 03
4A D4
4A 06
4A 06
4A 07
4A 08
4A 09
4A 5A
4A 58
4A 5C
4A 50
4A 5E
4A SF
4A 60
4A 61
4A E2
4A E3
4A E4
4A E5
4A E6
4A E7
4A E8
4A E9
C9
C9
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
68
5B
6B
6B
68
6B
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
68
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
46
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
60
61
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
Appendix B. Bufter Address I/O Interface Codes
11-11
aocol
C
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
09
09
09
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
0682
2AA
2A8
2AC
2AO
2AE
2AF
280
281
282
283
2B4
285
286
287
288
289
28A
288
28C
280
28E
28F
2CO
2C1
2C2
2C3
2C4
2C5
2C6
2C7
2C8
2C9
2CA
2C8
2CC
2CO
2CE
2CF
200
201
:.l02
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
20A
208
20C
200
20E
20F
2EO
2El
2E2
2E3
2E4
2E5
2E6
2E7
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
4B
48
48
48
48
48
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
8-12
Position
R
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
0683
0684
0685
0686
0687
0688
0689
0690
0691
0692
0693
0694
0695
0696
0697
0698
0699
0700
0701
0702
0703
0704
0705
0706
0707
0708
0709
0710
0711
0712
0713
0714
0715
0716
0717
0718
0719
0720
0721
0722
0723
0724
0725
0726
0727
0728
0729
0730
0731
0732
0733
0734
0735
0736
0737
0738
0739
0740
0741
0742
0743
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
D4
D5
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
5B
5B
58
6B
5B
5B
6B
58
5B
58
58
58
6B
5B
58
6B
5B
58
6B
58
6B
5B
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
7C
2C
26
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
46
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
48
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
~
.~
~,
80 Col
C
R
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
1010
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
11
0744
0746
0746
0747
0748
0749
0750
0751
0752
0753
0754
0755
0756
0757
0758
0759
0760
0761
0762
0763
0764
0765
0766
0767
0768
0769
0770
0771
0772
0773
0774
0775
0776
0777
0778
0779
0780
0781
0782
0783
0784
0785
0786
0787
0788
0789
0790
0791
0792
0793
0794
0795
0796
0797
0798
0799
0800
0801
0802
0803
0804
0805
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4B
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
2E8
2E9
2EA
2E8
2EC
2EO
2EE
2EF
2FO
2F1
2F2
2F3
2F4
2F5
2F6
2F7
2F8
2F9
2FA
2FB
2FC
2FO
2FE
2FF
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
30A
30B
30C
300
30E
30F
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
31A
31B
31C
310
31E
31F
320
321
322
323
324
325
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F6
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C6
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
60
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
2E
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
59
6A
7C
2C
26
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
36
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
46
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
61
52
60
24
2A
29
3C 3B
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
6E
20
2F
63
54
56
66
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
8-13
aocol
11-14
R
C
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (HexJ
EBCDIC
ASCII
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1.7
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
0806
0807
0808
0809
0810
0811
0812
0813
0814
0815
0816
0817
0818
0819
0820
0821
0822
0823
0824
0825
0826
0827
0828
0829
0830
0831
0832
0833
0834
0835
0836
0837
0838
0839
0840
0841
0842
0843
0844
0845
0846
0847
0848
0849
0850
0851
0852
0853
0854
0855
0856
0857
0858
0859
0860
0861
0862
0863
0864
0865
0866
0867
326
327
328
329
32A
328
32C
320
32E
32F
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
33A
338
33C
330
33E
33F
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
34A
348
34C
340
341:
34F
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
35A
358
35C
350
35E
35F
360
361
362
363
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40.
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
68
Position
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
SA
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
3C
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
~
~
~
80 Co'
R C
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
0868
0869
0870
0871
0872
0873
0874
0875
0876
0877
0878
0879
0880
0881
0882
0883
0884
0885
0886
0887
0888
0889
0890
0891
0892
0893
0894
0895
0896
0897
0898
0899
364
365
366
367
368
369
36A
36B
36C
360
36E
36F
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
37A
37B
37C
370
37E
37F
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
38A
38B
38C
380
38E
38F
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
39A
39B
39C
390
39E
39F
3AO
3A1
40 E4
40 E5
40 E6
40 E7
40 E8
40 E9
40 6A
40· 6B
40 6C
40·60
40 6E
40 6F
40 FO
40 Fl
40 F2
40 F3
40 F4
40 F5
40 F6
40 F7
40 F8
40 F9
40 7A
40 7B
40 7C
40 70
40 7E
40 7F
4E 40
4E C1
4E C2
4E C3
4E C4
4E C5
4E C6
4E C7
4E C8
4E C9
4E 4A
4E 4B
4E 4C
4E 40
4E 4E
4E 4F
4E 50
4E 01
4E 02
4E 03
4E D4
4E 05
4E 06
4E 07
4E 08
4E 09
4E 5A
4E 58
4E 5C
4E 50
4E 5E
4E 5F
4E 60
4E 61
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
26
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
0900
0901
0902
0903
0904
0905
0906
0907
0908
0909
0910
0911
0912
0913
0914
0915
0916
0917
0918
0919
0920
0921
0922
0923
0924
0925
0926
0927
0928
0929
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
28
28
21lt
2B
28
2B
2B
28
2B
28
2B
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
5D
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
Appendix B. Buffer AddIea I/O Interlace CocIea
8-15
8-16
80 Col
R
C
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Addrel1 (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
0930
0931
0932
0933
0934
0935
0936
0937
0938
0939
0940
0941
0942
0943
0944
0945
0946
0947
0948
0949
0950
0951
0952
0953
0954
0955
0956
0957
0958
0959
0960
0961
0962
0963
0964
0965
0966
0967
0968
0969
0970
0971
0972
0973
0974
0975
0976
0977
0978
0979
0980
0981
0982
0983
0984
0985
0986
0987
0988
0989
0990
0991
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4f
4F
4F
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
3A2
3A3
3A4
3A5
3A6
3A7
3A8
3A9
3AA
3A8
3AC
3Ao
3AE
3AF
3BO
3B1
3B2
3B3
3B4
385
386
3B7
3B8
3B9
3BA
3BB
3BC
380
38E
3BF
3CO
3Cl
3C2
3C3
3C4
3C5
3C6
3C7
3C8
3C9
3CA
3CB
3CC
3CO
3CE
3CF
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
30A
30B
30C
300
30E
30F
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
28
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
2B
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
3B
5E
~I
80 Col
R C
~
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
Position
Dec
Hex
0992
0993
0994
0995
0996
0997
0998
0999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
3EO
3E1
3E2
3E3
3E4
3E5
3E6
3E7
3E8
3E9
3EA
3EB
3EC
3EO
3EE
3EF
3FO
3F1
3F2
3F3
3F4
3F5
3F6
3F7
3F8
3F9
3FA
3FB
3FC
3FD
3FE
3FF
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
40A
40B
40C
400
40E
40F
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
41A
418
41C
410
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
50
50
50
50
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
50
C4
50 C5
50 C6
50 C7
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
50 01
50 02
50 03
50 D4
50 05
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
OS
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
20
2F
53
64
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
B-17
8-18
80 Col
R C
Position
Dec
Hex
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
41E
41F
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
42A
428
42C
420
42E
42F
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
43A
438
43C
430
43E
43F
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
44A
448
44C
440
44E
44F
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
45A
458
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
60
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
.6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
1"""\,
10 Col
Position
R
C
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hexl
EBCDIC
ASCII
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
15
15
15
16
15
15
15
16
15
15
16
16
15
15
16
16
15
15
16
15
15
15
16
15
15
11
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1163
1154
1165
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1117
45C
450
45E
45F
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
46A
46B
46C
460
46E
46F
470
411
472
473
474
475
476
477
418
419
47A
418
47C
470
47E
47F
480
481
482
483
484
486
486
487
488
489
48A
488
48C
480
48E
48F
490
491
492
493
494
496
496
497
498
499
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
41
48
49
50
51
62
63
64
56
56
57
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
1A
78
1C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C1
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
4A
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
4B
48
48
48
4B
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
2A
29
3B
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
31
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
46
46
47
48
49
68
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
Appendix B. Buffer Add!ess I/O Interface Codes
8-19
B·20
80 Col
Position
R
C
Dec
Hex
EBCDIC
ASCII
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
49A
498
49C
490
49E
49F
4AO
4Al
4A2
4A3
4A4
4A5
4A6
4A7
4A8
4A9
4AA
4A8
4AC
4AO
4AE
4AF
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
48A
488
48C
480
48E
48F
4CO
4C1
4C2
4C3
4C4
4C5
4C6
4C7
4C8
4C9
4CA
4C8
4CC
4CO
4CE
4CF
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
48
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Buffer Address (Hex)
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
,~
R
C
Dec
Hex
Buffer Addrell (Hex.
EBCDIC
ASCII
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
41
42
43
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1264
1255
1266
1257
1268
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
408
409
40A
408
40C
400
40E
40F
4EO
4E1
4E2
4E3
4E4
4E5
4E6
4E7
4E8
4E9
4EA
4E8
4EC
4Eo
4EE
4EF
4FO
4F1
4F2
4F3
4F4
4F5
4F6
4F7
4F8
4F9
4FA
4F8
4FC
4Fo
4FE
4FF
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
50A
508
50C
500
50E
50F
510
511
512
513
514
515
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
BOCol
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
17 03
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
17 20
17 21
17 22
17
Position
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
·5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
64
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
Appendix B. BuUer Adcbeas I/O Interface Codes
8-21
80 Col
C
R
Position
Dec
Hex
17 23
17 24
17 25
17 26
17 27
17 28
17 29
17 30
17 31
17 32
17.33
17 34
17 35
17 36
17 37
17 38
17 39
17 40
17 41
17 42
17 43
17 44
17 45
17 46
17 47
17 48
17 49
17 50
17 51
17 52
17 53
17 54
17 55
17 56
17 57
17 58
17 59
17 60
17 61
17 62
17 63
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
516
517
518
519
51A
518
51C
510
51E
51F
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
52A
528
52C
520
52E
52F
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
53A,
53B
53C
530
53E
53F
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
54A
548
54C
540
54E
54F
550
551
552
553
554
17
64
17 65
17 66
17 67
17 68
17 69
17 70
17 71
17 72
17 73
17 74
17 75
17 76
17 77
17 78
17 79
17 80
18 01
18 02
18 03
18 04
18 05
1-22
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04'
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
04
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
D4
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
30
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
~
~
~
80 Col
R C
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
'37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Position
Dec
Hex
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
555
556
557
558
559
55A
558
55C
550
55E
55F
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
56A
568
56C
560
56E
56F
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
57A
578
57C
570
57E
57F
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
58A
588
58C
580
58E
58F
590
591
Buffer Addr•• (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
F6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4E
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4f.
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
Appendix B. Buffer Adcbeas I/O Interface Codes
.,23
11-24
80 Col
R C
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
59A
59B
59C
590
59E
59F
5AO
5A1
5A2
5A3
5A4
5A5
5A6
5A7
5A8
5A9
5AA
5A8
5AC
5AO
5AE
5AF
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
58A
588
58C
580
58E
58F
5CO
5C1
5C2
5C3
5C4
5C5
5C6
5C7
5C8
5C9
5CA
5C8
5CC
5CO
5CE
5CF
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E .
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
~
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
~,
BOCoI
R C
.~
l~\
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
49
50
51
52
53
64
65
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Position
Dec
Hex
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
151S
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
50A
508
50C
500
50E
50F
5EO
5E1
5E2
5E3
5E4
5E5
5E6
5E7
5E8
5E9
SEA
5E8
SEC
5EO
SEE
5EF
5FO
5F1
5F2
SF3
5F4
5F5
5F6
5F7
SF8
5F9
5FA
5FB
5FC
5FO
5FE
5FF
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
60A
608
60C
600
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
~O
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
SO
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
SA
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
30
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
8-25
80 Col
R
C
20
20
20
20
20
'20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
B-26
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Position
Dec
Hex
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
60E
60F
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
61A
618
61C
610
61E
61F
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
62A
62B
62C
620
62E
62F
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
63A
63B
63C
630
63E
63F
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
64A
648
15~6
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1678
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
Buff., Add,. . (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
09
09
09
09
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
D9
C4
09 C5
09 C6
09 C7
D9
C8
09 C9
09 4A
09 48
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
~
80 Co.
C
R
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
Position
Dec
Hex
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
64C
640
64E
64F
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
65A
658
65C
650
65E
65F
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
66A
66B
S6C
660
S6E
66F
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
67A
678
67C
670
67E
67F
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A C9
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
3B
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Appendix B. Buaer Adcbeu I/O Interface Codes
B-27
8-28
BOCoI
R C
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
68A
688
68C
680
68E
68F
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
69A
698
69C
690
69E
69F
6AO
6Al
6A2
6A3
6A4
6A5
6A6
6A7
6A8
6A9
6AA
6A8
6AC
6AO
6AE
6AF
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
68A
688
68C
6BO
6lsE
6BF
6CO
6Cl
6C2
t)C3
6C4
6C5
6C6
6C7
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
15
16
71
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
31
38
39
3A
23
40
27
30
22
20
41
42
43
~
44
45
46
47
~
80 Co.
R C
,~
l~
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
6C8
6C9
6CA
6C8
6CC
6CO
6CE
6CF
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
60A
608
60C
600
60E
60F
6EO
6El
6E2
6E3
6E4
6E5
6E6
6E7
6E8
6E9
6EA
6E8
6EC
6Eo
6EE
6EF
6FO
6F1
6F2
6F3
6F4
6F5
6F6
6F7
6F8
6F9
6FA
6F8
6FC
6Fo
6FE
6FF
700
701
702
703
704
705
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
Position
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
8-29
BOCoI
R C
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23·
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
8-30
39
40
41
42
43
44 .
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14'
15
16
17
18
19
20
Position
Dec
Hex
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1836
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1846
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
706
707
708
709
70A
70B
70C
700
70E
70F
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
71A
71B
71C
710
71E
71F
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
72A
7~8
72C
720
72E
72F
730
731
732
733
734
736
736
737
738
739
73A
738
73C
730
73E
73F
740
741
742
743
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
5C
50
50
50
50
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
SF
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
29
29
29
29
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F"
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
SF
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
~,
~
'~
~.
~
,~
BOCol
R C
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897,
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
5E
5E
744
745
746
747
748
749
74A
748
74C
740
74E
74F
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
75A
758
75C
750
75E
75F
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
76A
768
76C
760
76E
76F
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
77A
77B
77C
770
77E
77F
780
781
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
'40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
SF
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
29'
29
29 40
29 27
29 3D
29 22
38 20
38 41
Appendix B. Bumer Address I/O Intedace Codes
B-31
lOCo.
8-32
R
C
Dec
Hex
Buffe, Add,e. (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
03
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
78A
788
78C
780
78E
78F
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
79A
798
79C
790
79E
79F
7AO
7A1
7A2
7A3
7A4
7A5
7A6
7A7
7A8
7A9
7AA
7A8
7AC
7AO
7AE
7AF
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
78A
788
78C
780
78E
78F
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
POlition
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
~
~,
80 Col
R C
~.
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
26
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
~
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
OB
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2016
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2026
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2036
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
7CO
7Cl
7C2
7C3
7C4
7C5
7C6
7C7
7C8
7C9
7CA
7CB
7eC
7CD
7CE
7CF
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
70A
70B
70C
700
70E
70F
7EO
7E1
7E2
7E3
7E4
7E6
7E6
7E7
7E8
7E9
7EA
7EB
7EC
7EO
7EE
7EF
7FO
7F1
7F2
7F3
7F4
7F5
7F6
7F7
7F8
7F9
7FA
7FB
7Fe
7FO
5F
5F
5F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
5F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
5F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
5F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
Position
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C6
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
60
01
02
03
D4
06
06
07
08
09
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E6
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F6
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
20
41
42
43
44
46
46
47
48
49
68
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
60
61
62
60
24
2A
29
3B
6E
20
2F
63
64
66
66
67
68
69
6A
7C
2C
26
6F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
36
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
B·33
80 Col
R
C
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
8-34
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22·
23
24
25
26
27
28
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Addr. . (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
5F 7E
5F 7F
60 40
60 Cl
60 C2
60 C3
60 C4
60 C5
60 C6
60 C7
60 C8
60 C9
60 4A
60 48
60 4C
60 40
60 4E
60 4F
60 50
60 01
60 02
60 03
60 04
60 05
60 06
60 07
60 08
60 09
60 5A
60 58
60 5C
60 50
60 5E
60 5F
5E
5E
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
7FE
7FF
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
80A
808
80C
800
80E
80F
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
81A
818
81C
810
81E
81F
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
82A
828
82C
820
82E
82F
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
83A
838
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
30
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
~.
~
80 Col
Position
!t £.
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
83C
830
83E
83F
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
84A
848
84C
840
84E
84F
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
85A
858
85C
850
85E
85F
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
86A
868
86C
860
86E
86F
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
60 7C
60 70
60 7E
60 7F
61 40
61 C1
61 C2
61 C3
61 C4
61 C5
61 C6
61 C7
61 C8
61 C9
61 4A
61 48
61 4C
61 40
61 4E
61 4F
61 50
61 01
61 02
61 03
61 04
61 05
61 06
61 07
61 08
61 09
61 5A
61 58
61 5C
61 50
61 5E
61 5F
61 60
61 61
61 E2
61 E3
61 E4
61 E5
61 E6
61 E7
61 E8
61 E9
61 6A
61 68
61 6C
61 60
61 6E
61 6F
61 FO
61 F1
61 F2
61 F3
61 F4
61 F5
61 F6
61 F7
61 F8
61 F9
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
20
20
20
20
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
60
61
62
60
24
2A
29
38
6E
20
2F
53
54
56
66
67
68
69
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
8-35
80 Col
R
C
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
68
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
28 66
28 67
28 68
8-36
28
69
28
28
28
28
70
71
72
73
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
·2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
61
61
61
61
61
61
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
87A
878
87C
870
87E
87F
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
88A
888
88C
880
88E
88F
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
89A
898
89C
890
89E
89F
8AO
8Al
8A2
8A3
8A4
8A5
8A6
8A7
8A8
8A9
8AA
8A8
8AC
8Ao
8AE
8AF
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
2F
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4F
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
~
~
80 Col
C
R
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
29
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
29
29
29
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
~
29
29
29
05
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
46
46
47
48
49
50
61
52
53
64
55
POlition
Dec
Hex
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2276
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
8B9
8BA
8BB
8BC
8BO
8BE
8BF
8CO
8C1
8C2
8C3
8C4
8C5
8C6
8C7
8C8
8C9
8CA
8CB
8CC
8CO
8CE
8CF.
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
80A
80B
80C
800
80E
80F
8EO
8E1
8E2
8E3
8E4
8E5
8E6
8E7
8E8
8E9
8EA
8EB
8EC
SED
8EE
8EF
8FO
8F1
8F2
8F3
8F4
8F5
8F6
Buffer Address (HexJ
EBCDIC
ASCII
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E2
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
53
53
53
53
53
53
53
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
64
64
64
54
64
54
54
64
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
60
24
2A
29
3B
5E
20
2F
63
54
55
56
57
58
69
6A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
8-37
80 Col
R C
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Addrel1 (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
8F7
8F8
8F9
8FA
8F8
8FC
8FO
8FE
8FF
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
90A
908
90C
900
90E
90F
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
91A
918
91C
910
91E
91F
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
92A
928
92C
920
92E
92F
930
931
932
933
934
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
29
29
29
29
29
29
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
29
29
29 77
29 78
29 79
29 80
30 01
30 02
30 03
30 04
30 05
30 06
30 07
30 08
30 09
30 10
30 11
30 12
30 13
30 14
30 15
30 16
30 17
30 18
30 19
30 20
30 21
30 22
30 23
30 24
30 25
30 26
30 27
30 28
30 29
30 30
30 31·
30 32
30 33
30 34
30 35
30 36
30 37
8-38
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
~
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
,~
80 Col
R C
~
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
62
53
64
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
'69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Position
Hex
Dec
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
2367
2368
2369
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E6
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
F5
E5
F5
E5
E5
E6
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E6
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
936
936
937
938
939
93A
93B
93C
930
93E
93F
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
94A
94B
94C
940
94E
94F
960
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
968
959
95A
958
95C
950
95E
95F
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
96A
96B
96C
960
96E
96F
970
971
972
F6
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
D4
05
D6
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
66
65
66
65
65
66
55
65
55
66
55
36
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
66
66
66
66
66 44
66 45
56
56
66
56
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
'56
50
56
56
66
56
56
56
56
56
56
66
56
66
66
51
56 52
66 50
56 24
66 2A
56
56
56
56
29
3B
5E
66 20
66 2F
56 53
56
56
66
66
66
56
56
56
66
66
66
56
56
56
56
66
54
55
66
57
68
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
Appendix B. Buffer Adcbess I/O Interlace Codes
8-39
80 Col
HO
Position
R
C
Dec
Hex
Buffer Addrea (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31·
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
97A
978
97C
970
97E
97F
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
98A
988
98C
980
98E
98F
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
99A
998
99C
990
99E
99F
9AO
9Al
9A2
9A3
9A4
9A5
9A6
9A7
9A8
9A9
9AA
9A8
9AC
9Ao
9AE
9AF
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
£6
E6
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57.
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
/~
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
~
R
C
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
01
02
03
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
98A
988
98C
980
98E
98F
9CO
9C1
9C2
9C3
9C4
9C5
9C6
9C7
9C8
9C9
9CA
9C8
9CC
9CO
9CE
9CF
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
90A
908
90C
900
90E
90F
9EO
9E1
9E2
9E3
9E4
9E5
9E6
9E7
9E8
9E9
9EA
9E8
9EC
9ED
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E6
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
80 Col
~
~
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Position
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
D6
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
'58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
58
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
58 25
58 5F
Appencfix B. Buffer Addless I/O Interface Codes
841
8-42
Position
R
C
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (HexJ
EBCDIC
ASCII
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32'
32
32
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
9EE
9EF
9FO
9F1
9F2
9F3
9F4
9F5
9F6
9F7
9F8
9F9
9FA
9F8
9FC
9FO
9FE
9FF
AOO
A01
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
A08
A09
AOA
A08
AOC
AOO
AOE
AOF
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A1A
A18
A1C
A10
A1E
A1F
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A2A
A2B
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
80 Col
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
58 3E
58 3F
58 30
58 31
58 32
58 33
58 34
58 35
58 36
58 37
58 38
58 39
58 3A
58 23
58 40
58 27
58 3D
58 22
59 20
59 41
59 42
59 43
59 44
59 45
59 46
59 47
59 48
59 49
59 58
59 2E
59 3C
59 28
59 28
59 21
59 26
59 4A
59 48
59 4C
59 40
59 4E
59 4F
59 50
59 51
59 52
59 50
59 24
59 2A
59 29
59 38
59 5E
59 20
59 2F
59 53
59 54
59 55
59 56
59 57
59 58
59 59
59 5A
59 7C
59 2C
l~
80 Co,
R C
.~
~
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
SS
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
11
18
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2621
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2668
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
A2C
A20
A2E
A2F
A30
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
A39
A3A
A3B
A3C
A30
A3E
A3F
A40
A41
A42
A43
A44
A45
A46
A47
A48
A49
A4A
A4B
A4C
A40
A4E
A4F
A50
A51
A52
A53
A54
ASS
A56
A57
ASS
A59
A5A
A58
A5C
A50
A5E
A5F
A60
A61
A62
A63
A64
A65
A66
A61
A68
A69
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E8
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
F9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
ac
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
SA
58
5C
50
5E
SF
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
SA
SA
SA
5A
5A
SA
SA
SA
SA
5A
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
5A
SA
5A
5A
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
SA
5A
SA
SA
SA
5A
SA
5A
5A
SA
5A
5A
5A
SA
SA
5A
5A
SA
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
66
57
58
59
SA
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O JnteJface Co4cs
8-43
80 Col
R C
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
34
34 64
34 65
34 66
34 67
34 68
34 69
34 70
34 71
34 72
34 73
34 74
34 75
34 76
34 77
34 78
34 79
34 80
35 01
35 02
35 03
35 04
35 05
35 06
35 07
35 08
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
E9
A6A
A68
A6e
A60
A6E
A6F
A70
A71
A72
A73
A74
A75
A76
A77
A78
A79
A7A
A78
A7C
A70
A7E
A7F
A80
A81
A82
A83
A84
A85
A86
A87
A88
A89
A8A
A88
A8C
A80
A8E
A8F
A90
A91
A92
A93
A94
A95
A96
A97
A98
A99
A9A
A98
A9C
A90
A9E
A9F
AAO
AA1
AA2
AA3
AA4
AA5
AA6
AA7
~9
E9
E9
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
5A
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
63
54
55
56
57
58
,~
~
~,
aOCoe
R C
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6A
6B
6B
6B
6B
68
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
68
AA8
AA9
AAA
AA8
AAC
AAD
AAE
AAF
A80
A81
A82
A83
A84
A85
A86
A87
A88
A89
A8A
A88
A8C
A80
A8E
A8F
ACO
AC1
AC2
AC3
AC4
AC5
AC6
AC7
AC8
AC9
ACA
AC8
ACC
ACD
ACE
ACF
ADO
A01
AD2
AD3
A04
AD5
AD6
A07
AD8
AD9
ADA
AD8
ADC
ADD
ADE
ADF
AEO
AE1
AE2
AE3
AE4
AE5
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F6
F6
F7
Fa
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C6
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
69
6A
7C
2C
26
6F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
46
46
47
48
49
6B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
61
62
60
24
2A
29
3B
6E
20
2F
63
64
66
66
Appendix II. Buffer AddJess ./0 InteJface Codes
845
80 Col
8-46
R
C
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
41
48
49
50
51
Position
Dec
Hex
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
AE6
AE7
AE8
AE9
AEA
AEB
AEC
AEO
AEE
AEF
AFO
AFl
AF2
AF3
AF4
AF5
AF6
AF7
AF8
AF9
AFA
AFB
AFC
AFO
AFE
AFF
BOO
BOl
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
BOA
BOB
BOC
BOD
BOE
BOF
Bl0
Bl1
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B1A
B1B
B1C
Bl0
B1E
B1F
B20
B21
B22
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
·6B
6B
6B
6B
6B
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
2S
25
25
25
25
25
26
25
57
~
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
62
50
24
2A
r---\
29
3B
5E
20
2F
63
/~
~.
80 Col
C
R
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B2A
B28
B2C
B20
B2E
B2F
830
831
B32
B33
834
B35
B36
B37
B38
839
B3A
B38
B3C
B30
83E
B3F
B40
B41
842
B43
B44
845
B46
847
B48
849
B4A
84B
B4C
B40
B4E
B4F
B50
B51
B52
B53
B54
B55
B56
B57
B58
859
B5A
85B
B5C
B50
B5E
B5F
BOO
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
6C
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
Position
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5f
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
3B
5E
20
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
B-47
BOCol
R C
Position
Dec
Hex
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
861
B62
B63
864
B65
B66
B67
B68
B69
B6A
86B
B6C
B60
B6E
B6F
870
B71
872
B73
B74
875
876
B77
878
B79
B7A
878
B7C
B70
87E
B7F
B80
B81
B82
B83
B84
B85
886
B87
B88
B89
88A
88B
B8C
B80
88E
B8F
B90
B91
B92
893
894
895
B96
B97
898
B99
B9A
B98
B9C
B90
B9E
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Buffer Addrell (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
5B
5C
BE 50
6E 5E
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
3B
~
R
C
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
16
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
B9F
BAO
BAl
BA2
BA3
BA4
BA5
BA6
BA7
BA8
BA9
BAA
BAB
BAC
BAD
BAE
BAF
BBO
BBl
BB2
BB3
BB4
BB5
BB6
BB7
BB8
BB9
BBA
BBB
BBC
BBo
BBE
BBF
BCO
BCl
BC2
Be3
BC4
BC5
BC6
BC7
BC8
BC9
BCA
BCB
BCC
BCD
BCE
BCF
BOO
Bol
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
BOA
BOB
BoC
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6E
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
80 Col
~
38
1""\
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
Position
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
5B
5C
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
Appendix B. Buffer Address I/O Interface Codes
B-49
R
C
Dec
Hex
Buffer Addrea (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
38
38
38
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
3S
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
3037
3038
3039
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3066
3066
3067
3068
3069
3070
3071
3072
3073
3074
3075
3076
3077
3078
3079
3080
3081
.3082
3083
3084
3085
3086
3087
3088
3089
3090
3091
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3097
3098
BOD
BoE
BoF
8EO
BEl
BE2
BE3
BE4
BE5
BE6
BE7
BE8
BE9
BEA
BEB
BEC
BED
BEE
BEF
BFO
BF1
BF2
BF3
BF4
BF5
BF6
BF7
BF8
BF9
BFA
BFB
BFC
BFo
BFE
BFF
COO
COl
CO2
C03
C04
C05
C06
C07
C08
C09
COA
COB
COC
COO
COE
COF
Cl0
Cl1
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C1A
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
SF
SF
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
6F
SF
6F
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
80 Col
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
8-50
Position
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C6
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
~
29
3B
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
.r-'\
~
10 Col
R C
Position
Hex
Dec
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
3099
3100
3101
3102
3103
3104
3105
3106
3107
3108
3109
3110
3111
3112
3113
3114
3115
3116
3117
3118
3119
3120
3121
3122
3123
3124
3125
3126
3127
3128
3129
3130
3131
3132
3133
3134
3135
3136
3137
3138
3139
3140
3141
3142
3143
3144
3145
3146
3147
3148
3149
3150
3151
3152
3153
3154
3155
3156
3157
3158
3159
3160
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
40
17
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
C18
C1C
Cl0
C1E
C1F
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C2A
C28
C2C
C20
C2E
C2F
C30
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C37
C38
C39
C3A
C38
C3C
C30
C3E
C3F
C40
C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
C46
C47
C48
C49
C4A
C48
C4C
C40
C4E
C4F
C50
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
Buffer Address (Hex)
ASCII
EBCDIC
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
FO
Fl
Fl
Fl
F1
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
F1
F1
Fl
F1
Fl
Fl
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
€2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
63
64
55
66
67
58
69
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
30
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
Appendix B. Buffer AddreIS I/O Interlace Codes
8-51
8-52
80 Col
C
R
Position
Dec
Hex
Buffer Addre. (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3167
3168
3169
3170
3171
3172
3173
3174
3175
3176
3177
3178
3179
3180
3181
3182
3183
3184
3185
3186
3187
3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3194
3195
3196
3197
3198
3199
3200
3201
3202
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
3209
3210
3211
3212
3213
3214
3215
3216
3217
3218
3219
3220
3221
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
F1
F1
Fl
Fl
Fl
F1
Fl
Fl
Fl
F1
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
F1
Fl
Fl
Fl
F1
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
Fl
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
':2
F2
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
C59
C5A
C5B
C5C
C50
C5E
C5F
CGO
C61
C62
C63
C64
C65
C66
C67
C68
C69
C6A
C6B
CSC
C60
C6E
C6F
C70
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C76
cn
C78
C79
C7A
C78
C7C
C70
C7E
C7F
C80
C8l
C82
C83
C84
C85
C86
C87
C88
C89
C8A
C8B
CSC
caD
C8E
C8F
egO
C91
C92
C93
C94
C95
09
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
04
05
-
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
~\
52
50
24
2A
29
3B
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
~
~
Buffer Addroll (Hex)
80 Col
R C
Position
Dec
Hex
EBCDIC
ASCII
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
42
42
42
42
3222
3223
3224
3225
3226
3227
3228
3229
3230
3231
3232
3233
3234
3235
3236
3237
3238
3239
3240
3241
3242
3243
3244
3245
3246
3247
3248
3249
3250
3251
3252
3253
3254
3255
3256
3257
3258
3259
3260
3261
3262
3263
3264
3265
3266
3267
3268
3269
3270
3271
3272
3273
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3279
3280
3281
3282
3283
C96
C97
C98
C99
C9A
C98
C9C
C90
C9E
C9F
CAO
CAl
CA2
CA3
CA4
CA5
CA6
CA7
CA8
CA9
CAA
CA8
CAC
CAD
CAE
CAF
CBO
CBl
CB2
CB3
CB4
CB5
CB6
CB7
CB8
CB9
caA
CB8
cac
CaD
caE
CBF
CCO
CCl
CC2
CC3
CC4
CC5
CC6
CC7
CCS
CC9
CCA
CCB
CCC
CCD
CCE
CCF
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
coo
COl
CO2
CD3
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
01
02
03
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
4A
4B
4C
Appendix B. Buffer AcIdJesa I/O Interface Codes
8-53
B-54
BOCoI
R C
Dec
Hex
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
3284
3285
3286
3287
3288
3289
3290
3291
3292
3293
3294
3295
3296
3297
3298
3299
3300
3301
3302
3303
3304
3305
3306
3307
3308
3309
3310
3311
3312
3313
3314
3315
3316
3317
3318
3319
3320
3321
3322
3323
3224
3325
3326
3327
3328
3329
3330
3331
3332
3333
3334
3335
3336
3337
3338
3339
3340
3341
3342
3343
3344
CD4
C05
CD6
C07
C08
CD9
COA
C08
CDC
COO
COE
COF
CEO
CEl
CE2
CE3
CE4
CE5
CE6
CE7
CE8
CE9
CEA
CE8
CEC
CEO
CEE
CEF
CFO
CFl
CF2
CF3
CF4
CF5
CF6
CF7
CF8
CF9
CFA
CF8
CFC
CFO
CFE
CFF
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
OOA
008
DOC
DOD
DOE
OOF
010
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F3
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
Position
04
05
06
07
08
09
5A
58
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
40
4E
4F
50
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
40
4E
4F
~
60
51
52
50
24
2A
29
38
5E
20
2F
53
64
55
66
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
28
28
21
26
.~
10 Col
R C
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
~
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
43 11
43 12
43 13
43 14
43 .15
43 16
43 17
43 18
43 19
43 20
43 21
43 22
43 23
43 24
43 25
43 26
43 27
43 28
43 29
43 30
43 31
43 32
43 33
43 34
43 35
43 36
43 37
43 38
43 39
43 40
43 41
43 42
43 43
43 44
43 45
43 46
43 47
43
~
66
67
68
Position
Hex
Dec
3345
3346
3347
3348
3349
3350
3351
3352
3353
3354
3355
3356
3357
3358
3359
3360
3361
3362
3363
3364
3365
3366
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371
3372
3373
3374
3375
3376
3377
3378
3379
3380
3381
3382
3383
3384
3385
3386
3387
3388
3389
3390
3391
3392
3393
3394
3395
3396
3397
3398
3399
3400
3401
3402
3403
3404
3405
3406
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
01A
01B
01C
010
OlE
01F
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
02A
02B
02C
020
02E
02F
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
D3A
03B
03C
030
03E
03F
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
04A
04B
04C
040
04E
Buffer Addrea (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
Cl
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
SA
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
6B
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
7B
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
51
52
50
24
2A
29
3B
5E
20
2F
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
25
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
30
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
5B
2E
3C
28
2B
Appendix B. Bu"er Address I/O Interface Codes
B-SS
8-56
80 Col
R
C
Position
Dec
Hex
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
3407
3408
3409
3410
3411
3412
3413
3414
3415
3416
3417
3418
3419
3420
3421
3422
3423
3424
3425
3426
3427
3428
3429
3430
3431
3432
3433
3434
3435
3436
3437
3438
3439
3440
3441
3442
3443
3444
3445
3446
3447
3448
3449
3450
3451
3462
3463
3464
3465
3466
3457
3458
3459
3460
3461
3462
3463
3464
3465
3466
3467
3468
o4F
050
051
052
053
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
D54
055
056
057
058
059
o5A
058
05C
050
o5E
o5F
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
o6A
068
o6C
060
o6E
o6F
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
o7A
078
O7C
070
o7E
o7F
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
o8A
088
o8C
Buffer Address (Hex)
EBCDIC
ASCII
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
F5
F6
F6
F5
F5
F6
F6
F5
F6
F5
F6
F6
F6
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F6
F6
F5
F6
F6
F6
F5
F6
F6
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F6
F5
F5
F6
F5
F5
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
F6
4F
60
01
02
03
D4
05
D6
07
08
09
6A
58
5C
60
5E
5F
60
61
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
6A
68
6C
60
6E
6F
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F6
F6
F7
F8
F9
7A
78
7C
70
7E
7F
40
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
4A
48
4C
36
36
36
36
36
36
35
36
36
36
36
35
35
36
35
36
35
35
36
35
35
36
35
36
36
36
35
35
36
35
35
35
36
36
35
35
35
35
36
36
35
36
35
35
36
35
36
36
35
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
~
21
26
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
60
61
52
60
24
2A
29
3B
5E
20
2F
53
64
55
66
57
58
59
5A
7C
2C
26
5F
3E
3F
30
31
32
33
34
36
36
37
38
39
3A
23
40
27
3D
22
20
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
58
2E
3C
~
Appendix C. Status Indicator Code
This appendix lists the error status indications of the 3276, possible causes of errors,
the handling of each error by the 3276, and the recommended recovery technique.
The symbol that appears in the Operator Information Area for each error is shown in
parentheses in the "Indicator" column and is described in Appendix A.
For Test Subsystem switch (see Figure A-2) operation, when operated in the external
modem configuration, the Test Operate switch of the DCE side of the modem cable
connector should be set to Test.
An indication consists of a symbol and a numeric code, as shown in the "Indicator"
column of Figure C-l, and is described as follows:
)C PROG nn
Program Check.
This symbol is displayed when a programming error is detected
in the data received by the control unit.
)C~nn
Communication Check.
A communication reminder symbol (~nn) is displayed
when a communication link error is detected; it indicates
that data cannot be sent. The reminder is automatically
cleared when the error condition is removed. If the operator
attempts to communicate with the host when a communication
error reminder is displayed, a communication check ()C~nn)
condition occurs and is not cleared until the operator presses
the RESET key.
I)C ~ nn
Machine Check.
This symbol is displayed when the problem is located in the
display station.
The numeric codes consist of two digits, if the display unit is attached to the 3276.
(When the display unit is attached to the 3276, the II symbol is displayed in the
Readiness location of the Operator Information Area.) These codes and their meaning
are subject to change.
Appendix C. Status Indicator Code
C-l
Probable Causa
Effect
Recovery
Error Code
Indicator
11
(SDLC)
Sys Chk Light
Program Chk:
(X PROG 11)
12
(SSC)
Sys Chk Light
Program Chk:
(X PROG 12)
13
(SSC)
Sys Chk Light
Program Chk:
(X PROG 13)
Invalid buffer address received or
incomplete order sequence in
Write, EraselWrite, or EraselWrite
Alternate command received.
14
(SSC)
Sys Chk Light
Program Chk:
(X PROG 14)
Invalid Copy command received.
16
(SSC)
Sys Chk Light
Program Chk:
(X PROG 15)
Invelid command sequence.
16
(SSC)
Sys Chk Light
Program Chk:
(X PROG 16)
Line buffer overflow.
20
Sys Chk Light
Comm
Reminder:
('2 20)
3276 has sent a NAK because:
- Siock-character-checking error
was detected, or
-Three seconds elapsed during
a read operation without receiving
Syn, ETX, or ETS.
Sys Chk Light
Comm
Reminder:
(~22)
No SYN characters received for 3
seconds and this occurred 7 times
while monitoring selection or
polling.
Display error indication at
all display stations.
Continue to monitor the line.
Verify the operational status of
the communication network.
Host recovery.
Receipt of poll or selection with
3276 address resets
System Check light end
Communication Reminder
symbol.
22
(SDLC)
Sys Ch k Light
Comm
Reminder:
rtz 22)
No flags received for about 24 to
32 seconds, and the host comrnunlcation adapter has not been in
Sync during this period.
Display error indication at
all display stations.
Verify the operational status of
the communication network.
Host recovery.
Receipt of valid frame resets
System Check light and
Communication Reminder
symbol.
23
(SSC)
Sys Chk Light
Comm
Reminder:
(iz 23)
Fifteen 3-second tlmeouts occurred
when the host expected the 3276
to send a text block as a response
to a read-type command.
Display error indication at all
display stations.
Go to control mode.
24
(SSC)
Sys Chk Light
Comm
Reminder:
(iz 24)
Fifteen 3-second timeouts occurred
when PAD, SYN, and data were
not received after sending ACK or
RVI.
Host recovery.
Receipt of poll or selection
with 3276 address resets
System Check light and
Communication Reminder
symbol.
If problem persists, press Test
Subsystem.
.
(SSC)
22
(SSC)
C-2
3276 received a negative response
from host.
Display error condition at
affected display station.
System Check light is turned off
when 3276 receives any
I-frame, valid PIU, or an SNRM.
Press RESET to reset Program
Check symbol.
Wait for host error recovery if
)C {t: is indicated.
If problem persists and 3276 is
in Encrypt/Decrypt session,
log off and then log on.
Invalid command received;
host programming problem in
write data stream.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Set SSC Sense: CR.
Send EOT.
Go to Control mode.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Set SSC Sense: OC.
Send EOT.
Got to control mode.
Receipt of poll or selection with
3276 address resets System
Check light.
Press RESET to reset Program
Check symbol.
Call host-support programmer if
problem persists.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Set SSC Sense: OC.
Send EOT.
Got to control mode.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Replace display image with
image displayed before receive
operation began.
Host recovery (Host should
retransmit the last transmission).
Receipt of poll, selection, or
data resets System Check
light and Communication
Reminder symbol.
If switched network, redial;
if SNSU is installed, use it.
ErrorCocie
Indicator
25
(SDLC)
Sys Chk Light
Comm
Reminder:
c-tz 26)
Something in the link is preventing
establishment or reestablishment
of communication.
Display error indication at
all display stations.
Verify the operational status of
the communication network.
HOlt recovery.
System Check light and
Communication Reminder
symbol are reset when an
SNRM or a DISC Is received
or when write operation is
completed.
If problem persists, press Test
Subsystem.
26
(aSC)
Sys Chk Light
Comm
Reminder:
(-iz 26)
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Go to control mode.
27
(aSC)
Sys Chk Light
Comm
Reminder:("227)
Fifteen continuous ACKO received,
instead of ACK1-or vice versa
(Wrong ACK - ENQ exchange).
Wrong ACK receptions or 3-second
timeouts occurred 16 times in a
row
Fifteen continuous NAKs received
for transmitted/retransmitted
text.
Host recovery
Receipt of poll or selection
with 3276 address resets
System Check light and
Communication Reminder
symbol.
If problem persists, call host
operator.
29
(SDLC)
Sys Chk Light
Comm
Reminder:
Command reject caused by:
a. Detection of an NR sequence
error, or
b. Receipt of a command that
has no data field defined, or
c. Receipt of an invalid command.
Display error indication at
all display stations.
Host recovery.
Receipt of valid SNRM or
DISC command from hOlt
resets System Check light
and Communication Reminder
symbol.
If problem persists, call hostsupport programmer.
31
(SOLC)
Sys Ch k Light
Comm
Reminder:
(-tz 31)
Loop Adapter did not receive R LSD
for more than 4 seconds.
Display error indication at all
display stations.
HOlt recovery.
Call host operator.
33
Sys Chk Light
Comm
Reminder:
(iz 33)
Data Set Ready (OSR) signal from
modem has dropped.
34
(aSC and
SOLC)
Sys Chk Light
Comm
Reminder:
(-tz 34)
Write timeout caused by:
a. Modem clocking miSSing, or
b. Dropping of CTS.
Display error indication at all
Check modem.
display stations.
Host recovery.
asc: Receipt of poll or
asc: Go to control mode.
selection resets System Check
SOLC: Go to line·monitor mode.
light and Communication
Reminder symbol.
SOLC: Receipt of valid SOLC
frame resets System Check
light and Communication
Reminder symbol.
If problem persists, press Test
Subsystem.
36
(aSC)
Sys Ch k Light
Comm
Reminder:
(-tz 36)
Fifteen 31econd timeouts occurred
with no response received for the
transmitted text to the host.
3276 component or host facility
problem, or host is busy.
Display error indication at all
display stations.
Continue operation.
Receipt of poll or selection with
3276 address rel8ts System
Check light and Communication Remind,r symbol.
If problem persists, call host
operator.
36
Sys Chk Light
Comm
Reminder:
(oiz 36)
Fifteen continuous ACKOs
received insteed of ACK1s, or
vice versa.
Display error indication at all
display stations.
Continua operation.
Receipt of poll or selection with
3276 address rasets System
Check light and Communicatlon Reminder symbol.
If problem persists, call host
operator.
("z 29)
(aSC and
SDLC)
(aSC)
Probable Cause
Effect
Recovery
Appendix C. Status Indicator Code
C-3
Error Code
Indicator
Probable Cause
Effect
Display error Indication at
affected displey station.
Recovery
Press RESET.
Retry operation.
41
(Keyboard)
Mach Chk:
(X ~. 41)
Internal malfunction.
42
(Keyboard)
Retry:
(X?+42)
Keystroke lost because of temporary
system overload.
Keying was attempted when device
was busy or not functioning.
Conflicting operations were
attempted simultaneously, for
example. the CLEAR key was
pressed during selector·light-pen
operation.
43
(Feature)
Mach Chk:
(X t!I;! 43)
Internal malfunction.
44
(Feature)
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 44)
45
(Feature)
Retry:
(X?+45)
No response/receive parity error
from MSR or MHS read command.
55
(Feature)
Mach Chk:
(X hij 55)
Battery in the 3279 is discharged.
or Internal malfunction.
Display error indication at
affected 3279 display station.
Set Normal/Test switch from
Normal to Test, then back to
Normal.
If no indication displayed. check
the battery. and replace It if
necesS8J:V •
If indication displayed, call
service representative.
66
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 56)
Internal malfUnction.
Display error indication at
affected 3279 display station.
Press RESET.
Retry operation.
If operation cannot be continued.
call service representative.
69
Mach Chk
Light
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 59)
Bad parity in master key of
Encrypt/Decrypt feature.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Disable Encrypt/Decrypt
function if RESET is pressed.
Check the battery, and replace
it if necessary.
60
Mach Chk:
(X bil 60)
Internal malfunction.
(Feature)
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Disable MSR/MHS function.
Press RESET.
Retry operation.
61
(Feature)
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 61)
Disable Selector Light.pen
feature.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Set NormallTest switch from
Normal to Test. then back
to Normal.
63
Mach Chk
Light
Mach Chk:
(X bil 63)
Error in Encrypt/Decrypt function.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Disable Encrypt/Decrypt
function if RESET is pressed.
Press and release Test Subsystem.
65
(Feature)
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 65)
Internal malfunction.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Disable display.
Set sense:
BSC: DC/US
SNA: 081C
Issue hardware poll and
accept only POR from station.
At 3276/3278. set NormallTest
from Normal to Test and back
again (or switch power off. then
on).
At 3230/3268. press Test SWitch,
or switch printer power off,
then on.
At 3287:
1. Press and hold Test switch.
2. Press and release Reset
switch.
3. Release Test switch.
Or switch 3287 ppwer off, then
on.
At 5210, press STAAT. Or
switch. 5210 power off, wait
10 seconds. and switch 5210
power on.
66
(Feature)
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 66)
Internal malfunction.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Disable display.
Set sense:
BSC: DC/US ·IR
SNA: 082B· 081C
Issue hardware poll and accept
only POR from station.
Set NormallTest switch from
Normal to Test, then back to
Normal (or switch power off,
then on).
(Feature)
C-4
Of ALT or Alpha was struck
just prior to error. restrike to
remove keyboard from ALT
or Alpha shift status before
pressing RESET.)
Press RESET, and retry the
operation.
Press RESET.
Retry operation.
Error Code
Indicator
Probable Cause
Effect
Aecovery
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Disable display.
Set sense:
BSC: DC/US
SNA: 081C
Issue hardware poll and accept
only POR from station.
At 3276/3278, set Normal/Test
from Normal to Test and back
again (or switch power off, then
on).
At 3230/3262/3268, press Test
switch, or switch printer power
off, then on.
At 3287:
1. Press and hold Test switch.
2. Press and release Reset switch
3. Release Test switch.
Or switch 3287 power off, then
on.
At 3289, press Reset.
At 5210, press START. Or
switch 5210 power off, wait
10 seconds, and switch 5210
power on.
69
(Display
or
Printer)
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 69)
70
(Display)
or
Printer)
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 70)
Display error indication at
affected display station
(display may not be successful
because cif display failure).
Disable display.
Set sense:
BSC: IR
SNA: 081C
Issue hardware poll and accept
only POR from station.
71
(Display)
or
Printer)
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 71)
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Disable display.
Setsense:
esC: DC/US
SNA: 081C
Issue hardware poll and accept
only POR from station.
(DiS1~ay or
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 72)
Printer)
73
(Display
or
Printer)
74
(Feature)
Internal malfunction.
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 73)
Disconnect 3278 Model 5
Wrong configuration: 3276 has a
3278 Model 5 in subSystem.
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 74)
75
(MC)
Mach Chk
Light
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 75)
76
(MC)
Mach Chk
Light
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 76)
Internal malfunction.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Disable display.
Set sense:
BSC : DC/US or IR
SNA: 081C
Issue hardware poll and accept
only POR from station.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Disable terminal.
Set sense:
BSC: DC/US or IR
SNA: 081C
Poll is not issued and POR from
station cannot be received.
Display error indication at
affected display sUition.
Disable terminal.
Set sense:
BSC: DC/US or IR
SNA: 081C
Poll is not issued, and power on
reset (POR) from terminals
cannot be received.
At 3276/3278, set Normal/Test
from Normal to Test and back
again (or switch power off, then
on).
At 3230/3262/3268, press :rest
switch, or switch printer power
off2then on.
At 3 87:
.
1. Press and hold Test SWitch.
2. Press and release Reset switch
3. Release Test switch.
Or switch 3287 power off, then
on.
At 3289, press Reset.
At 5210, press START. Or
switch 5210 power off, wait
10 seconds, and switch 5210
power on.
Press and release Test
Subsystem.
Appendix C. Status Indicator Code
C-S
Error Code
Indicator
77
(Display)
Mach Chk:
(X ~ 77)
78
(BSC
or
SDLC)
Mach Chk
Ught
Mach Chk:
78)
ex
79
(BSC
or
SDLC)
Mach Chk
Ught
Mach Chk:
(X
79)
81
(SDLC)
Mach Chk
Light
Mach Chk:
(X
81)
82
(MC)
Mach Chk
Light
Mach Chk:
82)
ex
Mach Chk
Light
Mach Chk:
83
(MC)
(X
85
eBSC
or
SDLC)
87
(BSC
and
SDLC)
88
(BSC
and
SDLC)
Mach Chk
Light
Mach Chk:
88)
ex
89
Mach Chk
Light
Mach Chk:
(X
89)
(MC)
90
(MC)
91
(MC)
MachChk
Mach Chk:
91)
ex
92-98
(MC)
MachChk
99
(MC)
C-6
Mach Chk
Ught
Mach Chk:
(X
90)
Ugh~
Mach
(X
Mach
Light
Mach
(X
Effect
Recovery
Clear display.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Set sense:
BSC: DC/US or IR
SNA: 082B or 081 C
Disable display; set sense:
BSC: DC/US
SNA: 081C
Set NonnallTest lWitch from
Normal to Test, then back
to Normal (or switch power
off, then on).
Intemal malfunction.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Disable tenninal.
Setsansa:
BSC: DC/US or IR
SNA: 081C
Press and release Text/
SUbsystem.
Error in Encrypt/Decrypt function.
Display error indication at
affected display station.
Disable Encrypt/Decrypt
function if RESET Is pressed.
Internal malfunction.
Display error indication at all
display stations.
Turn off Line Ready (OK).
Stop machine.
83)
Mach Chk
Ught
Mach Chk:
86)
ex
Mach Chk
Ught
Mach Chk:
86)
ex
Mach Chk
Light
Mach Chk:
(X
87)
86
(SDLC)
Loop
Probable Cau.
Chk:
92-98)
Chk
Chk:
99)
Press and release Test/
SUbsystem.
Display error indication at all
display stations.
Tum off Line Ready (OK).
Stop machine
Press and release Test
SUbsystem.
Perform host recovery if
required.
Display error indication at all
display stations.
Turn off Line Ready (OK) and
other Unit Operable lights.
Stop machine.
Error Code
21-87
(SDlC)
Indicator
Sys Chk light
Program Chk:
(X PROG
21-87)
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
50:
51:
59:
60:
61:
68:
69:
70:
71:
72:
73:
74:
7S:
76:
77:
78:
79:
80:
82:
85:
86:
87:
I
Probable Cause
Effect
Recovery
Display error indication at
affected display station; if
it cannot be displayed there,
display It at all other display
stations.
Set sense bits XXXX (as
indicated in adjacent column).
Press RESET.
Await recovery from host.
EXR from upstream node.
Invalid OAF for PU (sense bits 800F).
PU Not Active (sense bits 80OS).
Unrecognized OAF (sense bits 8004).
Segmenting Error.
lU is flot active (sense bits 8009).
No lU·lU session (sense bits 8005).
Invalid ACTPU parameter (0821).
REaMS error (sense bits OBOC, 0815, 1003, 1007).
Data Traffic Reset state (sense bits 2005).
Sequence number error (sense bits 2001).
FM data chaining error (sense bits 2002).
Normal flow DFC in INC state (sense bits 2002).
BB is not found on FM data request (sense bits 2003).
DFC carries EB in BETB (sense bits 2003).
Invalid 3270 command (sense bits 1003).
Data follows READ type command (sense bits 1003).
Nonsupported SNA command (sense bits 1003).
Control Function carries Null RU (sense bits 1003).
Invalid Signal request code (sense bits 1003).
ORDER with invalid buffer address (sense bits 1005).
Incomplete order sequence (sense bits 1005).
FI bit in RHO is not supported (sense bits 400F).
CD in RH2 is required (sense bits 0829).
Exception Mode is not allowed for copy (sense bits 0843).
Invalid ACTLU parameter (sense bits 0821).
Second BIND is received from current PLU (sense bits 0815),
Session limit exceeded (sense bits 0805).
Bind RU is incomplete (sense bits 0821).
Invalid suppon level (RU1-3) (sense bits 0821).
Invalid PlU protocol (RU4) (sense bits 0821).
Invalid SlU protocol (RUS) (sense bits 0821).
Invalid common protocol (RU6, 7) (sense bits 0821).
Too small RU length (RU10) (sense bits 0821).
Too large buffer size (RU9, 11) (sense bits 0821).
Invalid lU type (RU14) (sense bits 0821).
Invalid screen size (RU20·24) (sense bits 0821).
Encrypt/Decrypt not supported; BIND parameteror
error (RU26) (sense bits 0821).
Encrypt/Decrypt session (BIND) parameter error
(sense bits 08211.
Encrypt/Decrypt state error (sense bits 2009).
Encrypt/Decrypt CRV failure (sense bits 0821),
Encrypt/Decrypt RU data error (sense bits 1001).
43: If 3276 is in Encrypt/
Decrypt session, log off
and then log on.
86: Verify the master key value.
87: log off and then log on.
Note: Program checks 22,23,24,26,27, or 69 will not be displayed by.some 32765.
Appendix C. Status Indicator Cocle
C-7
Appendix D. APL/Text Feature
The APL/Text processing capabilities of the IBM 3270 Infonnation Display System
are available on the devices shown in Figure D·I when attached to a 3276 Control Unit
Display Station. These devices must be equipped with the appropriate APL/Text
and Extended Character Set Adapter or Text Print features, and must be attached to
an APL/Text.featured 3276 Control Unit Display Station.
3030-2/3268-21
3287·1 or 2 Printer
Extended
Character Set
Adapter
3262-13
Printer
3289-1 or 2
Line Printer
Text Print
Text Print
Feature
124 Characters
126 Characters
APL/Text
222 Characters
I
3278-1,2.3,4
Display Station
t------------.
3279-2B or 3B
----
Display Station
Extended
Character Set
Adapter
APL/Text
176 Characters
I--
1----
r----
EBCDIC/APL
Keyboard
176 Characters
Katakana/APL
Keyboard
208 Characters
222 Characters
3276-1.2,3,4,11,12,
13, or 14 Control Unit
Display Station
EBCDIC/AP L
Keyboard
1..--- .
EBCDIC/Text
Keyboard
169 Characters
APL/Text Control
Extended
Character Set
Adapter
-
1----
KatakanalAP L
Keyboard
208 Characters
Extended
Function Base
APL/Text
1... _ _ •
222 Characters
EBCDIC/Text
Keyboard
169 Characters
Fipre 1).1. Diapam of APL/Text Devices
Appendix D. APLtrext Featule
D-l
APLrrext and Text Printer Data Streams
The I/O interface codes used by the APL/Text-featured 3276, the 3230, 3268,
3278 t and 3287 with APL/Text and Extended Character Set Adapter features t
and the 3279 Models 2B and 3B are shown mFigures D-2 and D-3. I/O interface
codes with National Use differences are shown in Figure D4. Codes used with
Katakana/APL and Extended Character Set Adapter features are shown in
Figures D-S and D-6. The I/O interface codes used by the APL/Text-featured
3276 and 3262/3289 with the Text-Print feature are shown in Figure 0.7.
The 3230/3268/3278/3279/3287 APL/Text and the 3262/3289 Text print
I/O interface codes do not affect the operation of any 3276 data stream
commands, orders, or control characters. All 3230/3268/3278/3279/3287
APL-specific and Text-specific characters are specified by 2-byte sequences;
each 2-byte sequence consists of a Graphic Escape (GE) (hex '08t) control
character followed by a character code.
The 3276 APL/Text data streams:
• Contain 94 EBCDIC characters (Plus space).
• Specify all APL- and Text-specific characters by using a 2-byte sequence consisting
of a hex 08 control character followed by a character code.
• Contain 10 graphic plot characters.
The 3276 Text print data streams:
• Contain 93 U.s. English set characters (plus space).
3276 APL/Text
The 3276 APL/Text Control special feature, the Extended Function Base special
feature (prerequisite for the APL/Text Control feature)t the APL/Text special
feature t and the Extended Character Set Adapter special feature (prerequisite for
the APL/Text feature) enable the 3276 to control 3230st 3268s t 3278s, 3279s t
and 3287s that have APL/Text capability and 3262s and 3289s that have text-print
capability .
Attachment of the appropriate APL or Text keyboard to an APL/Text-featured 3276
enables the 3276 operator to interact with either APL or text applications as well as
existing applications.
D-2
Bits
Bits
4667
,
Hex 1
00
01
10
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
0
E
F
SP
&
-
II III III
0000
0
0001
1
0010
2
0011
3
0100
4
0101
5
0110
6
0111
7
1000
8
1001
9
1010
A
II II iii
:
1011
B
II
.
II
1100
C
*
%
II
I
A~
E~ a
III
A
J
b
k
s
B
K
S
2
E~
c
I
t
C
L
T
3
e. .
d
m
u
0
M
U
4
e
n
v
E
N
V
6
e.... A~ 'e
.~
Ii ....
A~
..
i~
f
0
w
F
0
W
6
i~
I~
9
P
x
G
P
X
7
h
q
y
H
Q
Y
8
i
r
z
I
R
Z
9
a~
0.....
6... U~
u....
U~
C~
IJ
<
,
0
(
)
-
1110
E
+
;
>
=
1111
F
II
m
?
1m
II through
D ..
4"-
Hex 0
1
i~
C-4ll1lll
14- 2,3
0
j
1101
Notes:
~ 0,1
11
~
III
are the National use diffBrencss. They are shown in Figure 0-4.
Canadian French characmrs.
1. No control characmrs are shown in this chart.
2. All co. can be entered from the keyboard.
3. Cheracmr cods B6Signments other than those shown within all outlined areas of this chart are undefined. If an undefined
character code is programmed, the character that will be displayed or prinmd is a hyphen (hex 60) (3287 prints a blank); allo,
a hex 60 will be returned on a subsequent read operation. (For control units with Configuration Support C installed, undefined
control codes (X'OO'to X'3F') cause a negative response (SNA) or an Op Chk (SSC). The charBCmr displayed or printed for an
undefined character code Is unpredictable.) The character displayed or printed for a given undefined charBCter code may be
diffemnt for other devic(J$. IBM relBrves the'rlght to change at any time the character displayed or printed for any undefinedcharacter code.
4. NL (hex 16), EM (hex 19), FF (hex DC), and NUL (hex 00) am not displayed or prln ted. The DUP (hex 1C)and FM (hex 1E)
control characters on dual cBle mrminals are displayed BI • and; respectively, and are printed B8 • and;.
5. DUP (hsx 1C) end FM (hex 1E) control characters on mono CB8e terminals are displayed es • end,· relpectively, end are
printed BI • and; •
Figure D·2. APL/Text Feature, I-Byte I/O Interface Codes (3230/3268/3276/3278/3279/3287)
Appendix D. APLtrext Feature
0..3
Bits
4567
Hex 1
1
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
6
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
0
E
F
,.."
0
-
.0:
{
}
e
(~
)~
\.
+~
-"'IlIIII
p
•
+
L
.J
0000
0
0001
1
A
0010
2
-B -K
0011
3
0100
4
-C -L -T
-0 -M -U
0101
6
-E
0110
6
-F -0 -W
0111
7
1000
8
1001
9
-G -P -X
y
Q
-H - -I -A -Z
1010
A
t
:::>
n
V
A-
1011
B
.J.
c
u
Il
Iff
1100
C
~
XX
1
T
1101
0
r
0
[
]
1110
E
l
±
~
=f::
1111
F
J
S
.. .
0
I II
.. - I
-
1\
I
I
V
•-
~
I
-N -
-
n
1
1"II1II
~
2""
3
3""
2,3
Hex 0
1IIIt...
1IIIt...
r
-,
x
I-
~
6~
\
1
T
§
11
.
V
0~
4""
6""
W
--
Bits
0,1
11
10
01
00
7~
8~
9""
...
~
0
I
-4. National Use Differences I/O Interlace Code (3230/3268/3276/3278/3279/3287)
I~
AppendJx D. APLtrext Featulc
,.
1>-5
Bits
00
Sits
4567
Hr
0000
0
SP
0001
1
0
0010
2
r
0011
3
.J
0100
4
,
0101
5
0110
6
,
0111
7
7'
1000
8
1
1001
9
?
1010
A
£
1011
B
1100
C
11
10
01
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
S'
&
-
X
I
•
<
-
T
3
"'?
0
M
U
4
~
,.:
E
N
V
5
-r
A
F
0
W
6
-
;l
G
P
X
7
)l
:c
H
a
y
8
*
~
I
R
Z
9
.:z.
.l:
T
*
'')
*
-
:f
?
a
jJ
T
:
¥
,
#
*
%
@
F
I
0
L
':/
1111
$'
C
?
+
F
2
~
E
E
S
"'"
1110
D
K
7-
)
C
B
1
(
11
J
*
D
10
A
~
1101
01
~
7'
I
00
,
::::I
/
.:::L
1
v
J:1
"t
y
.,=
;
>
=
A-
I::.
I)
--,
?
"
~
7
J"
"
'7
~
.
0
Nota:
I. No control charactBr. am mown In thl. chart
2. All coda can be entBrsd from the keyboard.
3. OIaracter codB .,Ignmenu other than thOlB ,hown within all outllnBd am. of th/$ chan am undeflnfld. If an undeflnBd
character code I. programmed, the characmr that will bs dlsplayBd or printed I, a hyphen (hex 60) (3287 prints a blank);
allo, a hex 60 will be mtuMed on a sublllquent I'fNJd operation. The c/faracmr displayed or printed for a given undefined
character code may be diffBmnt for other devictJ'. IBM reserve, the right to chanfIB at any time the character displayed
or printed for any undefined character code.
'
4. NL (hex 16), EM (hex 19), FF (hex DC), and NUL (hex 00) am not dllplayed or printed. The DUP (hex Ie) and FM (hex tE)
control charactflr. on dual cae terminal. am di,playBd 88 . .and :respect/vely, and are printed 88 • and,· •
6. DUP (hex I C) and FM (hex I E) control character. on mono C8SB terminal. am dl,played 88 • and; ffllpect/flBly, and are
printed 8$
•
and; •
Figure D-S. Katakana/APL I-Byte I/O Interface Codes (3230/3268/3276/3278/3279/3287)
~
0,1
040-
2,3
~ Hex 0
00
J~
Hex 1
Bits
4567
1
01
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
6
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
0
E
F
.-.;
0
-
0:
{
}
~
f
(~
)"II1II ...1
1"II1II
2"II1II
0
0000
-S
II
-
.. -
I
-
\.
+~
_""lII
-T
I
•-
•
p
•
+
n
W
L
..J
0001
1
A
J
0010
2
-B
K
0011
3
-C
-L
0100
4
0101
6
0110
6
0111
7
-0 -M .U
-E -N -V
-F -0 -W
-G -P -X
1000
8
1001
9
1010
A
1011
B
1\
y
-H -a -I -R -Z
I
I
I
..
0
V
~2
...3
~ 2,3
-
Hex 0
3"II1II
4"I11III
r -,
5~
x
I-
-i
6"I11III
\
1
T
7"I11III
.
§
11
8"I11III
9"II1II
t
'"
::>
n
'iJ
A,
C
U
~
¥
C
~
IX
1
T
1101
0
r
0
[
]
1110
E
L
±
~
=1=
1111
F
•
I
,100
Bits
f-- 0,1
11
10
~
...
I
I
, ,
~
I
~
r;}
~
~
e
~
IB
R
q;
•
~
Not..:
D
D
Subscripu
Supencriptl
1. ThflSe codBS, praceded by a hfIX 08 control character, transmit the graphics ,hown.
2. No control charactel$ artJ ,hown in thl' chart.
3. All codBS within the ,olid outlined a(8111 of thi, chart can be entered from the keyboard: the 10 graphic plot charactel$ within
the dashed outlined a(8a cannot be entered from the keyboard.
~
4. Character coda 8I8ignmentl other than those shown within all outlined artJ. of thi' chart artJ undefined. /f an undefined character
code is programmed, the character that will be displayed or printed is a hyphen (hex 60) (3287 prints a blank): .a/80, a hex 60
.will be retumed on a subsequent read operation. For control unitl with Configuration Support' C in,talled, undefined control
.code, from X'OO'to X'3F' cause a negative responl8 (SNA) or an Op Chk (SSC). The character displayed or printed for a given
•undefined character code may be diHerent for other devic8$. 'ISM f'fI88fV8' the right to chanlJfl at any time the character displayed
.or printed for any undefined character code.
Figure~.
Katakana/APL 2-Byte 1/0 Interface Codes (3230/3268/3276/3278/3279/3287)
Appendix D. APLfI'ext Feature
0.7
Bits
01
00
Bits
4567
r-- 0,1
11
10
Hex 1
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
J
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
0
E
F
SP
&
-
_"'lIlII
0""
{
}
\
0
1"'l1l11
A
J
0000
0
0001
1
0010
a
j
I~
2
b
k
s
2~
B
K
S
2
0011
3
C
I
t
3~ C
L
T
3
0100
4
d
m
u
4"'l1l11
0
M
U
4
0101
5
e
n
v
6~
E
N
V
6
0110
6
f
0
w
6"'l1l11
F
0
W
6
0111
7
9
P
x
7"'l1l11
G
P
X
7
1000
8
h
q
y
8"II1II H
a
y
8
1001
9
i
r
z
9"II1II
R
Z
9
1010
A
1011
B
1100
C
I
,
I
I
I
:
$
,
#
{
}
L
.J
*
%
@
~
J:(
r
-,
4=
<
CR
,
("'lIlII
)"'lIlII
+~
±
[.
]
~
=/::
(
)
-
E
+
;
>
=
F
I
-,
7
" + • • -
1101
0
1110
1111
I
1
Nota:
D
SupeflCripU
I. No control character. exCfJpt CR (hex OD) a18 .hown in thi' chart The CR control chsl'llCter proflid8$ the capsbility to inhibit
line sdvance sfter sline of chsracte,. il printed.
.2 Chsracter code hex A I CSUI8$ S 0 (degr88) character to print when the 3289 text print belt I, inltalled and s -- (tilde) character
to print when a u.s. Englllh 3289 print belt II In'talled.
3. Character code .,Ignmenu other thsn th088lhown within the outlined Sf881 of thil chart S18 undefined. If sn undefined
chsracter code II programmed, the chsracter thst will be printed il s hyphen (hex 60): silo, s hex 60 will be mtumed on s
IUbsequent I'8Bd operation. IBM ,.elV8$ the right to chsnge st sny time the chsractrJr printed for sn undefined chsracter code.
4. NL (heJC 16), EM (hex IS), FF (hex DC), snd NUL (hex DO) S18 not printfld. The DUP (hex IC) snd FM (hex IE) control
chsractrJ,. 818 printed 8$
•
snd: ,.pectively.
Ffaure 0.7. Text Print I/O Interface Codes (3262/3289)
~ 2,3
~ Hex 0
r-"\.
3278-1, -2, -3, and -4 or 3279-2B and -3B APL/Text
The APL/Text special feature, the Extended Character Set Adapter special feature
(prerequisite for the APL/Text feature), and the appropriate APL or Text keyboard
enable a 3278 or 3279 operator to interact with either APL or text applications as well
as existing applications.
APL Keyboards
The 3276 and 3278/3279 APL keyboards are typewriter-like keyboards with keys that
contain both APL and the featured.language characters. The APL characters are colored
orange (on white keys). The PFI throughPF12 keys on the APL keyboards are located
on the right side of the keyboard instead of on the front of the top row of keys as
on non-APL keyboards; PF13 through PF24 keys are not available on APL keyboards.
The Numeric Lock feature is available for all APL keyboards.
87- and -88-Key Typewriter/APL Keyboards
The 87-key typewriter/APL (U.S. English) keyboard is shown in Figure D-8
(the Japanese English typewriter/ APL keyboard has 88 keys). This keyboard is available
in all 3276 and 3278/3279 keyboard languages.
The typewriter/APL keyboard enables a 3276 or 3278/3279 operator to enter the 81
APL-specific characters as well as the 94-character-plus-space EBCDIC dual-case
character set. The following characters can be entered:
With APL "ofr'
94 EBCDIC characters plus space
With APL "on"
81
10
26
16
APL-specific characters plus:
numerics (0 through 9)
uppercase alphabet characters
invariant symbols (excluding & and %)
When the display station is flrSt turned on, the typewriter/APL keyboard operates
similarly to the 75-key typewriter keyboard without APL, with the exception of the
PFI through PF12 keys. Pressing the APL ON/OFF key (with the ALT key held down)
causes the keyboard to enter APL mode (the letters APL display in the Operator
Information Area); in this mode the APL characters on the right half of the keys
may be entered (the Shift, Lock, and ALT keys are used to select the desired character
on a key). The keyboard is returned to normal (non-APL) mode by pressing the APL
ON/OFF key again.
Ffaure 1).8. 87-Key Typewriter/APL Keyboard
Appendix D. APLrrext FeatuJe
0.9
88-Key Katakilna Typewrlter/APL Keyboard
The 88-key Katakana typewriter/ APL keyboard (available for IBM World Trade
Americas/Far East only) is sho~ in Figure D-9.
The Katakana typewriter/APL keyboard enables a 3276 or 3278/3279 operator to
enter the 81 APL-specific characters as well as the 127-plus-space Japanese Katakana
character set. The following characters can be entered:
With APL "off'
127-character Japanese Katakana set plus space
With APL "on"
81
10
26
16
APL-specific characters plus:
nwnerics (0 through 9)
uppercase alphabet characters
invariant symbols (excluding & and %)
When the display station is fust turned on, the typewriter/APL keyboard operates
like the 88-key Katakana typewriter keyboard without APL, with the exception of the
PFI through PF12 keys. Momentarily pressing the APL ON/OFF key (with the ALT
key held down) places the keyboard in APL downshift mode (the letters APL display
in the Operator Infonnation Area). APL upshift characters can be entered either by
pressing and holding either {} (upshift) key or by pressing the ~ (Lock) key; when the
keyboard is locked in APL upshift mode, pressing either 0 key returns the keyboard
to APL downshift mode. The APL characters on the right front of keys can be entered
by pressing and holding the ALT key. The keyboard is returned to non-APL mode
(ALPHA downshift) by pressing the APL ON/OFF key again.
APL Keyboard World Trade Considerations
The APL programming support does not support certain Canadian-French and
Katakana characters on the Canadian-French and Katakana typewriter/ APL keyboards.
The unsupported Canadian-French characters are all those enterable by a dead key
sequence except a,e,e, and u. The unsupported Katakana characters are those with I/O
interface codes that are not included in the 94-character-plus-space EBCDIC character
set. However, the 3276 control unit does not block these unsupported codes when they
are sent inbound to the host system.
Figure 1).9. SS-Key Katakana Typewriter/APL Keyboard
1).10
87-Key Typewriter/Text Keyboard
The 87-key typewriter/Text keyboard (shown in Figure D-IO) is a typewriter-like
keyboard with keys that contain both U.S. Engush and Text-specific characters.
This keyboard is available for U.S. English only (the Text keyboard is not available in
IBM Europe/Middle East/Africa countries).
The Text-specific characters are colored green (on white keys). The PFI through PFl2
keys on the typewriter/Text keyboard are located on the right side of the keyboard
instead of on the front of the top row of keys as on non-Text keyboards: PF 13 through
PF24 are not available on the typewriter/Text keyboard.
The 3276 or 3278/3279 operator can use the typewriter/Text keyboard to enter the
6S Text-specific characters as well as the 94-character-plus-space U.S. English character
set. The follOwing characters can be entered:
With Text "off'
94
U.S. English characters plus space
With Text "on"
6S
10
26
26
9
Text-specific characters plus:
numerics (0 through 9)
uppercase alphabet characters
lowercase alphabet characters
symbols ( • < ; , > ? :! )
When the display station is fust turned on, the typewriter/Text keyboard operates like
the 7S-key typewriter keyboard without Text, with the exception of the PFI through
PF 12 keys. Pressing the TEXT ON/OFF key causes the keyboard to enter Text mode
(the letters TEXT display in the Operator Infonnation Area); in this mode the text
characters on the right half of the keys may be entered (the Shift, Lock, and ALT
keys are used to select the desired character on a key). The keyboard is returned to
normal (non-Text) mode by pressing the TEXT ON/OFF key again.
Figure 1>-10. 87-Key Typewrlter/Text Keyboard
Appendix D. APLrrext Feature
1>-11
3230-2, 3268-2, and 3287-1 and -2 with APL/Text
The APL/Text feature for 3230, 3268, and 3287 (standard feature for 3230 and 3268,
special feature for 3287), and its prerequisite Extended Character Set Adapter enable
the 3230, 3268, and 3287 to print the following characterS:
• 94 EBCDIC characters plus space
• 81 APL-specific characters
• 37 Text-unique characters
• 10 graphic plot characters
3262-13, and 3289-1 and -2 with Text Print
The 3289 Text Print special feature (not available in IBM Europe/Middle East/
Africa countries) and the 3262 Text Print standard feature print the following
characters :
3262-13
3289-1 and 2
• 93 U.S. English characters plus space
• 32 TN characters
• 94 U.S. English characters
• 30 TN characters
Note: The 93-character U.S. English set for 3289 is identical with the
normal 94-character U.S. English set except the tilde ("') symbol is not
included.
The printing speed in lines per minute (lpm) varies with the size of the
character set as follows:
Print Bands
Characters per Set
48
64
94
96
125
128
Nominal Speed (lpm)
3289-1
3262-13
3289-2
325
230
155
120
80
400
300
230
40
160
.
180
125
Note: Actual printer throughput depends upon operational and system characteristics.
The print speed may be affected by such factors as communication line 'speed, control
unit load, character set, and application program.
Local or host-initiated copy operations from a 3278/3279 to a 3262/3289, with or
without the Text Print feature installed, are limited to the normal 94-character
U.S. English set.
BSC Copy Command
For control units operating under BSC, if APL-or TEXT-specific characters reside in
the device buffer, a copy operation initiated by the BSC Copy command will be allowed
only to another ECSA-featured device. If the "to" device is not equipped with an ECSA
feature, an operation check will be returned to the host.
1).12
Local Copy
A local copy from an ECSA featured display with APL/Text characters on the screen will
print correctly on an ECSA·featured 3287 printer with APL ROS installed. Local copy
from an ECSA·featured display with APL/Text characters on the screen will be allowed
to print on a non·ECSA·featured 3287 printer. The standard EBCDIC character set
will print correctly, but APL/Text·specific characters will print as EBCDIC characters
or hyphens.
Appendix D. APLtrext FeatuJe
0-13
Appendix E. Katakana Feature
This appendix contains Katakana unique infonnation interface codes and the keyboard
shift operations.
Interface Codes
Figure E-1 shows the Japanese Katakana EBCDIC interface codes for several control
unit/device combinations.
Katakana Keyboards Shift Operations
(3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279)
I
The Katakana keyboards shift operations are different from the EBCDIC keyboards
described in Chapter 2. The following paragraphs discuss the unique keys and operations.
IKatakana Shift Keys (3178,3278, and 3279)
Four shifts [upper and lower left (UL and LL) and upper and lower right (UR and LR)]
I on the Katakana keyboards are used with the 3178, 3276, 3278, and 3279 displays:
Shift
Data Entry Keyboard
Tvpewriter Keyboard
Operator Message
UL
~ Ie-ft
Alpha Symbol
It?
Alpha Symbol NUmeric
ALPHA ()
LL
~It
Alphameric
!If?
Alpha
ALPHA
UA
11 "t"le-l}
KANA Symbol
11Tlc~
KANA Symbol
1J -r ()
LA
1J-r
Katakana
1J-r
Katakana
1J"t"
The characters associated with each shift level are shown in the corresponding position
of the key tops. In nonnal operation, the appropriate shift key is pressed and released
to enter the required shift level; the keyboard remains in that shift level until another
is selected. However, in a programmed numeric field (program attribute), the keyboard
is automatically set to the upper left (UL) shift, and all characters for that shift are valid
unless a keyboard with the Numeric Lock feature is being used. The Numeric Lock
feature limits the entries to 0-9, minus (-), decimal sign, and DUP. This automatic UL
shift may be overridden by pressing and holding the desired shift key; releasing the
shift key returns the keyboard to the UL shift.
Holding a shift key when leaving the programmed numeric field causes the keyboard
to enter and remain in that shift level until another shift key is pressed.
On a data entry of data-entry keypunch layout keyboard, the Numeric Lock feature
is disabled while the Alpha, Numeric, Latin Shift, Lock, or upper left shift (3178,
3276, or 3278) key is operated.
I
r~
Appendix E. Katakana Feature
E-l
01
00
4567
Hr
00
0000
0
NUL
0001
1
SBA
0
0010
2
EUA
r
0011
3
IC
0100
4
0101
5
0110
6
7
0111
7
7'
1000
8
1001
9
1010
A
1011
B
1100
C
Bits
1101
0
1110
·E
1111
F
11
10
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
00
01
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
0
E
F
SP
&
-
$
0
%
I
PT
GE
CR
A
J
.,
7-
-"
B
K
S
2
C
L
T
3
1
,
.:J.
~
7-
"?
*
0
M
U
4
3
*
~
...
E
N
V
5
1J
7- .».
F
0
W
6
~
--
;I
G
P
X
7
9
)(
-=E
H
a
y
8
T
*
~
I
R
Z
9
.,
RA
-
...J
£
FF DUP
~
1
-!
EM
7
*"\7
.
Nl
'J
<
.~
:
I
¥
,
#
*
%
@
,
:::J
':/
/
~
.:J..
J:I
-It
y
/'
.,
3
SF
(
)
-
FM
+
;
>' =
A
I::
I)
I
-,
?
-t!
7
;"
"
v
fJ
';..'
.
.
Nota:
,. Olllnicter codB salgnm8lltl other thsn th088 .hown within sll outlined sre. of thi, chsrt are undefined. If an undefined
chsrscter code i. pf'OfJl'BfTlmed, the charscter thst will be dilPlayed or printed i, a hyph811 (-),. hex code 60 will be retumed
on a wbloquent read operstion. IBM ffJlefV91 the right to change st any time the chaTSCter di.played for an undefined
charscter code.
2 CR, NL, EM, and FF control Chat'BCtelB sre dilP'ayed or printed. blank chat'BCtef& The DUP snd FM control chsrat:telB
sre di."lsyedll6
* end,. f86P8Ctively.
3. Hex code 6A I. u.ed for CU sddffJS6ing, device addffJS6ing, buffer sddre.lng, and control PUrpOl8S (for exsmple, WCC snd
CCC), but hal no saociated graphic chst'BCter.
4. For AID, sttribute, write control (WCC), copy control (CCC), CU snd device addffJS6, buffer sddreu, .enl9, and .tetus
chsrscten, bit. 0 and' are B16igned.o that esch charscter can be repIWented by a graphic chat'BCter in Figure '-4.
.ee
6. For BSC data-link control chat'BCten,
Chapter 3. For the SCS control coda B810clatrJd with the SNA Chat'BCtrJr String
feature on 3230, 3262, 3268, 3287 (with the 3274/3276 Attschment feature) and 3289 printelB. see Chapter 2.
I
Ffaure E-l.
£.2
Japanese ICatakana EBCDIC I/O Interface Code for 3276 Units with 3178, 3230, 3262, 3268,
3278, 3279, 3287 (with 3276 Attachment FeatuJe), 3289, and 5210 Terminals Attached
-.....
Bits
0,1
2,3
~ Hex 0
Appendix F. Encrypt/Decrypt Feature
Encrypt/Decrypt Products
The IBM Cryptographic Subsystem is a combination hardware and programming
implementation of cryptography for data security. It consists of the following separate
products:
• IBM Programmed Cryptographic Facility Program Product
(OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 MVS only).
• ACF/VTAM (Level 3.0 or higher) Encrypt/Decrypt feature.
• 3276 Encrypt/Decrypt feature.
The rust two products reside at the host processor; the third resides in the control unit.
IBM Programmed Cryptographic FacUlty
Program Product
This product contains the follOwing functions: encrypt/decrypt, key generation, and
key management. The encrypt!decrypt function is an mM prograMmed implementation
of the Federal Data Encryptions Standard (DES) algoritlun as published by the National
Bureau of Standards in January 1977 and adopted as the United States Federal
Infonnation Processing Standard (FIPS 46) in July 1977.
The other functions of the IBM Programmed Cryptographic Facility generate new keys
upon request and in g~neral manage all the keys used throughout the network. Under the
IBM key management concept, since the enciphering algoritlun is published, protection
is derived from keeping the keys secret.
ACF/YTAM Encrypt/Decrypt Feature
This feature provides cryptographic support in ACF/VTAM by:
• Allowing the speCification of a physical cryptographic feature on a Logical Unit (LU)
basis.
• Being an interface with the Programmed Cryptographic Facility Program Product for
enciphering and deciphering messages and key management.
• Supporting cryptographic changes to SNA.
3276 Encrypt/Decrypt Feature
This feature provides hardware implementation of the DES algoritlun for encrypting
and decrypting data on a TP line. It is applicable to the 3276 Models 11-14 only.
When used with the ACF/VTAM Encrypt/DecIYpt feature described above, data
transmitted via the transmission subsystem can be safeguarded through cryptography
from modification, disclosure, or both. Installed in the control unit with SDLC line
control, this feature provides encrypt!decrypt services for up to 8 "attached terminals.
Included in the feature are:
Appendix F. Encrypt-DeCIYPt FeatuJe
F-I
• A single secondary LU key (terminal master key) storage element and logic to
perfonn enciphering and deciphering operations for secondary LUs by blockchaining.
• A security keylock located in the customer access area of the control units.
• A mercury battery, IBM PN 1743456, to sustain the tenninal master key when
the control unit power is off.
When the Encrypt/Decrypt feature is used in conjunction with other IBM Cryptographic
Subsystem products and is operating in an SNA/SDLC environment, data may be
transmitted between the control unit and the host computer in a fonn that precludes
accidental or intentional disclosure; neither can the data be modified without detection.
In SNA tenninology, communication occurs between network nodes (application
programs and tenninals), each node being an LU. Data may be transmitted between
the host computer (the primary LU) and a terminal attached to the control unit
(the secondary LU) once the LUs have established an LU-LU session. When the
cryptographic function is not used, the data is transmitted in the clear, that is, not
enciphered. When the cryptographic function is used, the data is enciphered, thus
pennitting the end-users to communicate the data between the LUs in a secure manner.
It is hnportant to note that only the data transmitted via the transmission subsystem
between the host computer and the control unit may be protected by cryptography.
Data passing between the control unit and its attached terminals (display stations and
printers) is not enciphered.
Two types of cryptographic LU-LU sessions may be established: required cryptographic
and selective cryptographic sessions. In the first type, all data transmitted between the
host computer and the control units is enciphered during the LU-LU session. In the
second type, data is enciphered at the option of the application program; thus,
enciphering of data can be selected or suppressed by the host LU, but not by the control
unitLU.
Establishing Cryptographic Sessions
Before a cryptographic session can be established, the ACF/VTAM Encrypt/Decrypt
feature must recognize a request for a cryptographic session and detennine the
cryptographic capability of the host processor and the control unit. The ACF/VTAM
Encrypt/Decrypt feature calls the IBM Progranuned Cryptographic Facility Program
Product to generate a cryptographic session key in two versions. The fust version is
enciphered under the host master key and is stored in the host processor. From this
fust version, the program product produces a second version enciphered under the
secondary LU key. The secondary LU key is a key-encrypting key associated with the
secondary LU and is used to protect the cryptographic session key during transmission
to the secondary LU. The cryptographic session key is used to encipher and decipher
data that will be transmitted between the primary and secondary LUs once a cryptographic session has been established.
To establish a cryptographic session, the host processor transmits the enciphered
cryptographic session key to the control unit as part of the Bind command. The control
unit can decipher the session key, since the secondary LU key is known (having
previously been installed in the control unit by a security officer).
F-2
In addition to storing the encrypted session key, the control unit takes part in the
following cryptographic protocol:
A pseudo-random value (N) is encrypted under the just-received session key (KS),
and this 8-byte quantity EKS(N) is sent to the host as part of the Bind response.
A valid host will decrypt EKS(N), invert 4 bytes of N, re-encipher the value,
and send this 8-byte quantity EKS(N) to the control unit as part of the Qrypto
verification (CRV) command.
The control unit decrypts EKS(N), inverts N, and compares this value N with the
original N. If the values are identical, a positive response is sent to the host, and the
conditions of a cryptographic protocol have been met. This cryptographic protocol
serves two purposes:
It verifies that both host and control unit are using the same data-encrypting
key(KS).
It validates the host's cryptographic capability, thus preventing an active wiretapper from using the control unit to decipher captured enciphered data.
The following chart illustrates how the cryptographic protocol fits in with the SNA
commands which invoke and tenninate a cryptographic session:
PLU-Host Application
Bind + Enciphered Session
SLU-Terminal Devices
Key--------.....
~
.........- - - - - - - - - - - - - - Bind Response + Enciphered N
CRV + Enciphered
N-----------......~
.........- - - - - - - - - - - - - - CRV Response
SDT---_____________....
~
........- - - - - - - - - - - - - - SOT Response
Oau-----------------....~
...,......- - - - - - - - - - - - - - Oata
UNBIND----------------------------~
•
........- - - - - - - - - - - - - - Unbind Response
Appendix F. EnCIYPt-Decrypt Feature
F-3
J
~
Appendix G. Record Fonnatted Maintenance
Statistics (RECFMS) Formats
This appendix describes the fonnats of the four RECFMS responses the 3276 Control
Unit Display Station can send to the host system in response to an REQMS command.
Counters in type 1, 2, and 3 responses do not wrap when they exceed their maximum
value; they maintain the maximum value.
The log areas are reset when:
• The 3276 is tUrned off{types 1,2, and 3).
• The execution ofRECFMS is completed nonnally as the response to an REQMS with
a "RESET" request (types 1,2, and 3).
REQMS Request Type 1 - Link Test Statistics
Bytes 14, 15 = Number of times the Test command was received.
Bytes 16, 17 =Number of times the Test response was transmitted.
REQMS Request Type 2 - Summary Counters
Byte 14
= Mask bits of the summary counters supported.
All supported counters, including those containing zero count,
are sent to the host by RECFMS.
Bit 0 = 1 = Machine Check.
Bit 1 =1 = Communication Check.
Bit 2 = I = Program Check.
Bit 3 - 7 = Reserved.
Bytes 15, 16 = Reserved.
Bytes 17, 18 = Machine Check Summary Counter.
Bytes 19,20 = Communication Check Summary Counter.
Bytes 21, 22 = Program Check Summary Counter.
REQMS Request Type 3 - Communication Adapter
Data Error Counts
Byte 14
= Adapter Type.
= X'OI' =CCA Link Adapter.
= X'02' =(not applicable to the 3276).
Byte 15
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
= X'03' - X'FF' =Reserved.
= Mask bits of the Communication Adapter Error Counters supported.
All supported counters, including those containing zero count, are
sent to the nost by RECFMS.
0 =1 = Nonproductive Timeout.
1 = 1 = Idle Timeout.
2 =1 = Write Retry.
3 =1 = Overrun.
4 = 1 = Underrun.
5 = 1 = Connection Problem.
6 =1 = FCS Error.
7 =1 = Primary Abort.
Appendix G. RECFMS
G-I
Byte 16
= Mask bits of the Communication Adapter Error Counters supported.
Bit 0 1
Bit 1 = 1
Bit 2 =1
Bit 3· 7
Byte 17
Byte 18
Byte 19
Byte 20
Byte 21
Byte 22
Byte 23
Byte 24
Byte 25
Byte 26
Byte 27
Byte 28
All supported counters, including those containing zero count, are
sent to the host by RECFMS.
= Command Reject.
= DCE Error.
= Write Timeout.
Reserved.
= Reserved.
= Nonproductive Timeout Counter.
= Idle Timeout Counter.
= Write Retry Counter.
= Overrun Counter.
= Underrun Counter.
= Connection Problem Counter.
FCS Error Counter.
Primary Abort Counter.
= Command Reject Counter.
= DCE Error Counter.
= Write Timeout Counter.
=
=
=
=
REQMS Request Type 5 - 3276 Machine Level
Infonnation
Bytes 14-229 =3276 Machine Level Information.
Bytes 14-205 = ROS chip part number information; each is made up of two 4·byte chip
part numbers.
I Refer to ROS EC History (SYI8-2023) to cross-reference chip PNs and machine EC
level.
Byte
14· 21
22· 29
30- 37
38· 45
46· 53
54- 61
62- 69
70· 77
78· 85
86· 93
94-101
102-109
110-117
118·125
126·133
134·141
142·149
150·157
158·165
166·173
174-181
182-189
190·197
198·205
0..2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
K2
K2
K2
K2
J2
J2
J2
J2
H2
H2
H2
H2
K2
K2
K2
K2
J2
J2
J2
J2
H2
H2
H2
H2
ChipPNs
- Module 1
- Module2
- Module3
- Module4
- Module 1
- Module2
- Module3
- Module4
- Module 1
- Module2
- Module3
- Module4
- ModuleS
- Module6
- Module7
- Module 8
- Module 5
- Module6
- Module7
- Module 8
- Module 5
- Module6
- Module 7
- Module8
Note: Zeros for a chip PN means there is no
ROS chip for that position.
~
Abbreviations
cmd. Command
CNCL. Cancel
cnt. Count
A
COL. Column
A. Attention
CONT. Contention
ACK. Positive acknowledge
cps. Characters per second
ACTLU. Activate logical unit
CPU. Central processing unit
ACTPU. Activate physical unit
CR. Command Reject, carriage retum
ADDCNVRT. Add Converter
CRT. Cathode-ray tube
ADDR, adr. Address
CRY. ClYpto Verification
AID. Attention Identifier
ALPHA. Alphameric
CSW. Channel status word
ctl. Control
ALT. Alternate
CTS. Clear to Send
A/N. Alphameric/numeric
CU. Control unit
APL A programming language
CUE. Control Unit End
ASCO. American National Standard Code for Information
CURSR. Cursor
Interchange
async. Asynchronous
D
atb, Atb. Attribute
D. Display
ATT. Attribute
DAA. Data access arrangement
ATI'N. Attention
DACTLU. Deactivate logical unit
B
DACTPU. Deactivate physical unit
DAF. Destination address field
B. Busy
BB. Begin bracket
DB. Device Busy
DC. Data Check
DC. Begin chain
DE. Device End
DCC. Block check character
Dec. Decimal
BCEe. Begin chain/end chain
DEL Delete
BETB. Between-bracket
DES. DataenClYPtionstandard
BIU. Basic information unit
DEY. Device
BOC. Bus-out check
OPe. Data flow control
bps. Bits per second
DISC. Disconnect
BS. Back space
DLE. Data link escape
BSC. Binary synchronous communication
DM. Disconnect mode
C
DR. Definite response
OS. Data Set
C. Column
CA. Character Attribute
CALC. Calculator
CAW. Channel address word
OSe. Data stream compatibility
DSR. Data Set Ready
DTR. Data Terminal Ready
ce. Control check, Chain Command (flag)
DUP. Duplicate
ccc.
E
Copy control character
CCW. Channel control word
CD. Change direction
CEo Channel End
char. Character
Chk. Check
EAU. Erase All Unprotected
ED. End brackets
EBCDIC. Extended binary
--.
Q)
------- --------- - -------
~
N
o
Q)
IBM 3270 Infonnation Display System
READER'.
COMMENT
FORM.
GA18-2081-1
This manual is part of a 'library that serves as a reference source for systems analysts, programmers, and
operators of IBM systems. This form may be used to communicate your views about this publication.
They will be sent to the author's department for whatever review and action, if any, is $Seemed appropriate.
Comments may be written in your own language; use of English is not required.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation whatever. You may, of course, continue to use the information you supply.
Note: Copies of IBM publications are not stocked at the location to which this form is addressed.
Please direct any requests for copies of publications, or for assistance in using your IBM system, to your IBM
representative or to the IBM branch office serving your locality.
Possible topics for comment are:
.aE
i~
Ii
-§
Clarity
tii
ea:
Accuracy
Completeness
Organization
Coding
Retrieval
Legibility
If you wish a reply, give your name and mailing address:
Cs
il
=S
21
!e
.::a
I!'
.. rl=a!
::a§
·0
J•
-I:
t:
Ill!
_::I
••
::II
G)
C
::J
Q
c:
0
cc
";f
0
'S
(J
la
H:
1::1
"i.=
.1.1
CDD.
•
15
z
What is your occupation? __________________________________________________________
Number of latest Technical Newsletter (if any) concerning this publication: _______________________________
Thank you for your cooperation. No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the U.S.A. (Elsewhere, an IBM office
or representative will be happy to forward your comments.)
GA 18-2081-1
Reader's Comment Form
Fold and tape
Please Do Not Staple
Fold and tape
..........................................................................................
111111
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK, N.Y. U.S.A.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
DEPARTMENT 825J
1133 WESTCHESTER AVENUE
WHITE PLAINS, NEW YORK 10604 U. s. A
..........................................................................................
Please Do Not Staple
Fold and tape
Fold and tape
l
'0
~
5'
i
5'
(..
CD
'0
CD
:)
Gl
-»
co
--------- --------- - --------_.-
~
--.
i
IBM 3270 Infonnation Display System
READER'.
COMMENT
FORM
GAl 8-2081-1
This manual is part of a library that serves as a reference source for systems analysts, programmers, and
operators of IBM systems. This form may be used to communicate your views about this publication.
They will be sent to the author's department for whatever review and action, if any, is deemed appropriate.
Comments may be written in your own language; use of English is not required.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation whatever. You may, of course, continue to use the information you supply.
Note: Copies ollBM publications are not stocked at the location to which this lorm is addressed.
Please direct any requests lor copies oj publications, or lor assistance in using your IBM system, to your IBM
representative or to the IBM branch office serving your locality.
Possible topics for comment are:
-!
i.!
I.!!
-5
Clarity
t.,.!
Accuracy
Completeness
Organization
Coding
Retrieval
Legibility
If you wish a reply, give your name and mailing address:
~S
=.II
2)
JE
.:.
J:aji
·0
~:
.1
a.
-I:
t:
ILl!
.:a
••
iii
~
c
~
at
c
0
~
!!
{l
..
0
'S
(,)
il
1::1
'1. 1
II
iz
What is your occupation? _____________________________________________________________
Number of latest Technical Newsletter (if any) concerning this publication: __________________________
Thank you for your cooperation. No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the U.S.A. (Elsewhere, an IBM office
or representative will be happy to forward your comments.)
GA 18-2081-1
Reader's Comment Form
Fold and tape
Please Do Not Staple
Fold and tape
..........................................................................................
III II I
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK. N.Y. U.S.A.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
DEPARTMENT 825J
1133 WESTCHESTER AVENUE
WHITE PLAINS, NEW YORK 10604 U. S. A
..........................................................................................
Please Do Not Staple
Fold and tape
Fold and tape
Q
~.
--
»
co
-- ------.-~------ -- _.-------
(!)
IBM 3270 Infonnation Display System
READER's
COMMENT
FOftM.
GA18-2081-1
This manual is part of a library that serves as a reference source for systems analysts, programmers, and
operators of IBM systems. This form may be used to communicate your views about this publication.
They will be sent to the author's department for whatever review and action, if any, is deemed appropriate.
Comments may be written in your own language; use of English is not required.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation whatever. You may, of course, continue to use the information you supply.
Note: Copies of IBM publications are not stocked at the location to which thisform is addressed.
Please direct any requests for copies of publications. or for assistance in using your IBM system. to your IBM
representative or to the IBM branch office serving your locality.
Possible topics for comment are:
.,IE
i.e
(.!
Clarity
iii
all:
If you wish a reply, give your name and mailing address:
-ii
is
Accuracy
Completeness
Organization
Coding
Retrieval
Legibility
~l
~JI
I)
le
'&=-
I~
..
e
=-ii
eo
rl;
.~
Iii
-I:
'I:
le
e::l
••
I=-1..
0
c
::J
all
c
0
<
II
i.
(;
s
0
5i
1::1
,&1
.J
CD ...
..
15
z
What is your occupation? ________________________________________________________________
Number of latest Technical Newsletter (if any) concerning this publication: _______________________________
Thank you for your cooperation. No postage stamp necessary if mailed in the U.S.A. (Elsewhere, an IBM office
or representative will be happy to forward your comments.)
I
If:
GA 18·2081-1
I~
I~
I~
I~
Reader's Comment Form
c:
:J
CD
Fold and tape
Please Do Not Staple
Fold and tape
..........................................................................................
111111
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK, N.Y. U.S.A.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION
DEPARTMENT 825J
1133 WESTCHESTER AVENUE
WHITE PLAINS, NEW YORK 10604 U. S. A
..........................................................................................
Please Do Not Staple
Fold and tape
Fold and tape
C)
--.
»
------- --------- - --------_.-
(!)
co
~
o
co
GAl8-2081·1
,
OJ
;::
w
'"
-.J
0
:>
~
0
3
m
~.
0
:>
<)
-.
"'.
"-<.,
en
-<
~
~
~
3
"Tl
"
Z
"!3
.'"0
!-.J3
0
!3
w
-'"
0
0
~
0
0
6
~
•"
",.
",.
C-
'm
"m,
G)
»
---- ----- ---- ----"
----
qo
'"0~
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Create Date : 2016:03:20 12:10:46Z Creator : PFU ScanSnap Organizer 5.6.10 #iX500 Modify Date : 2018:10:09 19:35:04-07:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:d72f1de9-8709-41a0-9ab0-dba0f3fc04d0 Instance ID : uuid:480aeda1-01b9-f447-a9f4-f262520bac06 Creator Tool : PFU ScanSnap Organizer 5.6.10 #iX500 Metadata Date : 2018:10:09 19:35:04-07:00 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Count : 353EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools